Home

VX7 Reference Guide - L - ARC - Honeywell Scanning and Mobility

1. M 124 A HIT Kam CE E rrr 125 A dei MEMINI MM I EIU EU UE 125 DID ODD NE mere 125 Mau Ic PT 126 GEETA m 126 A ENa 127 DR scii AS 127 s a i MERE T PTS 127 Terminal Seryer t Dont LICENSES iia 128 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents Vil Molame ANG Sounds ii ado 128 RN TOO 128 CF Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs eese 129 Access Files op the Flash Collins 129 Backup VX7 Files using AcliVeSyne cnisia 130 PESO UNGIICS PNE E 130 YA IL AS I ID hip oi id 130 se al Port TERSSIGE 21 A a a EH NAE Pod eda 130 USB Transit 131 CTV CE eas cae T TE m UT m 131 itor eM MEE 131 TiS COMME CE enan LEE 132 Seral GONnMCCHON a a a OE aE E L iaa ie 132 USB Comme MNT TT ESTE EO AE da id 132 Radio Connie as 132 Important Information Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re comnection ooooccnoconccconcconcnononos 132 Troubles TONO E werr 133 ca Communication On 134 Technical Specifications Connection Cable iia 135 Lu ea I I STONE ONT NNI NEM 136 LAUNCH LA e eec p eu LL E 136 REGEDIT EXE a iii E 138 AE AD Ed ERA E ree ern ve ERE AAA eRe AE SER E 138 REGDUMP E AE 5 5 etus ice carte dialecto de 138 WARMBOOT EXE cansa ld 138 ia ieres nena a e Ea E a E EE ON PENE ESE N EEAO SUORE EiS EEEn 138 VXI Command He Utilities ina a aoa 138 COLDBOOT E E eena O ee Beene 138 J gr UMD Nl sates treati
2. 243 Cisco AGLI as sca bonsai wren ustedes tutte udo NS etu tari MN emo pesos tb taaaiel st adus AE 243 BAPE TLS Authentication Lonfe rebiotk sus apu e riori HDub o daHi Soap dU RUNG UM pai MM Nd PM tiU b de 246 User Coda ES 246 Setting EAP TLS Parameters sucissscctesscrsospsieaaaeisnaiatassandunessanssaashenaugelandedulgasaseiniunacatannereds licor 247 Validating the Server Certificaten noii e E aE O 249 WPA PSK Conii odiato A E Idm ER DE M 250 A 251 suci A A 231 MA Information A A e RM a HMM 251 Wireless Information TA MP a AS A 232 A MH 252 Add anew COE A Ea 233 Selecta User CO onda 254 OTIS cdt 255 Root C AIM ia a a E 225 Generating a Root CA Constan 233 Installing a Root CA Leloir 257 User I ER 239 Gen rating a User Certificate MRNA 259 Tnstallinge a Us r T SR DOUG oli 264 CHAPTER 6 APPLOCK 269 A E S A IA T N IA T A E E E E E A 269 Determining Your AppLock Ves uri ia 270 M lti Appheation AOL ONG siii 270 Rls Application JOD ODE s esastee tun RR Mtn neon R 271 Setup a Now DOVIDO eo 272 Admmistrahon MOUS srren 273 Jo AM Ate 273 lx X A X O O O 7 274 End User Switching Technique siii 275 Using Eau NL owe 275 Usine the Swich Kay SEQUE OS dni E ar EE AS 275 dcr cines RRA 276 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC
3. Date Time April 2005 E Cr Ime sm S M T WTF S SN 27 28 29 30 31 1 2 Time Zone 34556 7 Ki GMT 05 00 Easter Time US amp Canada y 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 12345 67 Apply Figure C 8 Date Time Properties There is little change from general desktop PC Date Time Properties options Adjust the settings and click the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear If an Internet connection is available click the Sync button to synchronize time with a time server The VX7 includes a GrabTime utility e GrabTime can be executed manually at any time by clicking the Sync button on this control panel e GrabTime can be configured to synchronize the time at boot up Please see Enabling GrabTime later in this chapter for details E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 320 Control Panel Options Dialing Access Start Settings Control Panel Dialing Dialing Properties Figure C 9 Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Tap the and follow the instructions in Help VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 321 Display Acce
4. ss 87 309 Fuse CT 78 G General cooooononccccnnonccononancnocnnnnnononnnncrnnanonoronanoos 126 334 Getting Started sse 4 H Hardware Configuration eese 28 MEISIOBD A s tsp netter bete epe ren 27 E EQ VX7RG L ARC 363 Hardware version cccooocccononncnnonnncnonnnnnnrnnanoos 186 229 Hat Encoding and RFID esses 351 Heater Touchscreen esee 65 Hexadecimal Decimal Equivalent 0x00 to Ox9F oo eeceeeeseetecneceneeeeesecaeeseeneeerenee 353 OxAO to OxFF serisinin sse errin 354 Hidden Keys renes 54 57 Host Connection prerequisites esesssss 11 Hotkey ADpLOCLE iia ertet tenete tede 282 How To Initiate Page Up command 59 Install Radio Card sss 68 Keyboard data entry sess 8 Toggle 2nd key on and off 59 Toggle Caps Lock on and off 59 A aer aE E E A EEEE 59 HyperTertninal cuina nad 133 I Icons Explorer Internet 83 305 My Cotp lter eerte erento 83 305 My Documents seen 83 305 Recycle Binz eset nico 83 305 Idle Timer 106 321 Inbox Outlook quin ca eee ee ie 310 Input Panel cines 107 322 Install Equipment Needed sss 68 A E EE E 78 Type II 2 4GHz Radio Card 68 72 73 Internet Explorer ADDLOOCk snc E
5. From the Select Active Profile pull down list select External Settings Click OK and warmboot Please remove and re insert the adapter to have this change take effect Alternatively turn the device off and on Figure 5 39 Cisco ACU Reboot Message After booting up the Microsoft Zero Config tool should start If it does not start configuring the wireless connection by clicking on the icon on the task bar shown in below EX Figure 5 40 Microsoft Wireless Connection Icon VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 233 The Wireless Network Connection screen appears Figure 5 41 Wireless Information Screen Make sure the Notify me when new wireless networks are available box is not checked Click the Advanced button Advanced Wireless Settings Only access points Figure 5 42 Advanced Wireless Settings Make sure the Use Windows to configure my wireless settings box is checked Set the Networks to access drop down box to Only access points Click the OK button to return to the Wireless Information Screen Click the Add New line E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 234 Cisco Radio Wireless Network Properties Network name SSID peapTest This is a computer to computer ad hoc Wireless network key WEP This network requires a key for Encryption TKIP y Authentication we A y network wireless access points are not used Net
6. sess 1 Terminal Emulator connect sess 11 Tile etn Per te Hes 106 321 Time Zone sesi urie terao a EE RE ERES 104 319 Toggle 2nd key on and off sssss 59 Torque Wrench sese 68 TO UCA iia 9 65 Data Entry siii ainia ii tara 9 Finger or Stylus scccssecssseseesesersneronceeroseneenes 9 Heat ita o aa 65 Transcend 89 311 Translate AM ta 175 Translate control COdeS cooocoocccnocncoconononocoonaconnos 175 Troubleshooting A CHVES VOC niet tnt tribns 133 AppLock Password ees 274 Multi Application AppLock 286 Type II 2 4GHz Radio Card 68 72 73 VX7 Reference Guide Index U Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS 30 UPS entere eee aime ades 30 Operating Temperature Specifications 297 Storage Temperature Specifications 297 USB CONNECT si ic iinet ecient eas 42 USB Connector Location ooooonoccccononocanononancnonannnonon 6 USB Mouse cti A ce eek 10 User Certificates AA A 259 Installing on VX7 sss 264 User specific application version information 92 314 Utilities eicere eter RH dew 136 V Vehicle Chassis Ground esses 48 Vehicle POWet tasas 30 74 Adapting VX1 2 4 Power Supply 77 Video Subsystem seen 29 View DIS Plays E oyran en 65
7. E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 138 VX7 Utilities REGEDIT EXE Registry Editor LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made REGLOAD EXE Double tapping a registry settings file e g REG causes RegLoad to open the file and make the indicated settings in the registry This is similar to how RegEdit works on a desktop PC The REG file format is the same as on the desktop PC REGDUMP EXE Registry dump Saves a copy of the registry as a text file The file REG TXT is located in the root folder Note The REG TXT file is not saved in persistent storage To use the REG TXT file as a reference in the even of a coldboot LXE recommends copying the file to the SYSTEM directory on the VX7 or storing a copy of the file on a PC WARMBOOT EXE Double click this file to warm boot the computer i e all RAM is preserved It automatically saves the registry before rebooting which means configuration changes are not lost WAVPLAY EXE Double tapping a sound file e g WAV causes WavPlay to open the file and run it in the background VX7 Command line Utilities Command line utilities can be executed by Start Run program name COLDBOOT EXE Command line utility which performs a cold boot all RAM is erased Passwords are lost upon cold boot If a password is set that password must be entered to begin the cold boot power cycle pr
8. Enter the password VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 217 Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab Please review Windows Certificates Store vs Certs Path earlier in this chapter Once successfully authenticated import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox Credentials ES User user2 Password LXE CA Cert roi trusted store Es Validate server Use MS store Exc cma Figure 5 23 PEAP GTC Certificate Filename If using the Windows certificate store e Check the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store e To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button e Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox e Select the desired certificate and click Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option e Leave the Use MS store box unchecked e Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox Click OK then click Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP MSCHAP for the user authentication For information on generating a Root CA certificate please see Root CA Certificate later in this chapter Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate E
9. occurs Please see Power Modes in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout IMPORTANT There is no Suspend mode on the VX7 If the Suspend timer is enabled the VX7 will shut down when the Suspend timer expires Power Properties Device Status Power Scheme Schemes Switch state to User Idle Switch state to System Idle Switch state to Suspend ac Power 5 Never y Never y Never y Figure C 19 Power Properties The Device Status tab displays the status of power managed devices Note that since the VX7 does not support power management all devices show the high power level There are no user options on this screen VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 331 Regional Settings Access Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and language settings No change from general desktop PC Regional Settings Properties options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Options and defaults for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details Factory Default Settings Regional Setting English United States Number 123 456 789 00 123 456 789 00 neg Currency 1
10. A ey ipe a TR 107 Internet Op RD Le oo sen dioit A da em emote 108 Keyboard a soe eua URNAM MN MEME MEME MM MU NDAR MN E UEM 109 A A Y 110 PO AG m H 110 E DP NNMERO 111 px 50 M PH 112 How Toc Remap a Sinple ainia idos idos 112 How To Remap a Key Ii a 112 How To Remap an Application Ian io 112 How To Remap a Command AAA 113 Mo 114 MOUSE A 115 MX3X V CEN EN mmm 115 E GOOD OL esteui sueta diac Sad eee cM E quM MESA ad Gc MD M A 115 Enable TCP IP Version Oississtacssacosssssanesteasaccancssaossdsasscstanssaanadddadawneastoanbadassestaaasaaenlaannesnagsaaesbansadta 115 Allow Remote Desktop Artola da den eii 115 Autolauneh Times VERO a dadas 116 N aera ee H 116 CapsEoek EP 116 bunk c ous 116 Touch Screen Disable vic 117 Touch Screen Heater Disable t RR UR EROR NOU n MR SINN 13 Screen size DA AU us sa sciendi ta sine borea P yb Feb bee rr o dolre tb et Orts 117 Statis uoi CT P 117 Network and Dialup Conn OR A 118 OWD et cR 119 PUEDE eset RE Er el Ree i M A dte d iE 120 A POR sss tases Reti iplb air AER Gp M accitis api ccba ab AUR TUA Mp A L udn abu cil d cV A Rud 121 POMCIA ii O 122 l2 l0 ineno 123 Regional NI rn toas 124 A 124 See T eee c
11. Double click My Computer then Storage Card folder Select NK BIN EBOOT NBO XSCALE BIT Select Edit Copy Tap Back Arrow Doubleclick System folder Select Edit Paste When asked Overwrite click Yes to All Additionally a REFLASH TAG file is needed to trigger the reflash This file can be created on the VX7 or copied to it along with the system files The contents of the file are unimportant but the file must be named REFLASH TAG and it must be in the System folder with the new system load When the copy process finishes remove the he PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card Select Start Run and type Coldboot When booting the VX7 looks for a file named REFLASH TAG in the System folder When this file is encountered the VX7 loads a new bootloader image eboot nb0 into the boot flash The tag file is deleted and the VX7 is rebooted to begin using the new boot loader If there is no nbO file it does not re flash and deletes the REFLASH TAG The VX7 automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader Loading OS Image is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading all software upgrades are complete Secure the user access cover using the captive screws E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 142 Clearing Persistent Storage Clearing Persistent Storage The coldboot utility sets all registry settings back to LXE factory defaults No other clearing is available or necessary Keyboard Backlighting
12. E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 286 Troubleshooting AppLock Troubleshooting AppLock The mobile device won t switch from Administration mode to end user mode e Ifthe configuration is valid for one application but not the other the switch to end user mode fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered e If two copies of the same application are configured but the application only allows one copy to run at a time for example Microsoft Pocket Word and LXE RFTerm the switch to end user fails AppLock stays in Administration mode and is stopped until the Administrator password is entered The hotkey sequence needed is not allowed What does this mean When the Administrator is selecting a hotkey sequence to use when switching user modes they are not allowed to enter key combinations that are reserved by installed software applications LXE has validated RFTerm key combinations ONLY When RFTerm is installed on the mobile device and an RFTerm restricted key sequence is specified as a hotkey sequence by the Administrator the following error message is displayed in a message box Selected hotkey is not allowed Please reenter When RFTerm is not installed on the mobile device the RFTerm keys are not restricted from use See Also Appendix D Reference Material sections titled AppLock Error Messages and AppLock Registry Settings VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L A
13. Enter ToAdmin Entering the function that handles a mode switch into LOG_PROCESSING admin mode Enter ToUser Entering the function that handles the mode switch to LOG_PROCESSING user mode Enter verify password Entering the password verification processing LOG_PROCESSING Exit AppLockEnum Windows There are two exit paths from the enumeration function LOG PROCESSING Found This message denotes the enumeration function found the application Exit AppLockEnum Windows Not There are two exit paths from the enumeration function LOG PROCESSING found This message denotes the enumeration function did not find the application Exit DecryptPwd Exiting password decryption processing LOG PROCESSING Exit EncryptPwd Exiting password encryption processing LOG PROCESSING Exit FullScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen to full LOG PROCESSING screen Exit GetAppInfo Processing is at the end of the function that retrieved the LOG PROCESSING application information from the registry Exit password dialog Exiting password prompt processing LOG PROCESSING Exit password dialog cancel Exiting password prompt w cancel LOG PROCESSING Exit password dialog OK Exiting password prompt successfully LOG PROCESSING E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 342 Message Exit password timeout Explanation and or corrective action Exiting password timeout processing AppLock Error Messages Level LOG_PROCESSING Exit restart app timer
14. Physical Description and Layout Chapter 4 System Configuration Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Revision C October 2005 Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 4 System Configuration Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration E EQ VX7RG L ARC 355 vember 2004 Explanation Revised Document Conventions When To Use This Guide El gt Touchscreen and Mouse and Accessories sections Specified the proper USB adapter cable to use in Connect section Added Identifying Your VX7 USB Keyboard Mouse and Touchscreen Heater sections Updated Video Subsystem Antenna Connections The Keyboards On Off Switch General Windows CE NET Keyboard Shortcuts and CAPS LED sections Replaced CapsLock Scroll Lock and the VX7 section with CapsLock and the VX7 and Scroll Lock and the VX7 sections Replaced Antenna Connector section with Antenna Connections section Revised About Administrator Control LAUNCH EXE Reflash the VX T Accessibility and Date Time sections Added 2 4GHz Radio Configuration Changing the Display Resolution Disabling the Touchscreen Heater Configuring CapsLock Behavior and Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages sections Removed Cisco Aironet Configuration Utility ACU and Symbol sections This informat
15. The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button Click the OK button then the Commit button Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is property configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used If changes are made to the stored credentials click Commit to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile or global parameters Notes More details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following in this chapter If invalid credentials are entered into the stored credentials the authentication will fail No error message is displayed and the user is not prompted to enter valid credentials E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 206 Summit Radio How to Use Sign On Screen After completing the other entries in the profile click on the Credentials button Leave the Username and Password blank No entries are necessary on the Credentials screen for LEAP or WPA LEAP For PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store For EAP TLS also import the User Certificate i
16. The internal ATA System card does not appear in the Storage Manager menu VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options Stylus Double Tap Calibration Access 333 Start Settings Control Panel Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Stylus Properties fa OK x Double Tap Calibration If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the center keep the stylus on the screen slide it over the target s center and then lift the stylus To start tap Recalibrate Recalibrate Figure C 20 Stylus Properties Recalibration Start Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Repeat as the target moves around the screen Press the Esc key to cancel E EQ VX7RG L ARC Figure C 21 Stylus Properties Recalibration VX7 Reference Guide 334 Control Panel Options System Access Start Settings Control Panel System Icon Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Factory Default Settings General N A Memory 1 3 storage 2 3 program memory Device Name VXCO0001 Device Description LXE VXC
17. ActiveSync to begin the process Click the Connect button Tap the Syne Now button to synchronize with the PC Tap the Disconnect button to disconnect tno ED a a To modify the Synchronization settings see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Start Menu Program Options 309 Connect Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host Several pre defined connect setups are included in the factory setup e COMI direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud e COMG direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud e USB direct connect The default connection 1s USB direct connect After a connect setup is selected Start Programs Communication Connect will start to connect to a host After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established the ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the radio link See Also Important Information Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server The server defaults to Off for security unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu 12 The COM3 port is labeled COM2 3 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 310 Start Menu Program Options Command Prompt Inbox Access Start Programs Command Prompt x Pocket CMD v 4 20 gt Figure C 1 Pocket
18. Copyrights N A General System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights Computer Processor Type intel Corp ARM XSca Expansion Slots Memory 36044 KB RAM System Microsoft Windows CE NET Version 4 20 1996 2003 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright laws Registered to Figure C 22 System General tab System This screen is presented for information only The System parameters cannot be changed by the user Computer The processor type is listed The type cannot be changed by the user The name of the installed radio card is listed in the dropdown list Total computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system Hence a system with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE operating system This is actual DRAM memory and does not include internal flash or the internal ATA card used for storage VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 335 Memory System Properties General Memory Copyrights Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move slider to the right for more storage room Only unused RAM can be adjusted Storage LEDITOCECKEUCOLEOHCOCUBIGOETUCPBECPCDETOCEHCCHG
19. DS3408 Standard Focus D9 Interface Cable 9ft Imager DS3408 Direct Park Marking D9 Interface Cable 9ft E EQ VX7RG L ARC 9000151KEYBRD 9000152KEYBRD 9000159KEYBRD 9000154KEYBRD 9000052CABLE 9000075CABLE 9000072CABLE 9000053CABLE 9000A054CBL6D9D9 9000054CABLE 9000077CABLER 9000A318PSACUS R 9000A318PSACWW R 9000376BATTERY 9000063CABLE 153180 0001 9000283ANTENNA 9000282ANTENNA 9000284ANTENNA 9000285ANTENNA 9000A510STYLUS 9000511FILM 9000076CABLE 9000601 HEADSET 8510326SCANNER 8520326SCANNER 8550326SCANNER 8570326SCANNER 25 VX7 Reference Guide 26 Bluetooth Scanner and Accessories LXE Bluetooth module with laser ring scanner battery two hand wrist straps large and small LXE Bluetooth module with 1D 2D imager ring scanner battery two hand wrist straps large and small Li Ion Spare Battery for LXE Bluetooth Ring Scanner Module LXE 8 bay battery charger with US power cord LXE 8 bay battery charger WW LXE single bay charger with US wall plug LXE single bay charger WW PowerScan 7000BT Scanner RS 232 with pointer PowerScan 7000BT Base Station RS232 without universal power supply PowerScan 7000BT Base Station Power Supply Std US 120V PowerScan 7000BT RS232 Cable for Base Station DB9S Coil 8 PowerScan 7000BT Battery Charger with Power Supply Four Station US Std PowerScan 7000BT Battery Pack Bluetooth Standard Range Fuzzy Logic laser scanner Bluetooth Auto ran
20. Data tl M 8 Daylight Savings esses 104 319 DB9 DB9O Serial Cable Tech Specifications ssssessse 37 135 Decimal Hexadecimal Equivalent ed A terete E EHE 353 160 2255 5 bee Ee 354 Defaults Caps Lock A 58 Del M 109 323 I dan 83 305 Device Name and description 127 335 DH P tetendit d PED 118 325 Dialup properties for dial up access 105 320 Dimensions Specifications sess 295 Discover and Query seen 98 Dis Pl 29 Brightness Control Keys seere 60 leaning costretto de Pee dre 65 Contrast Control Keys 60 hz M 65 Pixels iicet eee OIN 65 Specifications cceeesesseeseeseeeeeneeenes 295 297 Diversity RECEIVE M M M 202 BUE UD L m 201 Document Conventions eeeseeeeeeeeeen 3 Dot Pitch Specifications seeseeesess 297 E EAP TLS Cisco Radio eie pet eus 246 Enable Code ID cir 168 176 Enable Code ID drop down box 167 Enable internal scanner sound 165 Enable or Disable specific symbology 167 End user switching TOUCH esis Sse RO RI RE HORRORE 275 Enter Dala nro cd UIROS 8 Environmental Specification sss 296 Error Messages E EQ VX7RG L ARC Index AppLock A cigs teet Reeds 338 Ethernet Config
21. Date Time Current Time 8 02 12 AM Time Zone GMT 05 00 Eastern Time US amp Canada y Automatically adjust clock for daylight saving Figure 3 15 Date Time Properties There is little change from general desktop PC Date Time Properties options Adjust the settings and click the OK box or the Apply button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Double tapping the time displayed in the Taskbar causes this display to appear If an Internet connection is available click the Sync button to synchronize time with a time server The VX7 includes a GrabTime utility e GrabTime can be executed manually at any time by clicking the Sync button on this control panel e GrabTime can be configured to synchronize the time at boot up Please see Enabling GrabTime later in this chapter for details VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 105 Dialing Access Start Settings Control Panel Dialing Dialing Properties Figure 3 16 Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Tap the and follow the instructions in Help E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 106 Control Panel Options Display Access Start Settings Control Panel Display Icon Set background graphic color scheme appearance and power scheme properties Factory Default Settings Background Windowsce Til
22. If Allow Close is enabled and both Auto Re launch and Manual Launch are disabled the application cannot be restarted for the end user or by the end user after the application terminates Auto Re Launch Retries default is 0 tries Retries is the number of times AppLock will try to re launch the application The retry count is reset after an application is successfully launched and controlled by AppLock Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches Auto Re Launch Delay timer default is 0 seconds no delay Delay is the amount of time AppLock waits prior to re launching an application that has terminated The delay is specified in seconds Valid values are between 0 no delay and 99 seconds AppLock must also be configured to automatically re launch an application To AppLock application termination by the end user is indistinguishable from application termination for any other reason Manual Launch Allow Close Default is Disabled Enabling this option allows the end user to launch the specified application s Upon bootup completion an application with Manual enabled is listed on the Switchpad accompanied by a checkmark that indicates the application is currently active Applications without a checkmark are available for Launching When an application name is tapped by the end user the application is launched if inactive and brought to the foreg
23. If there is no screensaver chosen this checkbox is ignored Note Screensaver option only works with Remote Desktop screensavers Password Properties d OK E Password Settings a Password Password Confirm password Enable Password Protection _ At Power On _ Screen Saver Figure 3 28 Password Properties VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 121 PC Connection Access Start Settings Control Panel PC Connection Control the connection between the VX7 and a nearby desktop laptop computer Factory Default Settings Allow Connection Enabled Connect Using USB Client Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Unchecking the Allow connection with disables ActiveSync Change Clicking Change lists configured ActiveSync connections In addition there is a checkbox for Automatic Connect This option applies to USB connection only If this checkbox is checked when the USB cable is connected the VX7 will automatically try to start ActiveSync over the USB port Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time PC Connection Properties E OK 3 PC Connection n These settings control the connection between your Windows CE device and desktop computer Warning Adjusting these Eu settings may result in an i
24. Loosen the three 3 Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can be removed The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed Partially insert the Type II PCMCIA Radio into Slot A the upper right slot Caution Slot A MUST BE used for the radio card Installing a radio card in Slot B can result in pinching or other damage to the internal antenna cable Radio Card a Figure 2 40 Inserting the Type Il PCMCIA Radio Note The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC PCMCIA CF and SD Slots 69 3 Before completely inserting the radio connect the Antenna Cable to the radio using the port s indicated below Note Radio cards for single antenna units may have the unused antenna port covered with tape The internal antenna is a dual diversity antenna Summit CF 802 11a b g Radio Card The Summit 802 1 1a b g radio has four antenna ports two ports are for the a portion of the radio and two ports are for the b g portion of the radio CF radio is installed on a PCMCIA adapter Hold the radio card with the antenna ports facing down Connect the antenna cable s as follows e Single antenna Connect antenna cable to Main a port or the Main b g port depending on antenna type Auxiliary port is not used e Dual a antennas Connect antenna cables to both Main a and Auxiliary a ports e Dual antennas one a
25. Mapping less than 0x20 embedded in barcodes Custom Defines an identifier that is at the beginning of barcode data which acts as a Identifiers Code ID After a Custom Identifier is defined Symbology Settings can be defined for the identifier just like standard Code IDs See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 168 Enable Code ID Barcode Manipulation This parameter determines the type of barcode identifier being processed Note Since the VX7 does not contain an internal scanner this feature requires that the external scanner be manually configured to include the Code ID as part of the incoming barcode data Please refer to the scanner documentation to enable the Code ID Transmission of the Code ID is enabled at the scanner for all barcode symbologies not for an individual symbology Code ID is sent from the scanner so the scanner driver can discriminate between symbologies Options None The only entry in the Symbology list is All The barcode data is received but it is not checked for a Code ID AIM The Symbology list is loaded with the known AIM ID symbologies for that platform plus any configured Custom code IDs Symbol The Symbology list is loaded with the known Symbol ID symbologies for that platform plus any configured Custom Code IDs Custom Does not change the scanner s Code ID transmission setting The Symbology list is loa
26. The VX7 emits a bad scan beep to indicate the barcode has been rejected E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation 169 Barcode Symbology Settings The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured The features available on the Symbology Settings dialog include the ability to individually enable or disable a barcode from scanning set the minimum and maximum size barcode to accept strip Code ID strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode or based on configurable Barcode Data add a prefix or suffix to a barcode The Symbology drop down list contains all symbologies supported on the VX7 An asterisk appears in front of symbologies that have already been configured or have been modified from the default value Each time a Symbology is changed the settings are saved as soon as the OK button is tapped Settings are also saved when a new Symbology is selected from the Symbology drop down list Symbology fan y Strip Enable Min fi Max fal Leading f Trailing V Code ID Barcode Data Figure 4 4 Barcode Tab Symbology Settings Clear This button will erase any programmed overrides returning to the default settings for the selected symbology If Clear is pressed when All is selected as the symbology a confirmation dialog appears then all symbologies are reset to their factory defaults and all star indications are removed from the list
27. The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text string When barcode data is processed the Suffix string is sent to the output buffer after the barcode data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the suffix The suffix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list If All is selected the suffix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured See Hat Encoding and Decimal Hexadecimal Chart in Appendix B Technical Specifications Note Non ASCII equivalent keys in Key Message mode are unavailable in this option Non ASCII equivalent keys include the function keys e g lt F1 gt arrow keys Page up Page down Home and End VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation 175 Barcode Ctrl Char Mapping See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter The Ctrl Char Mapping button activates a dialog to define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters values less than 0x20 embedded in barcodes Control characters can be replaced with user defined text which can include hat encoded or hex encoded values In key message mode control characters can also be translated to their control code equivalent key sequences Control Character Translate Al control Character Replacement Character Replacement uuu Ianore drop Figure
28. Type the full path on the local PC where the private key is to be copied Also specify the private key filename Be sure to note the name used for the private key file for example VX7USER PVK The certificate file created later in this process must be given the same name for example VX7USER CER DO NOT check to use strong private key protection Make any other desired changes and click the Submit button E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 262 Certificates Potential Scripting Violation Potential Scripting Violation possc peo Figure 5 92 Script Warnings If any script notifications occur click the Yes button to continue the certificate request Create Private Key Password Figure 5 93 Script Warnings When prompted for the private key password e Click None if you do not wish to use a password or e Enter and confirm your desired password then click OK VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 263 Microsoft Certificat es johndoe Certificate Issued The certificate you requested was issued to you e DER encoded or Base 64 encoded Download certificate Download certificate chain Figure 5 94 Certificate Issued Click the Download certificate link File Download x Some files can harm your computer If the file information below looks suspicious or you do not fully trust the source do not open or save this file File
29. VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 249 Validating the Server Certificate Before validating the server certificate make sure the Root CA certificate is installed on the VX7 Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen Click the Properties button Check the Validate server box as shown below Authentication Settings Figure 5 72 Validate Server Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes Advanced Wireless Settings Y Add New Y peapTest preferred Only access points Figure 5 73 SSID Authenticated Once the authentication completes the status changes to show the VX7 has authenticated to lt SSID gt as shown above E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 250 Cisco Radio WPA PSK Configuration Wireless Network Properties Network name SSID bsapTest This is a computer to computer ad hoc Wireless network key WEP This network requires a key for Encryption TKIP y Authentication WPA PSK y network wireless access points are not used Network key passphrase Key index fr Key provided automatically IEEE 802 1X Authentication Enable 802 1 authentication on this network EAP type peap y Figure 5 74 WPA PSK Configuration Configure the Wireless Network Settings as described in Wireless Network Settings earlier in this chapter Change the Network Authentication to WPA PSK Enter an ASCII network key in the text field Hex keys d
30. pp py S t Lo P T u A rs a U Y o pp py v w pp w x pe a a x y ENANA Y z ESA E es E Z A lo py x A B lo pp x B c lo pp x c D Lo py ox D E pou a ee E VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC 291 Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies L O T gt x Z O aA O C O rE O gt x gt N ajo iojo n ojojo x ajao iofo mjo Press this key Press These Keys and Then 27 sw e at capsto gt o i i i i Ii i i lt alala alallala al a 9 se 9 9 se g9 9 l9 o STIT T a a a a a TTSS E E t E ESCE E 255555255552222 22 2 LL L n z n cin 2 N o O o ES mee cg wc cwc c c c wc c c dc SIS IS S IS S S 3 o Ly SL gs s ss gm ee 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Oo rlalo mioinlololo O o Alrlajo mio n o VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC 292 To get this key 9 numeric 0 numeric DOT numeric lt gt numeric alpha numeric alpha numeric alpha numeric alpha colon semicolon _ underscore comma apostrophe tilde 8 e 3 9 amp gt VX7 Reference Guide Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies Press These Keys and Then 27 swe em an cession x aa i i E GG HEEENEN a Lx P E EQ VX7RG L ARC Press this key 9 0 DOT v o c j4a x m si o o j oj o r ce e z r mj o
31. vxcoo1 Device description LXE VXC Figure 3 37 System Device Name The device name and description can be changed Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Copyrights This screen is presented for information only The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 128 Control Panel Options Terminal Server Client Licenses Select a server client license from a drop down list Not available at this release Volume and Sounds Access Start Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds Icon Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application Enabled Notifications Enabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Loud Screen tap Loud Sounds Scheme LOUD Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Volume amp Sounds Properties e OK x Volume Sounds a Loud Enable sounds for Events warnings beeps and system events Applications program specific and all other sounds Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Enable clicks and taps for ER Key clicks O Loud Soft Screen taps O Loud Soft Figure 3 38 Volume and Sounds Wi
32. wvo wvloloj x jojo 2 o m o Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies 293 IBM 3270 Keypad Ovelay esc Wf ono Y CAPS Mere ms Sr Mov MHO r MOV Mor Mos y ex Benes Fi A ro Ars A F4 A Fs A re A 7 Ars A Fo Ario T 9 A amp ins WELE TRL maou A AA oL A i j PgUp TITIIIIIEITITe t Home M PgDn END lt DEL SI G6 6868080808668 Figure A 3 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad The 60 key keypad is available with an IBM 3270 overlay designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running LXE s RFTerm program When running this program please refer to the following reference guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences e RFTerm Reference Guide IBM 5250 Keypad Overlay ESC 2ND CAS gene BS Soaeovey Ory Ove x4 hv ox Bens F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 Fe F8 F9 F10 7 9 amp me E TRL Lol whet eth vil dol el i PgUp gt 6608066680800 0G83 A Home f PgDn Wf END DELW 6668680680606 Figure A 4 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad The 60 key keypad is available with an IBM 5250 overlay designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running LXE s RFTerm program When running this program please refer to the following reference guide for equivalent keys and keypress sequences e RFTerm Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 294 Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Appendix B Technical Specifications
33. 1 1a b g radio WMM Use of Wi Fi Multimedia extensions Options On Off Default Off Auth Server Specifies the type of authentication server Options Type 1 ACS server Type 2 non ACS server Default Type 1 TX Diversity How to handle antenna diversity when transmitting packets to AP Options Main only Main antenna only Aux only Aux antenna only On Use diversity Default On for 802 11b g radio Main Only for 802 1 1a b g radio The value for this parameter should be set as follows Antenna Configuration TX Diversity A Main and BG Main Main Only A Main and A Aux On BG Main and BG Aux On A Main only Main Only BG Main only Main Only Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna s installed on your VX7 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 202 Summit Radio RX Diversity How to handle antennas diversity when receiving packets from AP Options Main Only use main antenna only Aux Only use aux antenna only On start on Main On startup use main antenna On start on Aux On startup use aux antenna Default On start on Main for 802 11b g radio Main only for 802 1 1a b g radio The value for this parameter should be set as follows Antenna Configuration RX Diversity A Main and BG Main Main Only A Main and A Aux On Start On Main BG Main and BG Aux On Start On Main A Main only Main Only BG Main
34. 2 key press the 2 key first then the rest of the key sequence Note This keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator By default NumLock is enabled when the VX7 reboots The warmboot behavior of NumLock can be configured Please refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration The default condition of Caps or CapsLock is Off The Caps or CapsLock condition can be set toggled with a 2nd FI key sequence The CAPS LED on the VMT keyboard is illuminated when CapsLock is On The warmboot behavior of CapsLock can be set via the MX3 VXC Options tab in the Windows CE Control Panel Please see Chapter 3 for more details Press These Keys and Then Le sm om m ene To get this key Press this key Increase Brightness Decrease Brightness 5 Increase Contrast Decrease Contrast Increase Volume Decrease Volume The Brightness Adjustment keys have no function Brightness is adjusted via the buttons on the VX7 control panel The Contrast Adjustment keys have no function because the VX7 is equipped with a TFT display that has no provision for these adjustments The Volume Control keys have no function as the volume control is adjusted via the Windows System Tray Volume icon VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies To get this key Keyboard Backlight Suspend Resume ond Shift Alt Ctrl Esc Space Enter Enter numeric CapsLock Toggle B
35. 30 C to 60 C condensing Water Sand and Dust IP66 per IEC60529 Humidity Standard version Up to 90 Non condensing at 40 C 104 F Extended temperature version 100 Vibration Bounce loose cargo for 0 5 hour duration Common carrier transportation transit face 75G 5msec duration 100 shock impacts VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Environmental Specifications 297 Display Specifications Resolution Default 800 X 600 pixels 25 lines x 80 characters Optional 640x480 pixels on Platform 2 VX7s Cell Size 8 x 16 pixels 8 x 8 also supported 25 lines x 80 chars 280mm x 218mm x 11mm 11 0 x 8 6 x 0 4 246mm x 184 5mm 9 7 x 7 26 UPS Battery Pack Specifications Operational to 10 000 ft 3048 meters Operating Temperature 30 C to 50 C 22 F to 122 F Storage Temperature 40 C to 70 C 40 F to 158 F Water Sand and Dust IP66 per IEC60529 10 90 Non condensing at 40 C 104 F Vibration Bounce loose cargo for 0 5 hour duration Common carrier transportation transit face 15 kV E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 298 Network Device Specifications Network Device Specifications Summit 802 11b g CF 2 4GHz Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter Radio Frequencies 2 4 2 4897 GHz IEEE 802 11b 802 11g DSSS OFDM 1 2 55 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps RF Power Level 64 mW 18 dBm Summit 802 11a b g CF 2 4 5 0GHz Bus Interf
36. ARC
37. AppLock Added sections Match and Options Tab Revised section Launch Button Appendix A Key Maps Revised section Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies Revision J September 2008 Chapter 5 Wireless Network Added sections Auto Profile and Auth Server Configuration a 8 Revised sections Main Tab Radio Mode and Hide Password VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Revision History 359 Revision K January 2009 Chapter 1 Introduction Added new section Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off Revised section Bluetooth Chapter 2 Physical Revised sections Keyboard Backlight for both 60 key and 95 key Description and Layout keyboards and Power Modes Chapter 3 System Added new section Status Popup Configuration 5 Revised sections Pairing and Auto Reconnect Power Chapter 5 Wireless Network Revised sections Parameters both for Profile and Global and Sign On Configuration vs Stored Credentials Appendix C VX7 CE NET Revised section Power 4 2 Revision L April 2009 Chapter 1 Introduction Revised sections Prompt if devices request to pair and Accessories Chapter 3 System Revised section Options for Bluetooth Settings panel Configuration Chapter 6 AppLock Revised sections End User Switching Technique and Manual Launc
38. At the bottom of the screen is the Start button Clicking the Start Button causes the Start Menu to pop up It contains the standard Windows menu options Programs Favorites Documents Settings Help and Run Desktop Icon Function My Computer Access files and programs Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet intranet requires radio card and Internet Service Provider ISP enrollment is not available from LXE Wireless Configuration Icon Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration utility either the SCU Summit Client Utility or ACU Cisco Aironet Client Utility Bluetooth Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth devices My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications Start Access programs select from the Favorites listing documents last worked on change view settings for the control panel or taskbar on line help or run programs E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 306 Desktop Folders Copies at Startup The following folders are copied on startup System Desktop gt Windows Desktop System Favorites gt Windows Favorites System Fonts gt Windows Fonts System Help gt Windows Help System Programs gt Windows Programs This function copies only the directory contents no sub folders The following folders are NOT copied on startup Windows AppMer Windows Recent Windows Star
39. Authenticated tu i o E c iue UR er ED Br viae ist tope R Uie eda 242 Figure 5 60 ACU Profile Tabanera 243 Figure 5 61 Renaming Profile 5a HERRERA ie ais 243 Fipure3502 Profile Properties Scree M s eripi lu odii t ui Deut f pu rede ER d M Oo reed els 244 Fipure35 03 Select Profile Opp tr ORE ORE REGE RTI WO EU RO erp E nre ass 244 Fios 5264 Lor learn 245 Ficus 5 65 ACU Status Tadeo pics 245 Figure 3 60 Centilicale SLOTS poo ae E ESAE ERE ANRE EEE E pas 246 Esdr S 07 View Cerbracate Details iieii eenaa ae ee N aeiee ra oaa ER De Re de erer aaae 246 Figure 5 08 EAP WIS COMUN ais 247 Figure 3 69 Authentication Sete acosta Ox dbi s 247 Fiure 5 70 Select Cer ficaMe oe easet che tance em PUO IR Eoo id b E ce VoL eae be ede 248 Figure 5 71 Figure 5 72 Figure 5 73 Figure 5 74 Figure 5 75 Figure 5 76 Figure 5 77 Figure 5 78 Figure 5 79 Figure 5 80 Figure 5 81 Authentication Settings Certificate Details ihi te ebrei e ita 248 Validate Sc O05 2c sess S205 oda SR DH D CREER sand doves td sodas vue eased iaa 249 SSID Authentic aled oi diia 249 WPA PSK Configuration Sacco cert orn eter e Er eee eti cn ir bre tie ces 250 Symbol NET WLAN Softonic ina 251 Symbol Wireless Information Tab tius oot eter pos ea 252 Symbol Wireless Network Properties eer t HEURE ERE EIE REVO ER TAE DERE 253 Symbol Advanced Wireless SelbifigS i ici trt rio trip r rta Rte ERR ERE EE MAY E SESE EESC HR ex RUNE EE bae EROS 254 Logon to Certificate ANI BOPI
40. Cable USB Host Port Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 5V USB 23 USB Power Current Limited 2 USB2N A USBD 3 USB2P A USB D 4 DGND USB Power Return Shell CGND Chassis Ground USB Client Connector Figure 2 17 Dongle Cable USB Client Port Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 5V USB 23 USB Power Current Limited 2 USB2N A USBD 3 USB2P A USB D 4 DGND USB Power Return E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 46 RJ45 Connector Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 VX7 Reference Guide Signal TXP Figure 2 18 Dongle Cable Ethernet Port Description Transmit Transmit Receive Not Connected Not Connected Receive Not Connected Not Connected External Connectors E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 47 Audio Connector The VX7 audio connector accepts a headset with a 2 5mm plug such as a mono telephone headset with microphone or a stereo headset Please refer to Mixer in Chapter 3 System Configuration for information on configuring the audio port for either a mono headset with microphone or a stereo headset 1 2 3 Figure 2 19 VX7 Audio Jack for External Speaker or Headphones Note The VX7 is not configured for standard PC speakers Pinout Pin Description 1 Microphone Not connected in VX7 2 Speaker 3 Ground E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 48 External Connectors Power Supply Connector Power is supplied to the VX7 through the power connector Addi
41. Code ID VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation 177 Nam code 00 ID Code 5 Figure 4 9 Barcode Tab Custom Identifiers After adding changing and removing items from the Custom IDs list tap the OK button to save changes and return to the Barcode panel Parameters Name text box ID Code text box Buttons Name is the descriptor that is used to identify the custom Code ID Names must be unique from each other however the Name and ID Code may have the same value Name is used in the Symbology drop down box to identify the custom Code ID in a user friendly manner Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list ID Code defines the data at the beginning of a barcode that acts as an identifier the actual Code ID Both Name and ID Code must be specified in order to add a custom Code ID to the Custom IDs list Add Entering data into both the Name and ID Code fields enables the Add button Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custon ID list Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name and ID Code fields and tap the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double tap on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace W
42. ENQuiry Ctrl e ACK 6 F ACKnowledge Ctrl f BEL 7 G BELI rings terminal bell Ctrl g BS 8 H BackSpace non destructive Ctrl h HT 9 I Horizontal Tab move to next tab position Ctrl i LF a AJ Line Feed Ctrl j VT b K Vertical Tab Ctrl k FF c L Form Feed Ctrl 1 CR d AM Carriage Return Ctrl m SO e AN Shift Out Ctrl n SI f O Shift In Ctrl o DLE 10 P Data Link Escape Ctrl p DCI 11 Q Device Control 1 normally XON Ctrl q DC2 12 R Device Control 2 Ctrl r DC3 13 S Device Control 3 normally XOFF Ctrl s DC4 14 AT Device Control 4 Ctrl t NAK 15 U Negative AcKnowledge Ctrl u SYN 16 V SYNchronous idle Ctrl v ETB 17 W End Transmission Block Ctrl w E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 350 ASCII Control Codes Char Hex E Control Action CAN 17 X CANcel line Ctrl x EM 19 Y End of Medium Ctrl y SUB la Z SUBstitute Ctrl z VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down ESC 1b A ESCape WM_CHAR 0x1b VK_PACKET up VK_CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x1 1 down VK_PACKET 0xe7 down FS lc N File Separator WM CHAR 0xlc VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down WM CHAR 0x1d down WM CHAR 0x1d up VK PACKET up VK CONTROL up GS Id Group Separator VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK SHIFT 0x10 down WM CHAR 0x36 down WM CHAR 0x36 up VK SHIFT up VK CONTROL up RS le A Record Separator VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK S
43. EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 218 Summit Radio WPA LEAP To use WPA LEAP make sure the following profile options are used Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile Set EAP Type to LEAP Set Encryption to WPA TKIP Set Auth Type to Open Please see LEAP earlier in this section to configure the radio for LEAP without WPA Summit Client Utility Figure 5 24 WPA LEAP Please review Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 219 To use Stored Credentials click on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network Credentials E User user2 Password LXE Figure 5 25 WPA LEAP Credentials Enter the Domain Username if the Doman is required otherwise enter the Username Enter the password Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 220 Summit Radio EAP FAST To use EAP FAST make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to EAP FAST e Set Encryption to WPA TKIP e Set Auth Type to Open The SCU supports EAP FAST wi
44. Enabled Notifications Enabled Volume Middle of Bar Key click Loud Screen tap Loud Sounds Scheme LOUD Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Volume amp Sounds Properties d OK E VX7 Reference Guide Loud Enable sounds for Events warnings beeps and system events Applications program specific and all other sounds Notifications alarms appointments and reminders Enable clicks and taps for Key clicks O Loud Soft 7 Screen taps O Loud Soft Figure C 25 Volume and Sounds E EQ VX7RG L ARC Appendix D Reference Material Introduction Contents of this Appendix include e AppLock Error Messages and Registry Settings e Revision History and the following charts e Valid VK Codes for CE e ASCII Control Codes e Hat Encoding e Decimal Hexadecimal Chart E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 338 AppLock Error Messages AppLock Error Messages Any messages whose first word is an ing word is output prior to the action described in the message For example Switching to admin hotkey press is logged after the administrator has pressed the hotkey but prior to starting the switch process For all operations that can result in an error an Error level message is displayed when a failure occurs These messages contain the word failure These messages have a partner Extended level message that is logged
45. Enabler on the mobile device LXE recommends changing and then saving the changes reboot before connecting to the network Alternatively the Mobile Device Server on can be disabled until needed refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details Menu Options Settings Tab Function Connection Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server Set the order in which serial ports or RF are used to check for the presence of the Mobile Device Server Execution Unavailable in this release LXE recommends using AppLock which is resident on each Windows mobile device Server Contact Setup synchronization scheduled Mobile Device Server contact suspend and reboot settings Startup Shutdown Set options for Enabler program startup or shutdown Scan Config This option allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that is created by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console Not currently supported by LXE Display Set up the Windows display at startup on connect and during normal mode The settings can be adjusted by the user Shortcuts Add delete and update shortcuts to user allowable applications Adapters Enable or disable network and wireless settings Select an adapter and switch between the Avalanche Network Profile and manual settings Status View the current adapter signal strength and quality IP address MAC address SSID BSSID an
46. Fi Access Start Settings Control Panel Wi Fi Provides access to the Summit Client Utility SCU For details on the SCU please see Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Note This Control Panel icon is not present with some versions of the SCU VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC CF Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs 129 CF Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs The Flash card located under the main battery pack is intended to protect the user from losing the LXE drivers and configuration information in the event of a cold boot Also on any boot the contents of any registered CAB files are automatically unpacked Access Files on the Flash Card Tap the My Device icon on the Desktop then tap the System icon Files A flash card is used for permanent storage of the LXE drivers and utilities It is also used for registry content back up The flash card is located in the socket under the main battery pack CAB files when executed are not deleted SUMMIT CAB Summit Client files needed for network card operation The following CAB files are optional and may or may not be present BLUETOOTH CAB Bluetooth Client files needed for LXEZ Pairing operation LXE_VX3C_ENABLER CAB Wavelink Avalanche Enabler RFTERM CAB RFTerm terminal emulation application JAVA CAB Java application APPLOCK CAB AppLock program See Chapter 6 AppLock Note Always perform a warm reset Start Run Warmboot when exchang
47. KBDAT_A DGND KBD_PWR KBCLK_A CGND Signal MSDAT_A DGND KBD_PWR MSCLK_A CGND 41 Figure 2 11 PS 2 Keyboard Connector Description Keyboard Data Not Connected System Ground Keyboard Power 5V Keyboard Clock Not Connected Chassis Ground RYO W Figure 2 12 PS 2 Mouse Connector Description Mouse Data Not Connected System Ground Keyboard Power 5V Mouse Clock Not Connected Chassis Ground VX7 Reference Guide 42 Ethernet USB Connector The VX7 Ethernet USB connector accepts dongle cables that provide combinations of the following connections Note External Connectors an Ethernet port via an RJ45 connector a USB Host port for connecting a USB device to the VX7 a USB Client port to connect the VX7 to a USB host or hub Please refer to the diagrams later in this chapter for details on available ports with the dongle cable options The connector is shown below 5 10 15 Figure 2 13 VX7 USB Connector and External USB Adapter Cable Connector Note Pinout Pin VD 00 1 Du dA WN Rh e a nA A W N O Shell VX7 Reference Guide Signal USB2N_A USB2P_A DGND RJA5 45 RJA5 78 5V USB 23 TXN TXP CGND Power the VX7 off before attaching a cable or device to the Ethernet USB connector Description USBD Not Connected Not Connected Receive Receive USBD USB Power Return Not Connected RJ45 Pins 4 and 5 Connections RJ45 Pins 7
48. LXE developed e ActiveSync e Transcriber e Media Player e Internet Explorer Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents but not editing them Java Optional Installed by LXE Files can be accessed by tapping Start Programs JEM CE Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console A folder of Java examples and Plug ins is also installed with the Java option LXE does not support Java applications running on the mobile device LXE RFTerm Optional AppLock Installed by LXE The application can be accessed by tapping Start Programs RFTerm Please refer to Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction Refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction Installed by LXE Application is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start Settings Control Panel Administration Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up See Also Chapter 6 AppLock for instruction Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Optional The following feature
49. Lt 281 Radio card and ISP required 88 310 Internet Options 108 323 Cos 108 IP Address IDDHCDP uranio bas 118 325 Scola 118 325 K Key Map cias ica 287 288 I01 Key Chat denos ocu 288 Hidden Keys sse 54 57 IBM 3270 keyboard sess 293 IBM 5270 keyboard 293 Keyboard 0400 E O 109 323 Backlight c nete po nein 60 Backlight Control esses 142 VX7 Reference Guide 364 COMME COM E 39 Connector LocatiOM oooocnnoocccnononcnonnnanccnnnnanonnnass 6 Control Keys cn eec eere 60 DA presi 8 Hidden Key Functions ssssse 54 57 LEDIndicat Sas 58 Onscreen only iii ii 107 322 Shortcuts steer tre ciaci n 61 Keyboard Backlight ssss 55 57 KEYCOMP compiler eeeeenee 348 L LAUNCH EXE 3 stevscsesenccoci meret eret 136 LEAP Cisco Radio 227 Summit Radio sssssssseeeeeree 212 LED indicators 2 blica 58 LEDs E 59 Caps Lock CAPS sssssssseeeee 58 Secondary Keys cococoniconococococonconnccnnonnnonnnonnnnnnnnos 59 List configured ActiveSync connections 121 328 Location Antenna Connector cooooooocccncnonononanononcnncnnananonnncnons 34 COMI and COM3G ssssseeeeeee 34 lj see 34 Power DC Connector sse 34 Power Switch eese 34 Printer Port uec eerte eR 34
50. Microsoft Windows CE operating system The PCMCIA cards are Plug and Play devices and can be hot swapped For more details refer to the Windows CE help screens or refer to the documentation delivered with the PCMCIA card Note Although cards in the PCMCIA slots may be hot swapped the VX7 is not environmentally sealed while the access panel cover is removed to hot swap PCMCIA cards VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC PCMCIA CF and SD Slots 67 PCMCIA Pinout BVD2 SPKR E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 68 PCMCIA CF and SD Slots Install PCMCIA Cards Equipment Needed Phillips No 1 screwdriver and a Torque wrench capable of measuring to 9 inch pounds 1 016 11 N m j Note The example below details installing a radio card Installation of other PCMCIA cards is similar except there is no antenna The radio card is installed in slot A the upper slot When a second PCMCIA card is present such as a Bluetooth CF card via a PCMCIA adapter the second card is installed in Slot B the lower slot Install the Type Il PCMCIA Radio The LXE Model VX7 Vehicle Mount Computer is specifically for use with LXE Model 6726 6816 4830 and 4831 Type II PCMCIA radios Substitution of other PCMCIA radios will void the FCC Industry Canada and other international radio certifications for the Model VX7 Vehicle Mount Computer and is strictly prohibited 1 Turn the VX7 off and detach the power cable 2
51. Miel xi File Edit View Favorites Tools Help ay Que x wi J search Folders E Address O System LXEConnect kd so mm 19 LXEConnect msi SETUP EXE E System My Documents My Network Places 2 object s TB Mobile Device Figure 1 8 LXEConnect Installation Files 7 Select and copy the LXEConnect msi and Setup exe files from the VX7 to the user PC Note the location chosen for files 8 Close the ActiveSync explorer dialog box Do not disconnect the VX7 ActiveSync connection 9 Execute the setup exe file that was copied to the user PC This setup program installs the LXEConnect utility fi LXEConnect Bika Welcome to the LXEConnect Setup Wizard ex The installer will guide you through the steps required to install LXE Connect on your computer WARNING This computer program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized duplication or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law Figure 1 9 LXEConnect Setup 10 Follow the on screen installation prompts The default installation directory is C Program Files LXE LXEConnect 11 When the installation is complete create a desktop shortcut to the following file C Program Files LXE LXEConnect LXEConnect exe If a different directory was selected during installation please substitute the appropriat
52. O components e Two 9 pin RS 232 serial ports configured as o COMI o CONMG labeled COM2 3 Note There is no COM2 port on the VX7 e Two PCMCIA slots supporting Type I or II PCMCIA cards e One slot for SD memory card e Compact flash drive e LXE VMT or standard PS 2 keyboard via a watertight connector e Ports available via dongle cable o USB Host port o USB Client Port o Ethernet port e One audio jack providing monaural audio output System Memory Main system memory is 64 or 128MB DRAM Video Subsystem The LXE VX7 video subsystem consists of a color TFT display The video subsystem complies with the VESA VL bus standard The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion Please see Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable later in this chapter and Screen Blanking in Chapter 4 Scanner for details To identify your VX7 platform type please see Identifying Your VX7 earlier in this chapter Platform 1 VX7 s The display resolution is 800 x 600 pixels This resolution complies with the SVGA graphics industry standard Platform 2 VX7 s The default resolution of this display is 800 by 600 pixels This resolution complies with the SVGA graphics industry standard The display can also be configured for 640 by 480 pixels To change the display resolution please refer to Changing the Display Resolution in Chapter 3 System Co
53. PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 24GHZ2 Type DL iaa id 299 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide xii Table of Contents APPENDIX C VX7 CE NET 301 pipes it Cel Mer 301 Windows CE NET 4 2 Operating System eee 301 A T eo nE 301 boc in PERENNE y 301 COldbOO eere 301 ij ip e 4 A A 302 moris Burr PCM mc 302 Sofware APPO rr A Min EAE REI ci 302 Java Optional A A 303 LAR RETO Do i MTS 303 A Te eae CRT 303 Wavelmk Avalanche Enabler Opio lianas 303 2 A 305 ei A Nr Re REESE ure RON R 306 My Computer A ceeds b urea E 306 Start Menu Program Options cuina la 307 desig Mtm 308 A vaso O ie nd dii adus 308 nl UR M 309 Start FTP Serv r Stop FIP Servei ae oci lid 309 Command DECUS assisen an en Rs 310 TINA SS E AE n 310 Liternet Explore asnan a a te pi au n IS ba Rs Ert 310 O nd ree 310 Remote Desktop dd 311 o MU MIN DUE NDECSU NM MUN PNE DIM DM ante ee 311 VIE SED ati S 2n TA PH 312 Advanced M MET 312 Control Panel OPUONS T 313 A N 314 LAMAS and PONTS air EE a SE EEEN Ea 315 Identifying Soltware Versions 125 odios e iii 316 PAM CAES oam carers danni Md eateries esate Pad Un diia en ere 316 NG A eter itat uiid di a emcee aa M ee 317 Administrator Control A EE bep 318 A
54. Processing is at the end of the timer function LOG_PROCESSING Exit TaskbarScreenMode Exiting the function that switches the screen mode back to normal operation for the administrator LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToAdmin Exiting the function that handles the mode switch into LOG_PROCESSING admin mode Exit ToUser Exiting the user mode switch function LOG_PROCESSING Exit ToUser Registry read failure The AppName value does not exist in the registry so user mode cannot be entered LOG_PROCESSING Exit verify password no pwd set Exiting password verification LOG_PROCESSING Exit verify password response from dialog Exiting password verification LOG_PROCESSING Found taskbar The handle to the taskbar has been found so that AppLock can disable it in user mode LOG_PROCESSING Getting address of keyboard hook init procedure AppLock is retrieving the address of the keyboard hook LOG_PROCESSING Getting configuration from registry The AppLock configuration is being read from the registry This occurs at initialization and also at entry into user mode The registry must be re read at entry into user mode in case the administration changed the settings of the application being controlled LOG_PROCESSING Getting encrypt pwd length The length of the encrypted password is being LOG_EX calculated Hook wndproc failure AppLock is unable to lock the application T
55. R5232 DOtt nete bre ticus 34 Scanner Port 34 Serial POMS iia 34 USB Conmnector 5 inerenti 34 Logging ADDEOCI Garis saan at etc aes 285 Loss of Host Re connection sess 132 M MAG Address suopte RSS 94 316 Maifea NER 124 332 h ENDE e 24 Matoh T 172 PP E E E 173 Match List tul s iicet 173 Media Player iaa 88 310 MEMOLy A cae 29 126 334 allocate for programs or storage 127 335 Installed uero Ee 126 334 Menu Options Sita dion 85 307 Modes AppLock eese 273 VX7 Reference Guide Index Mouse 95 key keyboard sss 10 Planas euet d ennt 10 USB titi educa heise seas aes 10 Multi Application AppLock 270 My Computer Folders cuina RRORURPRUROI IS 84 306 N NuLotklkarit incl 54 NUM LOCK and 2 Functions naaa 57 Disabled nie temere 57 O On Off condition of CapsLock sss 288 condition of NumLock sess 288 Switch eese enne 33 295 Operating Temperature Specifications 296 Optional Power Supply sess 74 Owner Identification 119 326 Notes hsb a pa eai 119 326 P Parity cinc 124 163 332 PASSWOILG ssccesccesssecesscecssecseeeeeseeceseeeeaeecees 120 327 ADpLOoCk a one nett 274 AppLock Save As esse 285 lost at cold boot sse 138 PC Card Slots Locati
56. Reference Guide 190 Summit Radio Admin Login To login to Admin mode click the Admin login button Admin Password Entry Enter Admin Password Figure 5 3 Admin Password Entry Enter the Admin password and press OK If the password is incorrect an error message is displayed The default password is SUMMIT Note The password is case sensitive The Admin password can be changed on the Global tab The end user can e Turn radio On Off on the Main tab e Select active Profile on the Main tab e View the current parameter settings for the profiles on the Profile tab e View the global parameter settings on the Global tab e View the current connection details on the Status tab e View the radio status software versions and regulatory domain on the Main tab e Access additional troubleshooting features on the Diags tab After Admin login the use can also e Create edit rename and delete profiles on the Profile tab e Edit global parameters on the Global tab VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 191 Auto Profile Auto Profile allows the user to configure a list of profiles that the SCU can search when a radio connection is lost After using the Profile tab to create any desired profiles return to the Main tab To specify which profiles are to be included in Auto Profile click the List button Auto Profile Profile SSIDO1 SsIDO2 ssIDO3 ssiDO4 Figure 5 4 Select Profiles f
57. Table of Contents xi Ped inr daz o A Rm 276 CA A m I er 279 POAT BOOG M M IE 279 Auto Re Laure 280 Manual Launch hosanna EET 280 AOW ClO ada 280 MA did 281 End User Internet Explorer EUTE iia 281 ic 1912127 A ever 282 EDU om Sd NDA MEME MEE 283 uot Pane NN Rr 283 E A ETUR 283 DD gno e T 283 ESI DH Bait db aedis o ete a aca dd ein 283 A a Oe MEER MM MM MM 284 pil mrt P Ie 284 UE em en 285 IO U Y e 285 Troubleshooting AppLOGKR cnica a 286 APPENDXA KEYMAPS Z r 95 key Keypad with Pointing Device eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeennneeeee 287 Key Mas I ley Equivalencia sii iii 287 60 key Standard Keypad ricino RR 288 Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee eene 288 IBN ddl sc 15 o0 TT 293 IBM 5250 Keypad Overlay A di 293 APPENDIX B TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 295 Physical Specifications cintia li 295 Environmental Specifications icccincssscsiectcessinceanantacscssincssicntnsnsnssincsarssincnnansansiiaees 296 PUTTING M RO TR BT PUN EN 297 UPS Battery Pack Poca pa 297 Network Device Specifications ccccccccssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 298 Summit 802 TRO CF DEDE eee nn eS een rte E AME NM EM U MEE ME 298 Summit 02 Maba A e A eS 298 A E 298 PCMCIA Cisco 2AGH2 Type Morrenia edi ea is 299
58. VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 247 Make sure the private key is Present If it is not present install the private key file If there is no user certificate refer to User Certificates earlier in this chapter to acquire a user certificate and private key file Setting EAP TLS Parameters With the radio parameters configured see Wireless Network Configuration set the EAP type to TLS as shown Wireless Network Properties peapTest rr WPA Figure 5 68 EAP TLS Configuration Click the Properties button Authentication Settings Figure 5 69 Authentication Settings E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 248 Cisco Radio Click the Select button to choose the user certificate Figure 5 70 Select Certificate Authentication Settings User Certificate Issued to vx6user rf local Issued by RFRootcA validate Server Figure 5 71 Authentication Settings Certificate Details Do not check the Validate server certificate box This allows the user to be authenticated as the first step When the user certificate successfully authenticates come back to this screen and validate the server certificate as described in the next section Click the OK button to dismiss the configuration screens When the radio re connects the user is authenticated with the user certificate If the user does not authenticate recheck the user certificate and the date on the computer
59. Welcome Screen Click the Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL link E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 256 Certificates Make sure the correct root CA certificate is selected in the list box Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Download a CA Certificate Certificate Chain or CRL To trust certificates issued from this certification authority install this CA certificate chain To download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL select the certificate and encoding method CA Certificate Encoding method ODER OBase 64 Download CA certificate Download CA certificate chain Download latest base CRL Download latest delta CRL Figure 5 81 Download CA Certificate Screen Click the DER button To download the CA certificate click on the Download CA certificate link File Download Security Warning x Do you want to open or save this file Name certnew cer Type Security Certificate 1 10 KB From 100 100 100 100 Open Save Cancel while files from the Intemet can be useful this file type can potentially harm your computer If you do not trust the source do not open or save this software What s the risk Figure 5 82 Download CA Certificate Screen Click the Save button and save the certificate Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 257 Installing a Root CA Certific
60. after Y hour Computer Friendly Empty The name or identifier entered in this space by the System Name Administrator is used exclusively by Bluetooth devices and during Bluetooth communication Note The Device Name listed in Start Settings Control Panel System Device Name is not used during Bluetooth operation Owner Identification name listed in Start Settings Control Panel Owner Identification is not used during Bluetooth operation About LXEZ Pairing OK x Bluetooth Devices Settings About Computer Friendly Name LXE BT Terminal Bluetooth Address 00 40 FD 02 03 04 BTC version 1 0 BTDRGCESO1E Bluetooth Stack Revision 1 3 Bluetooth Radio HCI 2 12288 Bluetooth Radio LMP 2 16907 Copyright 2006 2007 LXE Inc y Figure 3 14 Bluetooth About Panel This panel lists the assigned Computer Friendly Name that other devices may discover during their Discovery and Query process the Bluetooth MAC address and software version levels The data cannot be edited by the user VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 103 Easy Pairing and Auto Reconnect The Bluetooth module can establish relationships with new devices after the end user taps the Discover button It can auto reconnect to devices previously known but which have gone out of and then returned within range Pairing supports SPP devices only Up to two Bluetooth devices can be con
61. also ends when any other button on this screen is clicked or the user browses away from the Diags tab The results of the ping are displayed in the Diagnostic Output box Diagnostics Also attempts to re connect to the wireless LAN However this option provides more data in the Diagnostic Output box than the Re connect option This data dump includes radio state profile settings global settings and a list of broadcast SSID APs Save To Use this save the results of the diagnostics to a text file Use the explorer window to specify the name and location for the diagnostic file The text file can viewed using an application such as WordPad E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 199 Global Tab Note The Global tab was previously labeled Global Settings The parameters on the global settings tab can be changed when an Admin is logged on Without the admin login the current values for the parameters can be viewed but they cannot be edited Summit Client Utility i foki x Main Profile Global Property Value uti a SDC Roam Trigger 65 dBm Roam Delta Roam Period i j i BG Channel Set E M big setting will require a Annressive Scan i Figure 5 9 SCU Global Tab Parameters IMPORTANT Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved Many versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt it made to close or browse away from
62. and 8 Connections USB Power Current Limited Not Connected Not Connected Transmit Transmit Chassis Ground E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 43 Ethernet USB Dongle Cables The available dongle cables are shown below Q 1 D15 Connector 2 RJ45 Connector 6 3 USB Host Connector 4 USB Client 9000075CABLE Connector o 1 D15 Connector 2 RJ45 Connector 3 USB Host Connector 9000052CABLE Figure 2 14 VX7 Ethernet USB Dongle Cables Note Power the VX7 off before attaching a cable or device to the Ethernet USB connector The connectors and pinouts for the dongle cables are detailed below A 9000075CABLE is required when using ActiveSync via USB on the VX7 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 44 D15 Female Connector Pinout Pin VD 0 1 OQ th d U Nel Rh e a e e nA A U N C Shell 10 15 Signal USB2N_A RXP RXN USB2P_A DGND RJA5 45 RJA5 78 5V USB 23 TXN TXP CGND External Connectors Figure 2 15 D15 Female Connector Description USB H D Not Connected USB D Power Receive Receive USB H D USB H Power Return USB D D RJ45 Pins 4 and 5 Connections RJ45 Pins 7 and 8 Connections USB H Power Current Limited USB D Power Return USB D D Transmit Transmit Chassis Ground VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 45 USB Host Connector Figure 2 16 Dongle
63. and other beeps from the VX7 during final barcode data manipulation E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 32 Power Modes Power Modes The VX7 has several distinct power modes On Mode When the VX7 is attached to either vehicle 12 80 VDC or an external power supply and the power button is pressed the VX7 is in the On mode In this mode the keypad touchscreen and any attached peripherals such as a scanner function normally The display remains on until the backlight timer if enabled expires User Idle Mode If the Display Backlight Timer is enabled see the Display section in the Windows CE Control panel the VX7 enters User Idle Mode when the display backlight timer expires without any Primary Event see below to reset the timer When the timer expires the display and display backlight are turned off The VX7 exits User Idle Mode with any Primary Event The keypress or screen touch that exits User Idle Mode is sent to the operating system The VX7 then transitions to On Mode Primary Events Any key on the keypad COMI activity Stylus touch on the touchscreen Scanner activity Power button tap USB client connection Bluetooth device reconnect disconnect message System Idle Mode The VX7 does not support System Idle mode Suspend Mode TheV X7 does not support Suspend mode However if the Suspend timer is enabled the VX7 transitions to Off mode when the Suspend timer expires Off M
64. application will allow two instances to run at the same time Application Panel Note Users of Single Application AppLock have a Control tab instead of an Application tab Some of the options in this section do not apply to the Control tab Administrator Control Application Security Options Status Filename PO E Icom E Title D 7 Order bo Arguments Internet 4 Menu Status Launch Clear gt Global Key ctrl Spa y Input Panel APLCKPNET2Cn Figure 6 4 Application Panel Note If your Application Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Single Application version Single Application version Use the Application tab options to select the applications to launch when the device boots up in End user Mode If no application is specified when the Administrator Control Panel is closed the mobile device reboots into Administrator mode If a password has been set but an application has not been VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Application Configuration specified the user will be prompted for the password before entering administration mode The 277 password prompt remains on the display until a valid password is entered Option Explanation Filename Default is blank Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the application path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displ
65. be found forcing the item to execute For persist keys specifying EXE or BAT files the executing process will be started and then Launch will continue leaving the loading process to run independently For other persist keys including CAB files Launch will wait for the loading process to complete before continuing This is important for example to ensure that a CAB file is installed before the EXE files from the CAB file are run The Order field is used to force a sequence of events Order 0 is first and Order 99 is last Two items which have the same order will be installed in the same pass but not in a predictable sequence Note If the order of loading is not critical it may be easier to use the System Startup folder instead see below The Delay field is used to add a delay after the item is loaded before the next is loaded The delay is given in seconds and defaults to 0 if not specified If the install fails or the file to be installed is not found the delay does not occur The PCMCIA field is used to indicate that the file usually a CAB file being loaded is a wireless client driver and the PCMCIA slots should be started after this file is loaded By default the Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Utilities 137 PCMCIA slots are off on powerup to prevent the Unidentified PCMCIA Slot dialog from appearing Once the drivers are loaded the slot can be turned on The value in the PCMCIA field is a DWORD represen
66. be to be processed Any barcode scanned that has more characters than specified in the Max field is rejected The default for this field is All If the value entered is greater than the maximum value allowed for that symbology the maximum valid length will be used instead 170 Parameters Enable Min Max VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation 171 Strip Leading Trailing Control This group of controls determines what data is removed from the barcode before the data is buffered for the application If all values are set Code ID takes precedence over Leading and Trailing Barcode Data stripping is performed last Stripping occurs before the Prefix and Suffix are added so does not affect them See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter Symbology fan y Strip Enable Min i Max fal _ Leading Trailing V Code ID Barcode Data Figure 4 5 Strip Leading Trailing Controls If the total number being stripped is greater than the number of characters in the barcode data it becomes a zero byte data string If in addition Strip Code ID is enabled and no prefix or suffix 1s configured the processing will return a zero byte data packet which will be rejected The operation of each type of stripping is defined below Leading This strips the number of characters specified from the beginning of the barcode data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditi
67. cis o o ne po o bn o EE rr tH omo D OH Oro EHE RS 255 Certificate Services Welcome SC cds 255 Download CA CentiiGate Mo oa cod 256 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide xvili Table of Contents Figure 5 82 Download CA Centilicdle Orca asse E quiu oe etu rodea ede Ui Fate ee equ ERE 256 Lipuyeo 83 Certificates seco ep REO ves oO URDU eH PER ERU EUR Ebor E edited b ad 257 Figures 84 Import Certificate cunado ac 257 Eigure5 85 Browsing to Cerificate LOCO ninia 258 Fisure 5 86 Certificate Import Conima O siiip pt testen tH boe nies 258 Figure 5 57 Logon to Certiticate AmUBOEPty notorie nto p ert e oH HE ipt ber Doe tn 259 Fiure 5 88 Certificate Services Welcome Seria lato OERI EEES 239 Fig te 5 89 Request a Certificate SOI aia nietas 260 Figure 5 90 Advanced Certificate Request ei 260 Figure 5291 Advanced Conilicate Detalle da 261 Figure 3 92 Script Warnings uii een iti nr EHE conocia cas 262 Fismes S93 Serpe VW aru Orson ME 262 Figure 9 94 Cer ficate Issued ec teo dios 263 Fipure 305 Download Security WabBIDB 5 o apis Hoo ttr EHE adi 263 Figure 5 00 Certilicates iet b pip HEB p cera rere tte t ote a b a Use D En ibas 264 Eienes 97 Import Ceti CA tes eoo oie rE E a E Ea a ea T En A A R Ceon EEEN n C Herd 264 Figiite 5 98 Browsing to Cerificate Locatii ini bp 265 Figure S 99 Certificate LISA nke a A EEE E E T 265 Figure 5 100 Private Key Not Presentarse ia ranita ER N URN QE EES 266 Figure 5 101 Browsing to Private Key LocatiOi
68. dB Input Boost can only be enabled after an Input type other than None is selected 114 Mixer Access Start Settings Control Panel Mixer Icon Adjust the volume record gain and sidetone for microphone input Factory Default Settings Master Volume 0dB Record Gain 22 5dB Sidetone 12 0dB Input None Input Boost Disabled Mixer Master Volume Record Gain a Ode a 22 5d8 KA 46 5d8 KA Ode 6 0 dB 22 5 dB settings The following options are available for Input device device e Bluetooth Reserved for future use VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 115 Mouse Access Start Settings Control Panel Mouse Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen or an external mouse MX3X VXC Options Access Start Settings Control Panel MX3X VXC Options Set options such as IP V6 time sync touchscreen enable and CapsLock It may be necessary to warmboot the VX7 after making desired changes A pop up window indicates if a warmboot is required Communication Options on this tab configure communication options for the VX7 MX3X VXC Options ki OK E Communication Misc Status Popup Enable TCP IP Version 6 Allow Remote Desktop Autologon Note RDP file must be saved in System Folder Autolaunch TimeSync Figure 3 23 MX3X VXC Options Properties Communication Tab Enable TCP IP Version 6 By default IPv6 is disabled on the LXE device Ch
69. device The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager is LXE_VXC See Also Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 146 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Enabler Configuration The Enabler user interface application is launched by clicking either the Avalanche icon on the desktop or Taskbar Avalanche Icon or ES selecting Avalanche from the Programs menu The opening screen presents the user with the connection status and a navigation menu File View Help Avalanche Enabler 4 02 24 Copyright 2003 2008 Wavelink Corporation Checking COM1 Connecting to SERIAL Agent not found Connection pending Checking TCP Connecting to SERIAL Figure 3 40 Avalanche Enabler Opening Screen Some parameters and features described in this section may not be available if you are not running the latest version of the Enabler Please contact your LXE representative for details File View Help Connect Updates Adapter Info Abort Programs About Settings Icons Scan Config List Exit Details Launchable All Packages Time on Taskbar Device Status VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 147 File Menu Options Connect The Connect option under the File menu allows the user to initiate a manual connection to the Mobile Device Server The connection methods by default are wireless an
70. enabled the Reconnect button on the Diags tag is clicked or the profile is modified and the Commit button is clicked VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 207 Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path User Certificates EAP TLS authentication requires a user certificate The user certificate must be stored in the Windows certificate store e To generate the user certificate follow the instructions in Generating a User Certificate for the Mobile Device later in this chapter e Import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store by following the instructions in Installing a User Certificate on the Mobile Device later in this chapter e A Root CA certificate is also needed for EAP TLS Refer to the section below Root CA Certificates Root CA certificates are required for PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP TLS Two options are offered for storing these certificates They may be imported into the Windows certificate store or copied into the Certs Path directory How To Use the Certs Path 1 Follow the instructions later in this chapter for Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC 2 Copy the certificate to specified directory on the mobile device The default location for Certs Path is System A different location may be specified by using the Certs Path global variable Please note the location chosen for certificate storage should persist after warmboot 3 When completing the Credent
71. keys and specify application launch or run command key sequences Factory Default Settings KeyMap Modifier Mode None Key Fl Remapped Key Fl Key Sequence Null LaunchApp App1 App4 Null App Opt exe RunCmd Cmd1 Cmd4 Null File Parm file KeyMap Tap the OK button to save changes Tap the X button to ignore changes and return to the Control Panel Keypad Control E OK KeyMap LaunchApp Runcmd Modifier Mode amp None O shift 2nd shift Remapped Key Key Sequence Fi y Figure 3 19 KeyPad Properties KeyMap Tab Modifier Mode Available modifier keys are None Shift and 2 Shift The default value is None Key The key to be remapped valid keys alone or with a modifier key F1 through F10 Scan Key Left Scan Key Right Enter Decimal Remapped Key A key can be remapped to any single key in the drop down list VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 111 a Key Sequence string of keys an application LaunchApp a command RunCmd Key Sequence The Key Sequence textbox displays the results of the keypress if a Key Sequence LaunchApp or RunCmd is mapped to the keypress For more information please see the How To sections later in this chapter LaunchApp The default for all text boxes is Null The text boxes accept string values only Click the exe radio button to e
72. name to appear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 93 Language and Fonts The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image Software Network IP GUID 8B075942 C347 EEEF 709D DSB052F6F 724 Windows CE version Windows CE 4 20 patched through Apr 30 2006 OAL version VXC VXCPC422BT XScale PXA255 Jun 8 2006 09 01 06 Bootloader version VXC VXCPC422BT XScale PXA255 Jun 8 2006 09 29 49 Compile version VXCPC422BT compiled Jun 8 2006 09 01 14 FPGA version FPGA v 2 6 Language ANSI 1252 Win Latin 1 OEM 437 US Enalish only Figure 3 3 About Properties Software The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab e English only No additional fonts are built into the OS e Japanese e Simplified Chinese e Traditional Chinese e Korean The listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built in to the VX7 OS image Built in fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup Thai Hebrew Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the English only default extended fonts When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the System folder the font works for Asian web pages the font works with RFTerm the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Settings control panel the font does not work for naming desk
73. network parameters Please see Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for details Stores Network communication options Transfer files between a VX7 and a desktop computer Run this command after setting up a connection Begin connection to FTP server End connection to FTP server View downloaded files see Note View Excel 97 and newer documents View BMP JPEG and PNG images View Adobe Acrobat documents View Word 97 and newer documents and RTF files Set Summit radio network parameters Please see Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for details The command line interface in a separate window Microsoft Outlook mail inbox Access web pages on the world wide Internet Option Option Terminal emulation application Music management program Opens an ASCII notepad Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Enter data using the stylus on the touchscreen Option Remote management for networked devices File management program Note The Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 308 Start Menu Program Options Communication Access Start Programs Communication Note Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the VX7 Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE ActiveSync Once a relationship partnership has been established with Connect ActiveSync will synchronize using the radio link on
74. nn atur erred 49 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Input Connector rrt pete te erri tts 50 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Output Connector 51 eerec itecto eere ipee pene vro 50 Extet al Amt i et EE HERE DOE HAE ees EE EDO Rt een ee 51 RF Antenna 55 COME ii 51 internal Antenna Cables aceti te EHE EORR Top MU Dre BUR IEEE Ro Ep EO ELO 52 The LXE VMT Keyboards with Cable a rotae Hope ERU HOHER HERE 53 The 95 key QWERTY Gy DOE eae iE Ua et IR ease ete END as axo Reo RE eRe We 54 The 60 key OWERT Y Keyboard crucis alada 56 IBM S270 Specie Wey aha nsa cased cadsesitis tans pee eis p rss 56 IBM 5250 Specie Keypnda invetero re DH HE xb Mr sat PER ues tue RED RIP ERES 56 Keyboard LEDS veure naar oro ab ar E rs 58 The CapsLock Tm T 58 The Secondary Key 3 tni SE HERI E ERRARE FREUE ERE IURE E MEE E ela 59 The VMT Keyboard Display Control ainia itc rie hei cas i ERU E ERA 60 Smalliand Large Virtual Keyboards aiii 63 Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents XV Figure 2 38 Figure 2 39 Figure 2 40 Figure 2 41 Figure 2 42 Figure 2 43 Figure 2 44 Figure 2 45 Figure 2 46 Figure 2 47 Figure 2 48 Figure 2 49 Figure 2 50 Figure 2 51 Figure 2 52 Figure 3 1 Figure 3 2 Figure 3 3 Figure 3 4 Figure 3 5 Figure 3 6 Figure 3 7 Figure 3 8 Figure 3 9 Figure 3 10 Figure 3 11 Figure 3 12 Figure 3 13 Figure 3 14 Figure 3 15 Figure 3 16 Figure 3 17 Figure 3 18 Figure 3 19 Figure 3 20 Fig
75. of the selected application when it is automatically launched at bootup Delay default is 10 seconds Valid values are between 0 seconds no delay and 999 seconds The Auto At Boot delay is associated for each application it will be either a value specified by the Administrator or it will be the delay default value At startup when a delay has been assigned for each application AppLock waits for the delay associated with the first application to expire before launching the first application then AppLock waits for the delay associated with the second application to expire before launching the second application AppLock continues in this manner until all applications are launched Note A Global Delay can be accomplished by setting a timed delay for the first application to be launched by lowest Order number and no delay 0 seconds for all other applications E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 280 Application Configuration Auto Re Launch Default is Enabled Auto Re Launch when enabled for a specific application automatically re launches it subject to the specified Auto Re Launch Delay in seconds after it terminates This option allows the Administrator to disable the re launch operation AppLock cannot prevent all applications from closing When an application that AppLock cannot prevent from closing terminates perhaps because of an error condition AppLock re launches the application when this option is enabled Note
76. on the flash drive but must be loaded into RAM to run All registry configurations are automatically preserved Any applications stored as CAB files in the System directory and configured in the registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the Launch utility A coldboot reboots the computer erases all registry data and returns the computer to factory default settings In order to be preserved applications and data must be stored in the System folder Registry information is not preserved Only factory default applications and drivers stored as CAB files in the System directory are loaded by Launch A cold boot is initiated by running the Coldboot application in the Windows directory This application automatically cold boots the VX7 erasing any customer applied registry changes and returning the VX7 to its factory settings E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 80 Installed Software Installed Software When you order a VX7 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and radio communication The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories in the VX7 This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files Files installed in each VX7 are specific to the intended function of the VX7 Files installed in each VX7 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio specific drivers the drivers for each type of radio are specific to the
77. only Main Only Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna s installed on your VX7 Frag Thresh If the packet size in bytes exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the fragment threshold the packet is fragmented sent as several pieces instead of as one block Use a low setting in areas where communication is poor or where there is a great deal of radio interference Options 256 to 2346 Default 2346 RTS Thresh If the packet size exceeds the specified number of bytes set in the Request to Send RTS threshold an RTS is sent before sending the packet A low RTS threshold setting can be useful in areas where many client devices are associating with the Access Point Options 0 to 2347 Default 2347 LED The LED on the radio card is not visible to the user when the radio card is installed in a sealed mobile device Options On Off Default Off VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 203 Tray Icon Determines if the Summit icon is displayed in the system tray Options On Off Default On Hide Password If On the Summit Client Utility masks passwords as they are typed and when they are viewed Options On Off Default Depends on SCU revision Admin Password A string of up to 64 alphanumeric characters that must be entered when the Admin Login button is tapped If Hide Password is On the password is masked when typed in the Admin Password Entry text box The pas
78. running a Microsoft Windows CE operating system and capable of wireless data communications from a fork lift truck or any properly configured vehicle The VX7 provides power and functionality in a vehicle mounted unit with a wide range of options CPU 400MHz Intel PXA255 Memory 64 or 128MB SDRAM Di Indoor or Outdoor 12 1 display integrated Touchscreen adjustable isplay brightness Wireless LAN radio single or dual antenna Network n Ethernet port connectivity Optional Bluetooth module Audio Speakers in front bezel audio jack for headset with microphone Compact Flash Storage media PCMCIA Secure Digital SD cues Microsoft Windows CE NET 4 2 or CE 5 0 system Extended temperature version Other options TM RAM Mount vehicle mounting E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 2 When to Use this Guide When to Use this Guide La The VX7 User s Guide is directed toward the VX7 user It is delivered on the LXE Documentation CD It contains safety warnings descriptions of the controls and connectors instruction on installing antennas and day to day operation As the reference for LXE s VX7 equipped with a Microsoft Windows CE operating system this guide provides detailed information on its features and functionality Use this guide as you would any other source book reading portions to learn about the VX7 and then referring to it when you need more information about a partic
79. so you can synchronize information between your device and your desktop computer and e customize your synchronization settings Because ActiveSync is already installed on your device your first synchronization process begins automatically when you finish setting up your desktop computer in the ActiveSync wizard Prerequisites VX7 and ActiveSync Partnership A partnership between the VX7 and ActiveSync has been established See section ActiveSync Initial Setup in Chapter 1 Introduction Getting Started Serial Port Transfer e A desktop or laptop PC with an available serial port and a VX7 with a serial port The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 95 98 NT 2000 or XP e Null modem cable with all control lines connected LXE recommends using the null modem cable part number listed in Chapter 1 Introduction subsection Accessories VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSync 131 USB Transfer e A desktop or laptop PC with an available USB port and a VX7 with a USB port The desktop or laptop PC must be running Windows 98 SR2 2000 or XP e A standard USB cable with a type A plug on one end and a type B plug on the other Connect Connect the modem cable to the PC the host and the VX7 the client Select Connect from the Start Menu on the VX7 Start Programs Communications Connect Note Run Connect when the Get Connected wizard
80. the 2 4GHz Type II PCMCIA Radio Description and Layout Chapter 3 System Revised Control Panel Options Vehicle 12 80VDC Direct Connection Configuration and Enabler Configuration Added Wi Fi and eXpress Scan sections Chapter 5 Wireless Network Revised the following sections Introduction Summit Radio Summit Configuration Client Utility Main Tab Revised Profile Tab parameters Radio Mode and TxPower Revised Global Tab parameters TX Diversity Rx Diversity Added Global Tab parameter DFS Channels Appendix B Technical Revised Network Device Specifications Specifications Revision H September 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction Added section Configuring the VX7 with LXEConnect Chapter 2 Physical Added section Custom Key Maps Description and Layout Chapter 3 System Removed sections Storage Manager Changing the Display Resolution Configuration Disabling the Touchscreen Disabling the Touchscreen Heater Configuring CapsLock Behavior Configuring NumLock Behavior Configuring IPv6 and Enabling GrabTime Revised sections Control Panel Options and LAUNCH EXE Added section KeyPad MX3 VXC Options Chapter 4 Scanner Revised chapter Chapter 5 Wireless Network Revised section Summit Radio Configuration Chapter 6
81. the Global tab if there are unsaved changes If changes are made to the stored credentials click Commit to save those changes before making any additional changes to the global parameters Note Custom parameter options Some parameters contain an option for custom The parameter s value is displayed as Custom when the operating system registry has been used to set the parameter to a value not available from the Global settings parameter options Selecting Custom for a parameter has no effect as the parameter value returns to the previously selected value when you press Commit Roam Trigger If signal strength is less than this trigger value the radio looks for a different AP with a stronger signal Options 50 55 60 65 70 75 dBm Custom see Note above Default 65 dBm E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 200 Summit Radio Roam Delta Amount by which the new AP s signal strength must exceed the current AP s signal strength before roaming is attempted Options 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 dBm Custom see Note above Default 10 dBm for 802 1 1b g radio 5 dBm for 802 1 1a b g radio Roam Period The amount of time after association or a roam scan with no roam that the radio collects Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI scan data before a roaming decision is made Options 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 sec Custom see Note above Default 10 seconds for 802 11b g radio 5
82. the proper revision S Some features described in this manual require a certain minimum revision level of level or newer of system software is installed The software revision is displayed during boot up and on the default desktop wallpaper The revision can also be viewed using the Start Settings Control Panel About icon For more information please refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration To upgrade the VX7 with a newer revision of system software please refer to Reflash the VX7 in Chapter 3 System Configuration E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 28 Hardware Configuration System Hardware Hardware Configuration The VX7 hardware configuration is shown in the following figure Compact Flash ori bn Hard Mor PCMCIA Drive Secure Digital Antenna Card Memory Card Connector n n NE A Led e I Serial m ME Connector Mouse Connector COM Scanner Connector 9 pin male D Serial USB Connector Ethernet COM3 PRINTER PC Connector 9pin male D DC out 12V AC Adapter AC in 120 240V Uninterruptible Power Supply UPS DC in 12 80V DC in 12 80V Figure 2 1 VX7 Hardware Configuration E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide Hardware Configuration 29 Central Processing Unit The LXE VX7 contains an 400MHz Intel PXA255 CPU l O Components The VX7 supports the following I
83. to Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters earlier in this guide for RFTerm quick start instruction Refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD for complete information and instruction Installed by LXE Application is setup by the Administrator by tapping Start Settings Control Panel Administration Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up See Also Chapter 6 AppLock for instruction Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Optional The following features are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Mobility Center MC Console After configuration Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset Network parameter configuration is supported for e IP address DHCP or static IP e RF network SSID e DNS hosts primary secondary tertiary e Subnet mask e Enabler update Related Manual Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers The VX7 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed on the mobile device when it is shipped from LXE
84. when not needed Please see Disabling the Touchscreen Heater in Chapter 3 System Configuration Note To identify your VX7 platform type please see Identifying Your VX7 earlier in this chapter E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 66 PCMCIA CF and SD Slots PCMCIA CF and SD Slots The VX7 has two PCMCIA slots one Compact Flash slot and one Secure Digital slot The PCMCIA slots are stacked on top of each other and located on the right hand side of the opening The PCMCIA slots support the Personal Computer Memory Card International Association PCMCIA 2 1 standards The upper slot is designated as Slot A and the lower slot is designated as Slot B Slot A accepts Type I or II PCMCIA cards If a radio card is used it must be installed in Slot A to prevent damage to the internal radio cables LXE supports only Type II radios Slot B accepts Type I or II PCMCIA cards The PCMCIA slots may be disabled by the user To enable or disable a PCMCIA slot select Start Settings Control Panel IPCMCIA icon The center slot is a Compact Flash slot containing the CF ATA hard drive This drive contains the operating system and settings The left slot is used for Secure Digital SD memory cards CF ATA PCMCIA A 4 L rouca s E 1 SD Card Slot 2 Compact Flash Hard Drive 3 PCMCIA Slots Figure 2 39 The PCMCIA and ATA Slots PCMCIA Slots Slot A and B PCMCIA Card Management is handled by the
85. with the PS 2 keyboard and mouse for more information on their operation USB Keyboard Mouse A standard USB mouse can be attached to the VX7 using the appropriate dongle cable A standard USB keyboard cane be attached to Platform 2 VX7 s using the appropriate dongle cable The dongle cable attaches to the VX7 and provides a USB connector Please refer to documentation provided with the USB keyboard and mouse for more information on their operation To identify your VX7 platform type please see Identifying Your VX7 earlier in this chapter VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Keyboards 63 Input Panel Virtual Keyboard The Input Panel may be enabled via the Input Panel icon in the Microsoft Windows CE Control panel The Input Panel can be displayed as a large or small keyboard Input Panel Es 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 Tab tiy v 1 cul if y el gt Input Panel esc Fa 62 Fa Fa F 66 r7 ro Fo Fro eus nares e fr 1 2 3 4 s e 8 o lus re a w e r t v u i Jo e E 1 V Caps Lock me z x e v b n im ue roo fwn ee teja rt sn Figure 2 37 Small and Large Virtual Keyboards Virtual keyboards display the actual character a keypress results in For example pressing the Shift key on the virtual keyboard toggles the characters displayed on the keys between upper and lower case The lt aii gt key toggles the keys between standard and international sym
86. 23 456 789 00 pos 123 456 789 00 neg Time h mm ss tt tt AM or PM Date M d yy short dddd MMMM dd yyyy long Tap the Customize button to set Number Currency Time and Date format for the selected Locale Remove Programs Access Start Settings Control Panel Remove Programs No change from general desktop Remove Programs options Select a program and click Remove Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user installed only programs The change takes effect immediately E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 332 Scanner Control Panel Options Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports To set the Scanner parameters please see Chapter 4 Scanner for details Storage Manager Access Start Settings Control Panel Storage Manager Installed storage devices are listed by device name in the dropdown box To view information about the disk or perform store operations select a device from the list On line help is available for this option Topics available are e Manage storage devices e Manage disk partitions e Creating a new partition e Advanced partition features LXE recommends caution when formatting or dismounting storage devices and when creating new partitions or deleting partitions on the storage device
87. 24 Windows CE version Windows CE 4 20 patched through Apr 30 2006 OAL version VXC VXCPC422BT XScale PXA255 Jun 8 2006 09 01 06 Bootloader version VXC VXCPC422BT XScale PXA255 Jun 8 2006 09 29 49 Compile version VXCPC422BT compiled Jun 8 2006 09 01 14 FPGA version FPGA v 2 6 Language ANSI 1252 Win Latin 1 OEM 437 US Enalish only Figure C 3 About Properties Software The fonts built into the OS image are noted in the Language section of this tab e English only No additional fonts are built into the OS e Japanese e Simplified Chinese e Traditional Chinese e Korean The listed Asian fonts are ordered separately and built in to the VX7 OS image Built in fonts are added to registry entries and are available immediately upon startup Thai Hebrew Arabic and Cyrillic Russian fonts are available in the English only default extended fonts When an Asian font is copied into the fonts folder on the System folder the font works for Asian web pages the font works with RFTerm the font does not work for Asian options in Regional Settings control panel the font does not work for naming desktop icons with Asian names the font does not work for third party NET applications the font does not work for some third party MFC applications E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 316 Control Panel Options Identifying Software Versions The Versions tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed Not all in
88. 4 8 Barcode Tab Ctrl Char Mapping See Hat Encoding and Decimal Hexadecimal Chart at the end of Appendix B Technical Specifications Translate All When Translate All is checked unprintable ASCII characters characters below 20H in scanned barcodes are assigned to their appropriate CTRL code sequence when the barcodes are sent in Character mode The wedge provides a one to one mapping of control characters to their equivalent control character sequence of keystrokes If control characters are translated the translation is performed on the barcode data prefix and suffix before the keystrokes are simulated Translate All This option is grayed unless the user has Key Message mode on the Main tab selected In Key Message mode when this option is enabled control characters embedded in a scanned barcode are translated to their equivalent control key keystroke sequence 13 0x0d is translated to Control M keystrokes as if the user pressed the CTRL SHIFT and m keys on the keypad Additionally when Translate All is disabled any control code which has a keystroke equivalent enter tab escape backspace etc is output as a keystroke Any control code without a keystroke equivalent is dropped Character This is a drop down combo box that contains the control character name Refer to the Character drop down box for the list of control characters and their names When a character name is selected from the drop dow
89. 5 Certificates Root Certificates Generating a Root CA Certificate Ea Please refer to the LXE Security Primer for more information on obtaining and installing root certificates The easiest way to get the root CA certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA To request the root CA certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with any valid username and password C onnect to 100 100 100 100 21x Connecting to 100 100 100 100 User name a y 5 Password Remember my password x coma Figure 5 79 Logon to Certificate Authority Microsoft Certificat es johndoe Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By Using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages and depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to dowmload a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL orto view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Figure 5 80 Certificate Services
90. 55 CIRL Copy CTRL X Cut CTRL V Paste CTRL Z Undo DELETE Delete Select more than one item in a window or on the RETE S O U anon keys desktop or select text within a document CTRL A Select all ALT ESC Cycle through items in the order they were opened CTRL ESC Display the Start menu ALT Underlined letter in a menu jam Display the corresponding menu Underlined letter in a command Carry out the corresponding command name on an open menu ESC Cancel the current task The touchscreen provides equivalent functionality to a mouse e A touch on the touchscreen is equivalent to a left mouse click e Many items can be moved by the drag and drop method touching the desired item moving the stylus across the screen and releasing the stylus in the desired location e A double stylus tap is equivalent to a double click e A touch and hold is equivalent to a right mouse click Note Some applications may not support this right click method Please review documentation for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click configuration E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 62 The Keyboards PS 2 Keyboard Mouse A standard PS 2 keyboard and mouse can be attached to the VX7 using the appropriate dongle cable The dongle cable attaches to the VX7 and provides two PS 2 connectors one labeled Keyboard and one labeled Mouse Please refer to documentation provided
91. 567890yyy EAN 13 E01234 ccc EOyyy 12 5 1104444567890987654321 lt rejected gt too long 12 5 1104444567890123 ddd7890zzz 12 5 110444 dddzzz 12 5 11022245622 ddd45zzz Code 93 1G0123456 lt rejected gt disabled Code 93 1G0444444 lt rejected gt disabled Code 39 1401234567890 aaa4567890www Code 39 full ASCII A41231234567890 aaal234567890www Code 39 A4 lt rejected gt too short Rejected barcodes generate a bad scan beep In some cases the receipt of data from the scanner triggers a good scan beep from the external scanner and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing causes a bad scan beep on the same data E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 180 Length Based Barcode Stripping Length Based Barcode Stripping Use this procedure to create symbology rules for two barcodes with the same symbology but with different discrete lengths This procedure is not applicable for barcodes with variable lengths falling between a maximum value and a minimum value Example 1 e Anormal AIM or Symbol symbology role can be created for the desired barcode ID e Next a custom barcode symbology must be created using the same Code ID as the original AIM or Symbol ID rule and each rule would have unique length settings Example 2 For the purposes of this example the following sample barcode parameters will be used EANI28 and Code128 barcodes Some of the barcodes start with 00 and some star
92. 8 Jv WEP Key 1 el eO weey2O 00 WEP Key 3 Ol eO I wekey 4O 0 Figure 5 35 Cisco Profile WEP Keys LEAP Note The instructions in this section are for LEAP without WPA Please see WPA LEAP later in this chapter for instructions on using LEAP with WPA Create a new profile or edit an exiting profile e Network security must be set to LEAP e The following parameters are accessible when LEAP is selected Please enter the appropriate information o User Name o User Password o User Domain optional E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 228 Cisco Radio Firmware Tab Displays the current firmware version and allows you to load new firmware Tap the Browse button to locate the new firmware file Status Tab Immediately runs status on signal strength and signal quality Statistics Tab Select the Receive Stats or Transmit Stats The data is displayed on the screen Survey Tab Immediately runs signal strength and quality and link speed An option is available to Setup parameters for Active Mode reporting VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 229 Configuring for WPA Wi Fi Protected Access WPA is only available on VX7 s equipped with the u updated Cisco radio driver release 2 60 or later WPA requires software revision 1ED or greater To identify the software revision please click on the About icon in the Windows CE Control Panel L Please refer to the LXE Security Prime
93. 95 key QWERTY Keyboard The 95 key keyboard supports all 104 keyboard functions 101 keyboard standard plus Windows keys and includes an integrated pointing device and left and right mouse buttons However because the keyboard only has 95 keys all functions are not visible or printed on the keyboard Therefore the VX7 keyboard supports what is called hidden keys keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard Note The 95 key keyboard does not have a 2 key function NumLock and the VX7 For the 95 key keyboard the NumLock key and the numeric keys are backlit green when NumLock is off When NumLock is on the backlight for the NumLock key and the numeric keys is amber For information on preserving NumLock configuration after a reboot please see Configuring NumLock Behavior in Chapter 3 System Configuration CapsLock and the VX7 For the 95 key keyboard the CapsLock key is backlit green when CapsLock is off When CapsLock is on the backlight for the CapsLock key is amber For information on preserving CapsLock configuration after a reboot please see Configuring CapsLock Behavior in Chapter 3 System Configuration Scroll Lock and the VX7 The Scroll Lock key is backlit green when Scroll Lock is off When Scroll Lock is on the backlight for the Scroll Lock key is amber The default values for CapsLock and Scroll Lock are Off VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Keyboards 55 Ke
94. A USB Client port e Audio connects to a mono or stereo telephone headset microphone Other external connectors are located as follows e Antenna connectors are located on the top of the VX7 VX7 s can be configured for a single antenna or dual antennas VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 35 Scanner Serial Connector COM1 The serial connector labeled SCANNER configured as COM1 is industry standard RS 232 The connector includes a PC AT standard 9 pin D male connector By default Pin 9 is configured to supply 5 VDC at 0 4A max for an external bar code scanner Pin 9 may also be configured to provide RI Refer to Chapter 4 Scanner section titled Serial Port Pin 9 for more information on configuring Pin 9 If Pin 9 is powered off please see Technical Specifications Connection Cable in the following section for information on using a serial cable If COM1 is not being used for a scanner it can also be used for screen blanking when the vehicle is in motion Please see Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable in the following section for more details Figure 2 3 Scanner Serial Connector COM1 Note Power the VX7 off before attaching a cable or device to the COMI serial port Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 DCD Data Carrier Detect Input 2 RXD Receive Data Input 3 TXD Transmit Data Output 4 DTR Data Terminal Ready Output 5 GND Signa
95. A as 48 UPS Battery Pack t DUBECIQES iaa 49 jj eT Ea 49 PINOUE ee CURT 49 A O eed 49 PO ana dota 49 LPS Battery Extension Cable ODDOOLOER usse cann tetra doloso 50 os e 50 uni 50 Rino PEDES 50 PIO 50 Antenna EC CUMS Asis 51 Spread Spectrum RF Antenna Connector Pin iris 5l Vehicle Remote Antenna li Sl Ma A QT E n NH 52 The Keyboards e 53 The 95 key QWERTY Keyboard with Pointing Device anio 54 A A 54 NumLaceand ls VAT iii 54 o db IAS VA T ni Oi 54 Scroll Lockandthe VX A a 54 Keyboard B crisis 55 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide iv Table of Contents The 60 Key QWERTY ANDO sii diia agseuiniade 56 TEL ZE de 56 IBM 3250 Keyp d Overlay NM 56 E E E E E E E E E E 37 A aa aaa ae H 57 Keyboard A A 27 Keyboard LEDS APR CDREEUR 58 CAPS LED aaa oc lori va E EF enna DER QU Rob ra ri EU Gein ean EROR RN re 58 Secondary Keys LED a 59 Control A nea R 60 Custom Ko dr Merc P o H 61 General Windows CE Keyboard Shorteula vecina 61 PS 2 keyboard dup A ra EN 62 USB Keyboard MOUSE ii Ad AE 62 Input Panel Virtual iia 63 Enabline the Input Panel AA 64 The 11 Y 7 99 65 Cleanine the IB e ee d oU ne en M DMPMMEEMEnG Obr
96. CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File Close Access Start Programs Inbox This option requires a connection to a mail server There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Inbox as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Outlook Inbox options Click the button to access Inbox Help ActiveSync can be used to transfer messages between the VX7 inbox and a desktop inbox Internet Explorer Access Start Programs Internet Explorer This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Click the button to access Internet Explorer Help Media Player Access Start Programs Media Player There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options Click the button to access Media Player Help VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Start Menu Program Options 311 Remote Desktop Connection Access Start Programs Remote Desktop Connection There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Remote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options Select a com
97. Configuring CapsLock Behavior in Chapter 3 System Configuration VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Keyboards 59 Secondary Keys LED The VMT keyboard is equipped with several secondary keys These keys are identified by the superscripted text found on the keyboard keys The secondary keys are accessible by using two 2 keystrokes the lt 2 gt key followed by the superscripted key Figure 2 35 The Secondary Key Once the lt 2 gt state is enabled by pressing the lt 2 gt key the Secondary Mode LED is illuminated and the lt 2 gt state is enabled until another key is pressed The lt 2 gt key is toggled on with a lt 2 gt keypress and then immediately off with another lt 2 gt keypress For example Press lt 2 gt and lt F1 gt to turn CapsLock on and off Press lt 2 gt and 17 to initiate the PgUp command Press lt 2 gt and lt Q gt to type the key Press lt 2 gt and lt BkSp gt to enter the Insert Ins mode E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 60 The Keyboards Control Keys The VMT keyboard has several control keys Because of the construction of the VX7 and the Microsoft Windows CE operating system many of the Control Keys are not used on the VX7 Note The 2 functions of the lt F4 gt and lt F5 gt keys are not used as the display brightness is adjusted via the buttons on the VX7 Control Panel The 2 functions of the F6 and F7 keys are not used a
98. Currency Time and Date format for the selected Locale User Interface Language determines the language used for the menus dialogs and alerts Select the Default Input Language to use when the device is rebooted Remove Programs Scanner Access Start Settings Control Panel Remove Programs No change from general desktop Remove Programs options Select a program and click Remove Follow the prompts on the screen to uninstall user installed only programs The change takes effect immediately Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports To set the Scanner parameters please see Chapter 4 Scanner for details VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options Stylus Double Tap Calibration Access 125 Start Settings Control Panel Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel Follow the instructions on the screen and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Stylus Properties fa OK x Double Tap Calibration If your Windows CE device is not responding properly to your taps you may need to recalibrate your screen Recalibration involves tapping the center of a target If you miss the center keep the stylus on the screen slide it ove
99. Customize the way the keyboard sound display mouse automatic reset and notification sound function There is no change from general desktop Accessibility options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Accessibility Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General Use StickyKeys if you want to use Shift Ctrl or Alt key by pressing one key at a time Use StickyKeys Use ToggleKeys if you want to hear tones when pressing CapsLock NumLock and ScrollLock Use ToggleKeys Figure 3 6 Accessibility Properties Keyboard If the StickyKeys option is selected the Shift Ctrl and Alt keys become sticky keys When a sticky key is pressed and released the key remains in effect to modify the next keypress If the ToggleKeys option is selected please note that Scroll Lock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system Accessibility Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General Use Soundsentry if you want Windows to generate visual warnings when your system makes a sound Use SoundSentry Figure 3 7 Accessibility Properties Sound If the SoundSentry option is selected please note that Scroll Lock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system E EQ VX7RG L A
100. E User user2 Password LXE PAC Filename PAC Password Figure 5 27 EAP FAST Credentials To use Sign On credentials e Do not enter a User and Password as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network To use Stored Credentials e Enter the Domain Username if the Doman is required otherwise enter the Username e Enter the password To use Automatic PAC Provisioning e No additional entries are required To use manual PAC Provisioning e Enter the PAC Filename and PAC Password e The PAC file must be copied to the directory specified in the Certs Path global variable The PAC file must not be read only Tap OK then tap Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network Note When using Automatic PAC Provisioning once authenticated there is a file stored in the System directory with the PAC credentials If the username is changed that file must be deleted The filename is autoP 00 pac E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 222 Summit Radio EAP TLS To use EAP TLS make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to EAP TLS e Set Encryption to WPA TKIP e Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility Figure 5 28 EAP TLS Please review Sign On vs Store
101. E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 119 Owner Access Start Settings Control Panel Owner Icon Set VX7 owner details Factory Default Settings Identification Blank Notes Blank There is no change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display Enter the information and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Owner Properties Identification Notes Network ID At Power On Name _ Display owner identification Company Address Work Home Area code Phone Figure 3 27 Owner Properties E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 120 Control Panel Options Password Access Start Settings Control Panel Password Icon Set VX7 access power up password properties Factory Default Settings Password Blank At Power On Disabled Note Once a password is assigned the Owner and Password Control Panel options require the password to be entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed If you forget the password it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit which erases all memory Enter the password then type it again to confirm it and click the OK box to save the changes The password is immediately in effect Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver
102. E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 51 Antenna Connections Note VX7 s are equipped with a radio and require an either an external or an internal antenna Some VX7 s may be equipped with a dual antenna option For these VX7 s an external antenna must be connected to each antenna connector 1 Antenna 2 Antenna Connector Figure 2 25 External Antenna Spread Spectrum RF Antenna Connector Pin VX7 s ordered with an external antenna option have either one or two antenna connectors located on top of the unit VX7 s ordered with the internal antenna option do not have an external antenna connector Figure 2 26 RF Antenna SS Connector Vehicle Remote Antenna Mount The external antenna or antennas can be remotely mounted on the vehicle Please refer to the Vehicle Remote Mount Antenna Installation Sheet for details E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 52 External Connectors Internal Antenna If the internal antenna option is ordered an antenna is mounted on the inside of the user access panel cover Figure 2 27 Internal Antenna Cables The internal antenna assembly has two antenna cables which are attached to the radio card VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Keyboards 53 The Keyboards The following keyboard options are available for the VX7 The LXE VMT keyboards are customized rugged keyboards connected to the VX7 via a watertight connector The keyboards are available in the follo
103. E computers when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail A It may be necessary to upgrade radio drivers to in order to use certain Summit Client Utility SCU features described in this chapter Please contact your LXE representative for details There are two Summit radios offered in the VX7 an 802 11g radio capable of both 802 11b and 802 11g data rates an 802 11a radio capable of 802 11a 802 11b and 802 11g data rates These radios support no encryption WEP LEAP or WPA PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC WPA LEAP EAP TLS EAP FAST and WPA PSK A When using the 802 1 1a radio the U NII 1 band is the preferred band for indoor operation For regulatory domains in which the U NII 3 band is allowed the following channels are supported 149 157 and 161 The AP must be configured accordingly VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 187 Summit Client Utility Note When making changes to profile or global parameters the VX7 should be warmbooted afterwards Access Start Programs Summit SCU or Summit Icon on Desktop or Summit Tray Icon if present or Wi Fi icon in the Windows CE Control Panel if present Summit Client Utility ke OK Eq Main Profile Status Diags Global Active Profile Default SUMMIT Status Associated DATA COMMUNICATIONS Radio Type BG Auto Profle on of
104. ECT VK SEPARATOR VK DECIMAL VK LBRACKET VK SHIFT VK DELETE VK LBUTTON VK SLASH VK DIVIDE VK LCONTROL VK SLEEP VK DOWN VK LEFT VK SNAPSHOT VK END VK LMENU VK SPACE VK EQUAL VK LSHIFT VK SUBTRACT VK EREOF VK LWIN VK TAB VK ESCAPE VK MBUTTON VK UP VK EXECUTE VK MEDIA NEXT TRACK VK VOLUME DOWN VK EXSEL VK MEDIA PLAY PAUSE VK VOLUME MUTE VK Fl VK MEDIA PREV TRACK VK VOLUME UP VK F10 VK MEDIA STOP VK ZOOM VK FII VK MENU VK F12 VK MULTIPLY VK F13 VK NEXT VK F14 VK NOCONVERT VK F15 VK NONAME VK F16 VK NUMLOCK VK F17 VK NUMPADO VK F18 VK NUMPADI VK F19 VK NUMPAD2 VK F2 VK NUMPAD3 VK F20 VK NUMPAD4 VK F21 VK NUMPADS VK F22 VK NUMPAD6 VK F23 VK NUMPAD7 VK F24 VK NUMPADS VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC ASCII Control Codes ASCII Control Codes 349 The following table lists ASCII Control codes in hexadecimal and their corresponding Control key combinations Char Hex Control Control Action Key NUL 0 Na NULL character Ctrl Shift VK CONTROL 0x11 down VK A 0x41 down SOH 1 A Start Of Heading WM_CHAR 0x1 VK_A 0x41 up VK_CONTROL 0x11 up STX 2 B Start of TeXt Ctrl b ETX 3 AC End of TeXt Ctrl c EOT 4 D End Of Transmission Ctrl d ENQ 5 AE
105. ERROR not considered an error The keyboard hook uses an embedded default if the value is not set in the registry Read registry failure app name AppName registry value does not exist or is empty This LOG ERROR constitutes a failure for switching into user mode E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 344 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Read registry failure Cmd Line AppCommandLine registry entry is missing or empty LOG_ERROR This is not considered an error since command line information is not necessary to launch and lock the application Read registry failure Internet The Internet registry entry is missing or empty This is LOG_ERROR not considered an error since the Internet value is not necessary to launch and lock the application Registering Backdoor MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both AppLock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization LOG_PROCESSING Registering Hotkey MSG The AppLock system communicates with the keyboard hook via a user defined message Both Applock exe and Kbdhook dll register the message at initialization LOG_PROCESSING Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when entering user mode is the AppName is missing This user mode entry is attempted at boot and after a hotkey switch when the administrator has closed the application being locked or ha
106. External Connectors 37 Technical Specifications Connection Cable The exact serial cable is crucial Many commercial null modem cables will not work LXE recommends the following cable Serial cable 9000A054CBL6D9D9 5 1 9 6 Pinout DB9 female DB9 female 1 7 2 3 3 2 4 6 8 5 5 6 8 4 7 1 9 no connection Figure 2 5 Pinout Serial Cable Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port the laptop connection will not work RTS CTS Handshaking and the Serial Port RTS Ready to Send CTS Clear to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready DSR Data Set Ready Remote Side The device sending data to and receiving data from the VX7 through the LXE serial cable connected to the RS 232 ports on both devices LXE Serial Cable 9000A054CBLD9D9 The VX7 serial port supports four types of handshaking via the LXE serial cable None standard Xon Xoff standard DTR DSR and a form of RTS CTS To use RTS CTS the remote side computer must clear the DTR line which sets the VX7 CTS line and allows the VX7 to send data to the remote side This allows signals and data to travel smoothly between both devices E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 38 External Connectors Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable The customer must supply their own cable The cable must be designed so that pin 7 RTS Request to Send Output and
107. Files to be loaded on the CF card are NK BIN EBOOT NBO XSCALE BIT Requirements e A screwdriver not supplied by LXE e PCMCIA to CF card adapter e LXE recommends that installation of the CF card be performed on a clean well lit surface e Loosen the captive screws securing the user access panel cover The cover is tethered to the VX7 Caution Make sure the VX7 has an uninterrupted power connection before beginning the reflash procedure Loss of power during the reflash process can result in corrupted files IMPORTANT Please contact LXE Customer Support for information on upgrading Windows CE NET to Windows CE 5 0 These instructions are only valid for upgrading to another revision of the same operating system How To Reflash using Keypress Method For information on identifying the platform version of your VX7 please see Identifying your VX7 in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout 1 Place the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card with new image files on it in the PCMCIA slot next to the radio Double click My Computer then Storage Card folder Select NK BIN EBOOT NBO XSCALE BIT Select Edit Copy Tap Back Arrow Doubleclick System folder Select Edit Paste When asked Overwrite click Yes to All When the copy process finishes remove the he PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card Select Start Run and type Coldboot por Se Oy oN oe IY Select one of the options be
108. HIFT 0x10 down VK PACKET 0xe7 down US If 2 Unit Separator WM CHAR 0x1f VK PACKET 0xe7 up VK SHIFT 0x10 up VK CONTROL 0x11 up VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC 351 Hat Encoding Hat Encoding The VX7 supports only 7 bit hat encoding which means only through underscore are supported Desired Desired Hat A A Underscore E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 352 Desired Hat VX7 Reference Guide Hat Encoding Desired E EQ VX7RG L ARC Decimal Hexadecimal Chart 353 Decimal Hexadecimal Chart Oo Be WN FF oe oa 5 c X Mm X X X X OB WN EPR O CX C Cx x a e S O 6 O Sa ono a 6c oc oO o a c c c col iX OX X X X X Xx X X X C C O Oo O x Oo O a C C S c to cx Si So a ey cc o6 x 6 ao Co c Figure D 1 Decimal Hexadecimal Chart 0 to 159 Decimal E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 354 Decimal Hexadecimal Chart 0 JM 0 FB WN FEF OO Ko Figure D 2 Decimal Hexadecimal Chart 160 to 255 Decimal VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Revision History Revision History Revision A Initial Release No Revision B August 2005 Section Chapter 1 Introduction Chapter 2
109. Heber eE Bb 160 Figure 3 50 Contouring Seto as cronreasasri reta nte Gn RERO RH RO WHAT 161 Figite4 Scanner Control Main Db oca ibi tpe Erro pas 165 Figure d 2 Scanner Control COM Port Tabs iodo 166 Pigure 4 3 Scanner Control Barcode taba ponia dani 167 Eigpure4d 4 Barcode Tab SyriboloBy Soto lacio 169 Figure 4 5 Strip Leading Trailing Controls iata ERRORES Omen dE EE 171 Figure 4 6 Barcode Data Match Listin nee voce Weare iu n 172 Figure 4 7 Add Pretix Suttix CODEEOIS ose ierit ee otiose talaga ane eee 174 Figure 4 8 Barcode Tab Ctrl Char Mapping oii c eren eti edic tic ae eL e i vendes 173 Figure 4 9 Barcode Tab Custom dar sio oru esee pir DR Eur excised HERE ERE CER te irc 177 Figured 10 AIM Costo DS aseos reia 180 Fisure 4 11 AIM Custom Setup tor 1 siint han ramen ar D Er als o ERE ets 181 Figute 4 12 Barcode Match Data for GL ss cccict asser acia 181 Higute 4 13 Enable Screen Blanking sonia Gu URS EDO 182 Biguie sa Summi Cent Dolby eese E reir ri E e ot Des ur t b alee atin 187 Hem oC U Mn Tiboo ein 189 Figure 5 3 Admi Pas Wod de 190 Figure 5 4 Select Profiles Tor Auto Probileuis oir p te d Huc we pu eset buc de PR UU 191 Eigunre 5 5 SCU Profile T boso cesa dO EPOR HEP as 192 Figure 0 6 Scala aleta REDE EP EB rH ERE d 193 Ficus SCU talus Tabs nn precii o 197 Figure 320 QU Dias Tiboo Reet eRe 198 Figure 3 9 SCUl Global Vadis css urinario mae apiteniotm tarte ERT RE 199 Figvite 5 10 Sien On Sere en i
110. ID DURS a a T POPE 86 regio lu Md M dipiagniiadas 86 Como m ii 87 Start FLP Servers Stop PIP Server ads diia 87 Command Prompt A e E EE UN PUR E 88 A RD MM D CMM MIND EUM 88 BI CUPIDE oua cu Ca A LL I MMC EE 88 Remote Desktop Connection e ecc ot tut utto nin na C Perf unen tocar inf eo eS 89 o AA a ood py cos teslis O vp viU 89 Windows Epi iii 89 E T 90 Advanced MITT 90 Control Panel ODHONS a 91 ADON O aaide anaiai ase 97 Language and POS a A A AS 93 Identifying Software Y A Loose ibi enea E M MIU RM DUM 94 Radio MAGC Address A 94 A A n T A 95 Prairie Mc inr m ERR 96 Plis oF A RE A EN 98 Bluetooth DEVICES A a a 99 Bluetooth DevioEPFODOF Hes ce oe nTa a a E E ATENE 100 SENE Beet 101 Turn Ot Bluetooth BUttOD caracas 101 DP ati 101 PAT Mec 102 basvPamue and Auto BOcoDiebk ionic sd cuir ivi cDc lacs E utl oa E da a e 103 o A H 104 Date TIME RC 104 Dolne t PC r rr 7 Meer ere tere 105 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide vi Table of Contents D rS ie E i 106 Back around A A RENE 106 Eus eie O ereere nen i ENESES EENES Y H 106 IIE 106
111. IM MES URN UM UM 65 Lco PP 65 is oo ee IA HI PPM epu PG MEM np SOM P rere 65 a e Nri e 66 c BER no e TT 66 PCMCIA NU Mc 67 Install MU DEIETE T Mr EREA 68 Install tbe Type IEREMCIA Radius iiie ntes etr Porti iaa cos 68 EE ad eu eee we eee eee dead 72 Replace 44 ai oi 72 A A M 73 Install an SD Card PP 73 A O RUD Nd UD 74 External uiv Supply ir STE 74 SPec HGA A EID UK UU LUMINE DM NUN DM UMS M a qI dE 75 Environmental Specifications MAA EAE ENEE EER ERa T3 Vehicle 12 80V DC Direct Connecti Ot illa caci 76 VXI Input Power Specilica tion sr 77 li ucc toon do MMC T A rH H M PPEPEN 78 t HOC I 78 CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 79 o 79 Windows CE Operating SSI s ieiioddkidberono pode Kdeox MP OO I UM OM RO GR 79 Wireless Network Conta ni As pri dUE 79 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents V o MT PRO OE aani 79 A A A 79 INMI OIE ina 80 SOIL aa inn 80 SOTO APPICAONS e iii 80 Opa rt idas 81 LXE RFTermn Optional adan 81 Aa 81 Wavelmk Avalanche Enabler Optional ainia 81 2 MEC PC 83 A IIT ERR Rem en te Perea ee eRe tev PRIME T DT 84 My Device Folder ai 84 Start Men ursiriikt sorum 85 D
112. Keys if you want to use Shift Ctrl or Alt key by pressing one key at a time Use StickyKeys Use ToggleKeys if you want to hear tones when pressing CapsLock NumLock and ScrollLock Use ToggleKeys Figure C 6 Accessibility Properties Keyboard If the StickyKeys option is selected the Shift Ctrl and Alt keys become sticky keys When a sticky key is pressed and released the key remains in effect to modify the next keypress If the ToggleKeys option is selected please note that Scroll Lock key does not produce a sound as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system Accessibility Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General Use Soundsentry if you want Windows to generate visual warnings when your system makes a sound Use SoundSentry Figure C 7 Accessibility Properties Sound If the SoundSentry option is selected please note that Scroll Lock does not produce a visual warning as the CapsLock and NumLock keys do This is due to a limitation in the Microsoft Windows CE operating system E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 318 Control Panel Options Administrator Control Access Start Settings Control Panel PC Connection Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated single or multi application devices In other words only the application s or feature s specified in the AppLock configurat
113. List Admin Login Reg Domain FCC Driver v2 01 22 Disable Radio SCU v2 D1 12 About SCU Figure 5 1 Summit Client Utility The Main tab provides information admin login and active profile selection Profile specific parameters are found on the Profile tab The parameters on this tab can be set to unique values for each profile This tab was labeled Config in early versions of the SCU The Status tab contains information on the current connection The Diags tab provides utilities to troubleshoot the radio Global parameters are found on the Global tab The values for these parameters apply to all profiles This tab was labeled Global Settings in early versions of the SCU Help Help is available by clicking the icon in the title bar on most SCU screens The SCU help may also be accessed by selecting Start Help and tapping the Summit Client Utility link The SCU does not have to be accessed to view the help information using this option E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 188 Summit Tray Icon Summit Radio The Summit tray icon dil provides access to the SCU and a visual indicator of radio status The Summit tray icon is displayed when The Summit radio is installed and active The Windows Zero Config utility is not active The Tray Icon setting is On Click the icon to launch the SCU Use the tray icon to view the radio status dl amp BBB B The radio is not currently associated or a
114. M port settings tab sse 166 COM Ports 124 163 332 COM l Scanner Connection Location 6 COM3 Connector Location coooocooonionncconnnonancconoss 6 Comm Ports CONDES taaan ae 34 35 COM S ite eee eee 34 36 Command Prompt ecceccesseesseeseeeeeeeeeeseeees 88 310 Component Locations esee 5 7 Computer Friendly Name eese 102 Configuration ADpLOock uei hee o Heredes 276 Ethernet oce IDIOT EIER 142 Connect ACHVES TIO noire teret b eere DRE r ERR 87 309 Connect Using ooooooococcoccooncnonconoconccnnccnnonnnonoos 121 328 Connector AW ee 47 Keyboard iii iia incide 39 USB e cos 42 onum M 34 Specifica oS seiren E as 295 Contrast Up and Down Not applicable sse 60 Control characters sss 175 Control Keys location sese 60 Control Panel options sssssss 91 313 Controller Video Specifications 295 Copyrights eiie etre 127 335 VX7 Reference Guide CPU iiec iss 1 29 Create a dialup direct or VPN connection 118 325 Ctrl Char Mapping eee 167 175 Current TIME venia eire 104 319 Custom ID paramMetetS seiersen repentina irn 177 Custom identifiers oooooooccnononononcnonononnnonononnnnccnnoss 176 Custom Identifiers esses 167 D Dita Bits rete eerte 124 163 332
115. Main Port 1 Disabled Port 2 COMI Power Port 1 while asleep Disabled Enable Internal Scanner Sound Enabled Send Key Messages WEDGE Enabled COM Ports COMI COM3 Baud Rate 9600 Parity None Stop Bits 1 Data Bits 8 Power on Pin 9 5v Enabled COM1 Disabled COM3 Barcode Enable Code ID None Symbology Settings Enable Dimmed Min to Max all AIM ID Enable Dimmed Symbol ID Enable Dimmed Custom Null Control Character Disabled Translate All Disabled Character Replacement NULI Ignore drop Custom Identifiers Name Blank ID Code Blank Notes e ActiveSync will not work over a COM port if that COM port is assigned to Port 1 or Port 2 in the Scanner applet as a scanner input For example if COMG is being used by the scanner COM3 can t be used by any other program e After scanning a Reset All or equivalent barcode for your specific external scanner the next step is to select Start Control Panel Scanner Click the OK button and close the scanner control panel This action synchronizes all scanner formats e The scanner wedge does not configure an external scanner Supported symbologies must be enabled for external scanner see the documentation provided with the external scanner Enabling or disabling a symbology in the scanner wedge only affects processing of the barcode data It does not enable or disable the external scanner s ability to scan the symbology e LXE 8300 Tethered Scanners a
116. Options Launch v Auto At Boot Retries fo Delay fro Y Auto Re launch Retries fo Delay fo Manual Allow Close Match Figure 6 5 Application Launch Options Note Launch order is determined by the Order specified in the Application tab The Order value does not have to be sequential AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications Please note that the delays specified on this panel are delays before AppLock attempts to start the specified application s The timesouts specified on the Options panel are delays after AppLock has attempted to launch the application Auto At Boot Default is Enabled Auto At Boot when enabled automatically launches subject to the specified Delay in seconds the application after the unit is rebooted If a Delay in seconds is specified AppLock waits for the specified period of time to expire before launching the application The Delay default value is 10 seconds valid values are between 0 no delay and a maximum of 999 seconds Auto At Boot Retries is the number of times the application launch will be retried if a failure occurs when the application is automatically launched at bootup Valid values are between 0 no tries and 99 tries or 1 for infinite Infinite tries ends when the application successfully launches The default is 0 retries Auto At Boot Delay timer is the time that AppLock waits prior to the initial launch
117. Options None Manual WEP Auto WEP WPA PSK WPA TKIP WPA2 PSK WPA2 AES CCKM TKIP CKIP Manual CKIP Auto Default None Note The Encryption type chosen determines if the WEP PSK Keys button is active Available entries on the pop up window vary by encryption type chosen IMPORTANT The settings for Auth Type EAP Type and Encryption depend on the security type chosen Please refer to Summit Wireless Security later in this chapter to determine the proper settings for the security type implemented on the wireless LAN VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio Status Tab 197 Summit Client Utility Figure 5 7 SCU Status Tab This screen provides information on the radio The profile being used The status of the radio card down associated authenticated etc Client information including device name IP address and MAC address Information about the Access Point AP maintaining the connection to the network including AP name IP address and MAC address Channel currently being used for wireless traffic Bit rate in Mbit Current transmit power in mW Beacon period the time between AP beacons in kilomircoseconds one kilomicrosecond 1 024 microseconds DTIM interval A multiple of the beacon period that specifies how often the beacon contains a delivery traffic indication message DTIM The DTIM tells power saving devices a packet is waiting for them For example if DTIM 3 then eve
118. Physical Specifications Km o emmawaemans me m Mase Sorge Various sizes supported Compact DENEN Flash supported via PCMCIA po Secure Digital Pt Secure Secure Digital PCMCIA CardBus Interface Two 2 PCMCIA Accepts Type I and II PCMCIA cards External Two 2 external RS 232C serial 9 pin D male Connectors ports COMI and COM3 connectors Interfaces One USB Host and one USB Client Port Via Adapter Cable One 1 Ethernet Port Porra recoge E 95dBm at 10 cm in front of unit Dimensions Length 12 2 in 30 98 cm Width 9 6 in 24 38 cm Depth 3 7 in 9 39 cm Battery for CMOS Internal lithium Battery Po External AC Adapter 120 240VAC to 12VDC Power Supply 10 64MB Flash and 64MB RAM options have been discontinued COM3 is labeled COM2 3 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 296 Environmental Specifications Environmental Specifications The VX7 will withstand the following environmental characteristics and has been tested in accordance with applicable sections of MIL STD 810E Operational to 10 000 ft 3048 meters Operating Temperature Standard version 4 F to 122 F 20 C to 50 C non condensing Extended temperature version 22 to 122 F 30 C to 50 C condensing Storage Temperature Standard version 22 F to 140 F 30 C to 60 C non condensing Extended temperature version 22 F to 140 F
119. RC Appendix A Key Maps 95 key Keypad with Pointing Device Figure A 1 95 Key VMT QWERTY Keyboard The key map table that follows lists the commands used for the VX7 Note that since the VX7 uses a Microsoft Windows CE operating system no DOS Terminal Emulation keypress sequences are provided Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies There are ten hidden keys on the 95 key keyboard Each of these hidden keys is accessed by pressing the lt Fn gt key plus another key To get this key Press These Keys and Then Insert Fn 0 on the number pad Home Fn 7 on the number pad Page Up Fn 9 on the number pad Delete Fn on the number pad End Fn 1 on the number pad Page Down Fn 3 on the number pad Up Arrow Fn 8 on the number pad Left Arrow Fn 4 on the number pad Down Arrow Fn 2 on the number pad Right Arrow Fn 6 on the number pad Note The 95 key keyboard does not have a 2 key function E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 288 60 key Standard Keypad 60 key Standard Keypad esc A onp Wy CAPS Perea ms Soyaovyory Ov Mor MO ox Bene F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 EZ F8 F9 F10 7 9 A amp ins BELE CTRL 3680668000668 i 7 PgUp gt 3068666600800 0G6G85 i Home M PgDn W END lt DELW 66680660868009600 Figure A 2 60 Key VMT QWERTY Keyboard The key map table that follows lists the commands used when running LXE s VX7 Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies When using a sequence of keys that includes the
120. RC VX7 Reference Guide 96 Control Panel Options Administrator Control Access Start Settings Control Panel PC Connection Use this option to set parameters for computers intended to be used as dedicated single or multi application devices In other words only the application s or feature s specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the user LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the device is first booted the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed After the administrator specifies an application to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the device switches to end user mode AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator To set the AppLock parameters please see Chapter 6 AppLock for details VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 97 Bluetooth Access Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth Discover and manage pairing with nearby Bluetooth devices Factory Default Settings Discovered Devices None Settings Turn Off Bluetooth Disabled Report when connection lost Enabled Report when connected Disabled Report failure to reconnect Enabled Computer is connectable Enabled Computer is discoverable Disabled Promp
121. RFTERM CAB Installed dword 0 FileCheck WINDOWS LXE RFTERM EXE Order dword 11 run the app after it has loaded and client device is ready HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist RFTERM FileName WINDOWS LXE RFTERM EXE Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 40 Delay dword 1 When you are installing your custom CAB file to the mobile device s operating sytem refer to the default image segments that are commented with RFTERM to see the expected Registry format One special key is included to force the system folders Desktop Fonts Programs etc to copy from the internal ATA card System to the Windows directory This is implemented as a persist key so the sequence of startup events can be controlled especially for AppLock The filename is a special internal trigger for the Launch utility to activate the CopyFolders function DO NOT EDIT OR ALTER THIS KEY OR IT MAY NO LONGER FUNCTION You may however change the Order or Delay values if necessary for a particular startup sequence HKEY LOCAL MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist COP YFOLDERS FileName COPY FOLDERS FileCheck Order dword 0F To have files CAB EXE REG or WAV files loaded on startup when sequence of execution is not important you can put these files in the System Startup folder on the internal ATA card This is parsed by the Launch utility and these programs are started or executed
122. Re c betula d as cM Mop oda Eo Ulud Las OM uU o du dUb dol Vds 319 CIS ENT 319 DISTA Pc sr 319 Jo n c P U H 320 o e X M Y H 321 BORN cedit MIA A Peu c Ma dia iim 321 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents xiii Po ipn TP 321 Be A T E E E I TE 321 Topot Panel A A 322 Interet OPtIONS aura 323 A a 323 NDE L PETA RRE S EA AEE EIA kei E E EETA LL AL E 324 MALE TOTE EAE EE EEPE A A EAEE AEE T 325 Network and DialipL Ane o A 325 ONIE O 326 AS TEC 327 PC COIN OU O00 os sass tag inline idazos 328 PENA At 329 PONCE ea se LE IT 330 Regional Settings os i ee RR or MM ME REED MEM EEUU ME M CUM 331 Remove iS a end 331 NO 332 A A EERS EENE RESETE 332 DIL O sli N E 333 RI T p c c E O E E A ari 333 alibratibll enea e a aa 333 o A TE AE TAE pea env A 334 Genera hecna aa a a a ori oido A A O 334 MEMO o 335 Device NaMe 5o ti rer ere roe eer a a 335 Wes TC 335 Volimea d SOMOS nda sia 336 APPENDIX D REFERENCE MATERIAL 337 O ASA ld c M b 337 i8 4 821 43 0 15 338 AppLock Registry Selling A 347 p p Ride e aEst tee G KENE EAEE 348 ASI LOBO COCOS odia ninemsn 349 cire p RR ea A 351 Decimal Hexadecimal LA cn
123. Scan to configure an LXE device 1 Start eXpress Scan on the LXE device by double clicking the eXpress Scan icon on the desktop express Scan Figure 3 52 eXpress Scan Desktop Icon 2 Enter the barcode password used when the barcode was created if any eXpress Scan passcode Enter Passcode Press Start before scanning the first barcode Figure 3 53 eXpress Scan Password Input Click Start E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 160 eXpress Scan 3 Barcode must be scanned first The scanned data is displayed in the Data text box The password if any entered above is compared to the password entered when the barcodes were created eXpress Scan Scan Barcode 1 into Data field Figure 3 54 Scan Barcode 1 4 If the passwords match the barcode data is processed and the screen is updated to reflect the number of barcodes included in the set eXpress Scan Scan next barcode into Data field Figure 3 55 Scan Remaining Barcodes The remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order After a barcode is scanned that barcode is removed from the Remaining list and placed in the Scanned list 5 If the passwords do not match an error message is displayed The current screen can be closed using the X in the upper right corner The password can be re entered and Barcode 1 scanned again 6 Once the first barcode is scanned the remaining barcodes may be scanned in any order V
124. Set Encryption to None e Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility Figure 5 13 No Security Once configured click the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio WEP To connect using WEP make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to None e Set Encryption to Manual WEP e Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility Profile Default y SBC Security EAP type Manual WEP y None y WEP herir Figure 5 14 WEP Encryption Click the WEP keys PSKs button WEP Key Entry Enter 10 or 26 Hex digits A F 0 9 OR enter 5 or 13 ASCII characters Tx Key e o123456789abcdef0 123456789 O2 o123456789 O3 O4 O Figure 5 15 WEP Keys 211 Valid keys are 10 for 40 bit encryption or 26 for 128 bit encryption hexadecimal characters Enter the key s and click OK Once configured click the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 212 Summit Radio LEAP without WPA Authentication To use LEAP without WPA make sure the following profile opt
125. Start Menu on the VX7 Start Programs Communications Connect Note Run Connect when the Get Connected wizard on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time Cable for Serial ActiveSync Connection Serial Client to PC Laptop RS 232 9 Pin to 9 Pin 9000A054CBL6D9D9 Note You must establish a partnership with a desktop computer prior to running ActiveSync on the VX7 The initial partnership must be done using direct serial USB cable connection Once the relationship is established using the serial port the ActiveSync link in the Start Menu gives a choice of connections one of which is radio Select Start Settings Programs Communication ActiveSync From the popup list choose Network and then click the Connect button E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 16 Bluetooth Bluetooth Access Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or Bluetooth icon in taskbar or Bluetooth icon on desktop Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairings oF application The VX7 default Bluetooth setting is Enabled The LXE VX7 Bluetooth module is designed to Discover and pair with nearby LXE Bluetooth devices Only LXE printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel All other Bluetooth devices are ignored Prerequisite The Bluetooth devices printers and or scanners have been setup to allow them to be Discovered and Connect
126. The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 304 Installed Software After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Following this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager 1s LXE_VXC LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Desktop 305 Desktop For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE e user s guides or the Windows on line Help application installed in the mobile device The VX7 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP At a minimum it has the following icons that can be double tapped with the stylus to access My Computer My Device Internet Explorer and the Recycle Bin
127. This VX7 keyboards illuminate the individual keys 60 Key Keyboard The keyboard is manually controlled by pressing lt 2 gt lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt when using the 60 key keyboard This key sequence immediately changes the state of the keyboard backlight as follows e Turns the backlight Off if it is currently On e Turns the backlight On if it is currently Off 95 Key Keyboard The keyboard backlight is manually controlled using the backlight key in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard Pressing the backlight key cycles the keyboard backlight through the levels of backlight intensity e Off e Maximum intensity e Medium intensity e Low intensity Network Configuration There are two networking options available for the VX7 e Wireless radios e Ethernet RJ 45 connector Wireless Radios Please refer to the appropriate section in Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for configuring the Summit Cisco or Symbol radio Ethernet Connector When the VX7 is networked using the Ethernet connector the VX7 s networking options are set via the Microsoft Windows CE Control Panel RA For more information on configuring the Microsoft Windows CE network settings please refer to the Help feature or commercially available Windows CE networking literature VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 143 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration A VX7 device man
128. UCORELOCEDCEREDCERGEBODELUCEDCERUSU Program Memory Eoo M Memory Allocated 11892KB Allocated 24152KB In Use 1280KB In Use 8020KB Figure C 23 System Memory Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there isn t enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the VX7 is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Device Name System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights These settings are used to identify your Windows CE device to other computers Please type a name without any spaces and a short description Device name vxcoo1 Device description LXE VXC Figure C 24 System Device Name The device name and description can be changed Enter the name and description using either the keypad or the Input Panel and tap OK to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Copyrights This screen is presented for information only The Copyrights information cannot be changed by the user E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 336 Control Panel Options Volume and Sounds Acce SS Start Settings Control Panel Volume amp Sounds Icon Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events Factory Default Settings Volume Events Enabled Application
129. VX7 Reference Guide IMPORTANT NOTICE Some of the features shown in this guide are obsolete This electronic guide has been made available as a courtesy to our customers Contact your LXE representative for equipment replacement and assistance Copyright April 2010 by LXE Inc All Rights Reserved E EQ VX7RG L ARC Notices Notice LXE Inc reserves the right to make improvements or changes in the products described in this manual at any time without notice While reasonable efforts have been made in the preparation of this document to assure its accuracy LXE assumes no liability resulting from any errors or omissions in this document or from the use of the information contained herein Further LXE Incorporated reserves the right to revise this publication and to make changes to it from time to time without any obligation to notify any person or organization of such revision or changes Copyright Notice This manual is copyrighted All rights are reserved This document may not in whole or in part be copied photocopied reproduced translated or reduced to any electronic medium or machine readable form without prior consent in writing from LXE Inc Copyright 2010 by LXE Inc An EMS Technologies Company 125 Technology Parkway Norcross GA 30092 U S A 770 447 4224 Trademarks LXE is a registered trademark of LXE Inc RFTerm is a registered trademark of EMS Technologies Norcross GA Microsoft Windows and t
130. Viewing Area Specifications ooooonccnnnnnconncnnnacinnos 297 Virtual Keyboard sss 107 322 VK Code L1sb uo ospite c 348 VMT keyboard esee 53 W Wattinboot ete RR eek 23 WARMBOOT EXE sessseeeereeneennens 138 WAVPLAY EXE eee 138 Wedge gite ls eerte telae ve 165 Wedge Barcode sse 163 WEP Cisco Radio 227 Summit Radio sssssssseeeee 211 Symbol RadiO ooonoonccnncniccnocnconnconccnnccnnccnnonnnonoss 253 When to use this guide sss 2 Windows Network Configuration sssssss 142 Windows CE on line Help 83 305 Windows Explorer eese 89 311 Windows version cccooocccnconnccnnonnccnnnancnnnnnanoos 126 334 Wire Color Cable WiTN8 ic nico ceteri 76 WPA Radio Driver Cisco cocooocccononcnononanccnnnnanononnnnnos 229 Supported Authentications esses 185 Cisco Radio ihe ERR Ns 229 Summit Radio esee 186 System Requirements Cisco ssessss 229 E EQ VX7RG L ARC Index 367 WPA LEAP Z Cisco Radio iii 243 Summit Radio ooooocnnncccnnnoncnononanononanaconnnass 218 220 Zero Config Utility Microsoft 232 WPA PSK Cisco Radio esse 250 Summit Radio eee 224 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 368 Index VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L
131. Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device s VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Desktop 83 Desktop For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE e user s guides or the Windows on line Help application installed in the mobile device The VX7 Desktop appearance is similar to that of a desktop PC running Windows 2000 or XP At a minimum it has the following icons that can be double tapped with the stylus to access My Computer My Device Internet Explorer and the Recycle Bin At the bottom of the screen is the Start button Clicking the Start Button causes the Start Menu to pop up It contains the standard Windows menu options Programs Favorites Documents Settings Help and Run Desktop Icon Function My Device Access files and programs Recycle Bin Storage for files that are to be deleted Internet Explorer Connect to the Internet intranet requires radio card and Internet Service Provider ISP enrollment is not available from LXE Wireless Configuration Icon Used for accessing the appropriate wireless configuration utility either the SCU Summit Client Utility or ACU Cisco Aironet Client Utility Bluetooth Discover and then pair with nearby discoverable Bluetooth devices My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications Start Access programs select from the Favorites listing docum
132. Web Search using the keywords barcode create E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Bluetooth Beep Type from Bluetooth Device Behavior Acknowledge label 1 beep Label rejected 2 beeps at low frequency Transmission error Beep will sound high low high low Link successful Beep will sound low medium high Link unsuccessful Beep will sound high low high low LED on Bluetooth Device Behavior Yellow LED blinks at 2 Hz Linking in progress Off Disconnected or unlinked Yellow LED blinks at 50 Hz Bluetooth transmission in progress Yellow LED blinks at the same rate as the paging beep 1 Hz Paging Green LED blinks once a second Disabled indication Upon startup if the scanner sounds a long tone this means the scanner has not passed its automatic Selftest and has entered isolation mode If the scanner is reset the sequence is repeated Contact LXE Support for assistance VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off 23 Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off Start Settings Control Panel MX3X VXC Options Status Popup tab When the Status popup window is displayed it is placed on top of the window in focus and hides any data beneath it It is closed by pressing the assigned Status User or Status Admin key sequence Using the KeyPad control panel Start Settings Control Panel Ke
133. Wedge Even if Send Key Messages is enabled key mode the data is still available using the scanner APIs block mode When using the scanner APIs refer to the CE API Programming Guide and the ClearBuf setting When two applications are reading the data using block mode ClearBuf must be off so that the data is not erased when read Note The user can also open the WDG device and perform standard OS read functions to retrieve the data without using the LXE APIs When Enable Internal Scanner Sound is checked it does not affect any beeps emitted by a Bluetooth or tethered scanner In some cases the scan of data by the external scanner triggers a good scan beep from the scanner and then the rejection of scanned barcode data by the processing routine causes a bad scan beep from the VX7 on the same data E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 166 Barcode Manipulation COM Port Tabs Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner COM1 or COM3 Do not connect a tethered scanner to the USB labeled ports la Scanner Control Ed OK ES Data Bits 38400 e 5 19200 O7 8 9600 O 4800 Stop Bits O 2400 O 1200 COM1 and COM3 Panel Options are Identical Figure 4 2 Scanner Control COM Port Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately The COM 1 tab contains the same parameters as the COM 3 Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to sav
134. Wireless Network Configuration for details on the SCU Access Start Settings Control Panel About Displays hardware and software details Tab Title Contents Software GUID Windows Windows CE version OAL Version Bootloader Version Compile Version FPGA Version and Language Hardware CPU Type Codec Type FPGA Version Scanner type Display Flash memory and DRAM memory Versions LXE Utilities LXE Drivers LXE Image LXE API and Internet Explorer Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address User application version information can be shown in the Version window Version window information is taken from the registry Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor see section titled VX7 Utilities LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software V LXE Version in the registry Create a new string value under this key The string name should be the Application name to appear in the Version window The data for the value should be the version number to appear in the Version window VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 315 Language and Fonts The Software tab displays any fonts built into the OS image Software Network IP GUID 8B075942 C347 EEEF 709D DSB052F6F 7
135. X7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC eXpress Scan 161 7 After the last barcode is scanned the settings are automatically applied Configuring settings Please Wait Figure 3 56 Configuring Settings 8 Once configured the device is warmbooted and the new settings are active 9 If Wavelink Avalanche is deployed and the appropriate network settings are configured the device connects to the Mobile Device Server and any software updates and additional configuration data are downloaded E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 162 eXpress Scan VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Chapter 4 Scanner Introduction Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge parameters enable or disable symbologies from being scanned scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports Barcode Processing Overview Note Steps 1 6 describe the barcode manipulation Steps 7 11 describe how the manipulated data is built Step 12 describes how the manipulated data is output The complete sequence of barcode processing is as follows 1 Scanned barcode is tested for a code ID and matching length Min Max If it matches it is processed per the rules in place for that symbology If the scan does not meet the criteria for that symbology it will be processed based on the settings for All If a code ID is not foun
136. ab Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings Control Panel menu option Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 313 Control Panel Options Access Start Settings Control Panel or My Computer Control Panel Getting Help Please click the box to get Help when changing Control Panel options Option Function About Displays hardware and software details Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard display or mouse functions Administrator AppLock configuration See Chapter 6 AppLock Control Aironet Client Utility Set the parameters for a Cisco radio See section Start Menu Program Options only present if Cisco radio software installed Bluetooth Discover and manage Bluetooth devices Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Date Time Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Display Set background graphic color scheme appearance and power scheme properties Input Panel Select the current key data input method Internet Options Set General Connection Security and Advanced options for Internet connect
137. ace Compact Flash via a PCMCIA adapter Radio Frequencies 2 4 2 4897 GHz IEEE 802 11b 802 11g DSSS OFDM 5 x 5 x GHz IEEE 802 11a DSSS OFDM 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 54 Mbps Bluetooth VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Network Device Specifications 299 PCMCIA Cisco 2 4GHz Type Il Radio Frequencies Operating Temperature PCMCIA Symbol 11Mb 2 4GHz Type Il Radio Frequencies Operating Temperature Storage Temperature E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 300 Network Device Specifications VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Appendix C VX7 CE NET Introduction There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the VX7 Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the unit The examples found in this chapter are to be used as examples only the configuration of your specific VX7 computer may vary The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the VX7 and some of its optional features Your VX7 operating system may be Windows CE NET 4 2 or Windows CE 5 0 The VX7 operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE NET or Windows CE This is the factory default value for the Desktop Display Background This chapter presents information and procedures for Windows CE NET 4 2 only Windows CE 5 0 information and procedures are contained in Chap
138. ack Space Tab BackTab Ctrl Break Pause Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Insert Delete numeric Home End Page Up Page Down Right Shift Right Alt Right Ctrl ScrollLock NumLock F1 F2 F3 Press These Keys and Then Le sm om m en Lx py px P VMT Keyboard Backlighting in Chapter 4 System Configuration management modes on the VX7 E EQ VX7RG L ARC Press lt Ctrl gt then lt 2 then F2 to produce Ctrl Break 289 Press this key F10 F3 ond Shift Alt Ctrl Esc Sp Enter Enter F1 Ins BkSp Tab Tab F2 F2 Up Arrow Down Arrow Right Arrow Left Arrow Ins BkSp DOT Left Arrow Right Arrow Up Arrow Down Arrow F7 F8 F9 F4 F10 F1 F2 F3 The Keyboard Backlight key is used in lt 2 gt lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt key sequence Refer to The Suspend Resume key has no function as Windows Power Management controls all power VX7 Reference Guide 290 Key Map 101 Key Equivalencies Press These Keys and Then 27 sun om an patos F4 pp jp F4 F5 op pj F5 F6 o pj F6 F7 op pj F7 F8 E A AAA F8 F9 o ee ee F9 F10 S AE es F10 To get this key Press this key FH px x o P F12 Ex x J FP a EEE A b Lo pp py B c pp py c d L P D e AAA E F C ee a ee E F g ER E G h py H Eo a ee es j L pp py J k pp py K L pp L m pU M n Lo P N o o pp o p pcr P a E cup Q r pss R s Lo
139. ai 266 Figure 5 102 Private Key Present i oes POETE E E 267 Figurs 6 1 Multi Application AppLock us ds o tb lose Fat etre tel sehen netted Ae wise RD EORe vns 270 Figure 6 2 smple Application AppLock ii tips 271 Figure 0 5 Swatechpad Melina 215 Ficureb A Application Panele iris a 276 Figure 6 5 Application Eaunch OptOlls notte 279 Fienre 6 6 Security Pamela 282 Ej nte 6 7 Options Panels tancia ipeo es UE ESE 283 Figure 6 8 Status Panel ioci noroeste nadas 284 Figure A 1 95Key VMT OWERTY K6yD98atd saison ae opti er t a tpa Hirn Perte ios 287 Figure A 2 00467 VMT OWERTY Keyboard npo o m dne pir cres ti n rt lio id 288 Figure A 3 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad uar per t bie a GEO T e o Ende Ee 293 Fims A TBM S250 Specillo Keypad i rei o ica 293 Ligure C 1 Pocket CMD Prompt Scorecard iaa RE ERE 310 Figure C2 Taskbar Properties ss cues ep UO Bee bte PO EORR E Rite ias 312 Figure C3 About Properties SOL Wane iced pico e PR AP ae 315 Fiore CA About Properties VEO sco ED OPERETUR ates ee are a r 316 Figure Cs About Properties Nebwotle IP erroneo noria 316 Fiente C 6 Accessibility Properties KeyDO dios ciel pe eR EHE RES 317 Figure C 7 Accessibility Properties SOU pasadas 317 Eieure C3 Date ime Properties dc rupto ves c ieri las eror He RECS E ep ER oed ibt n estote ta eta 319 EPUSC PII de 320 Figure C10 Display Properties Backlight Tab sooo gone eevee ars EHE UE OE asus emcee 321 Figure C 1 Input Panel Properties cscs dass olla e e
140. antenna and one b g antenna Connect the a antenna cable to the Main a port and connect the b g antenna cable to the Main b g port Auxiliary a Port Auxiliary Main b g Port a Port Figure 2 41 Summit 802 11 a b g Antenna Cable Connections E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 70 PCMCIA CF and SD Slots Summit CF Radio Card The Summit 802 11b g radio has two antenna ports The Summit CF radio is installed on a PCMCIA adapter Hold the radio card with the antenna ports facing down Connect the antenna cable s as follows e Summit radio with single antenna Connect antenna cable to Main port Auxiliary port is not used e Summit radio with dual antennas Connect antenna cables to both Main and Auxiliary ports Port Port Figure 2 42 Summit 802 11b g Antenna Cable Connections Cisco Radio Card Hold the radio card with the Cisco logo label facing up Connect the antenna cable s as follows e Single antenna Connect antenna cable to right port as shown below e Dual antennas Connect antenna cables to both ports el lo e e E z e E lul E fu m m 9 Eo 5 E gt y E al EH ms oe Left Port Right Port Figure 2 43 Cisco Antenna Cable Connections VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC PCMCIA CF and SD Slots 71 Symbol 11Mb Radio Card Hold the radio card with the Symbol logo label facing up Connect the antenna cable s as follows e Single antenna Co
141. application being locked does not use The hotkey sequence is intercepted by AppLock and is not passed to the application Input from the keyboard or Input Panel is accepted with the restriction that the normal key must be pressed from the keyboard when switching modes The hotkey sequence is displayed in the Hot key text box with Shift Alt and Ctrl text strings representing the shift state keys The normal keyboard key completes the hotkey sequence The hotkey must be entered via the keypad Some hotkeys cannot be entered via the Input Panel Also hotkeys entered via the SIP are not guaranteed to work properly when switching operational modes For example if the Ctrl key is pressed followed by A Ctrl A is entered in the text box If another key is pressed after a normal key press the hotkey sequence is cleared and a new hotkey sequence is started A normal key is required for the hotkey sequence and is unlike pressing the normal key during a mode switch this key can be entered from the SIP when configuring the key However when the hotkey is pressed to switch modes the normal key must be entered from the keypad it cannot be entered from the SIP VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Application Configuration 283 Password Move the cursor to the Password text box The passwords entered in the Password and Confirm Password fields must match Passwords are case sensitive When the user exits the Adm
142. application window Restart timeout This specifies the period of time in milliseconds for AppLock to wait for an application to restart If the application fails to restart automatically AppLock then proceeds according to the options selected when the application was configured on the Application and Launch panels E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 284 Status Panel View Application Configuration Use the Status panel to view the log of previous AppLock operations and to configure which messages are to be recorded during AppLock operation Status information is stored in a specific location on the storage device and in a specific logfile specified by the Administrator For this reason the administrator can configure the type of status information that is logged as well as clear the status information Administrator Control kd OK El Application Security Options Status Filename System applock Ext fl View Log Level None y Level None v Figure 6 8 Status Panel Move the cursor to the Filename text box and either type the logfile path or tap the Browse button the button The standard Windows CE Browse dialog is displayed After selecting the logfile from the Browse dialog tap OK Note If your Status Panel does not look like the figure shown above you may have the Single Application version which does not have as many options Error Error status messages are logged when an error occ
143. arching for in range Bluetooth devices the button name changes to Stop Tap the Stop button to cancel the Discover function at any time The discovered devices are listed in the Bluetooth Devices window Doubletap a Bluetooth device in the Discovered window to open the device properties menu Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the VX7 to receive scanner data Tap Pair as Printer to set up the VX7 to send data to the printer Tap Disconnect to stop pairing with the device Once disconnected tap Delete to remove the device name and data from the VX7 Bluetooth Devices list The device is deleted after the user taps OK Upon successful pairing the selected device may react to indicate a successful connection The reaction may be an audio signal from the device flashing LED on the device or a dialog box is placed on the VX7 display Whenever the VX7 is turned On all previously paired live Bluetooth devices in the vicinity are paired one at a time with the VX7 If the devices cannot connect to the VX7 before the re connect timeout time period expires default is approximately 20 seconds for each paired device there is no indication of the continuing disconnect state if Report Failure to Reconnect is disabled See Also Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled Bluetooth VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Bluetooth 19 Bluetooth Devices Assumption The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth dev
144. ata is entered at the cursor position and the data is subject to all of the barcode RS 232 input menu parameters such as truncate VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Data Entry Touchscreen Entry Right Click Note The touchscreen should be calibrated before initial use See Touchscreen Calibration in Chapter 3 System Configuration Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display Never use an actual pen pencil or sharp object to write on the touchscreen The touchscreen input performs the same function as the mouse that is used to point to and click elements on a desk top computer A stylus is used in the same manner as a mouse single tap or double tap to select menu options drag the stylus across text to select hold the stylus down to activate slider bars etcetera Right click is accomplished via a tap and hold on the touchscreen Hold the stylus as if it were a pen or pencil Touch an element on the screen with the tip of the stylus then remove the stylus from the screen The touchscreen responds to an actuation force touch of up to 4 oz of pressure The touchscreen can be used in conjunction with the keyboard and scanner and an input output device connected to one of the VX7 s serial ports e Touch the stylus to the field of the data entry form to receive the next data feed e The cursor begins to flash in the field e The unit is ready to accept data from either t
145. ate Note This section is used for Cisco radios only Summit radios do not use the Windows certificate store Instead copy the certificate to the System folder for use with a Summit radio Copy the certificate file to the VX7 Import the certificate by navigating to Start Control Panel Certificates 3 j bg Certificates Certificates Class 2 Public Primary Certification Authority Class 3 Public Primary Certification Authority Entrust net Certification Authority 2048 Entrust net Secure Server Certification Authorit Equifax Secure Certificate Authority GlobalSign Root CA Figure 5 83 Certificates Click the Import button Import Certificate or Key Figure 5 84 Import Certificate Make sure From a File is selected and click OK E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 258 Certificates Select a Certificate File ES z QJ My Documents Shortcut to Office Templates Ink Name certnew cer Type Certificates Figure 5 85 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and click OK Root Certificate Store Do you want to ADD the following certificate to the Root Store Subject doe SUPPORT LOCAL Issuer Self Issued Time Validity Thursday July 01 2004 through Tuesday July 01 2014 Serial Number 12345678 SOABCDEF 12345678 90ABCDEF Fi
146. ating with the network for this method to succeed If a Mobile Device Server is found the Enabler will automatically attempt to apply all wireless and network settings from the active profile The Enabler will also automatically download and process all available packages VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 145 Mobile Device Wireless and Network Settings Once the connection to the Mobile Device Server is established the Enabler will attempt to apply all network and wireless settings contained in the active profile The success of the application of settings is dependent upon the local configuration of control parameters for the Enabler These local parameters cannot be overridden from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console The default Enabler adapter control setting are e Manage network settings enabled e Use Avalanche network profile enabled e Manage wireless settings disabled for Windows CE Units To configure the Avalanche Enabler management of the network and wireless settings 1 Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop Select File Settings Enter the password Select the Adapters tab Choose settings for the Use Manual Settings parameter PQ A UN Choose settings for Manage Network Settings Manage Wireless Settings and Use Avalanche Network Profile 6 Click the OK button to save the changes 7 Reboot the
147. attaching a cable or device to the Keyboard Mouse connector Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 KBDAT_A Keyboard Data 2 MSDAT_A Mouse Data 3 Not Connected 4 MSCLK A Mouse Clock 5 DGND System Ground 6 Not Connected 7 KBCLK_A Keyboard Clock 8 BL ENABLE Keyboard Backlight Enable 9 KDB PWR Keyboard Power 5V Shell CGND Chassis Ground E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 40 External Connectors PS 2 Keyboard Mouse Dongle Cable The PS 2 keyboard mouse dongle cable allows a standard PS 2 keyboard and or mouse to be attached to the VX7 The PS 2 connectors on the dongle cable are labeled for keyboard and mouse O 1 D9Connector 2 PS 2 Keyboard Connector 3 PS 2 Mouse Connector Figure 2 9 VX7 PS 2 Keyboard Mouse Dongle Cable Note Power the VX7 off before attaching the cable to the Keyboard Mouse connector The VX7 must also be powered off to add or remove a PS 2 keyboard or mouse D9 Male Connector 1 5 6 9 Figure 2 10 D9 Male Connector Pinout Pin Signal Description 1 KBDAT A Keyboard Data 2 MSDAT A Mouse Data 3 Not Connected 4 MSCLK_A Mouse Clock 5 DGND System Ground 6 Not Connected 7 KBCLK_A Keyboard Clock 8 BL ENABLE Keyboard Backlight Enable 9 KB PWR Keyboard Power 5V Shell CGND Chassis Ground VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors PS 2 Keyboard Connector Pinout Pin nA Bb W N Shell PS 2 Mouse Pinout Pin nA Bb W N Shell E EQ VX7RG L ARC Signal
148. aub vetu obl de ihrer pd iuf on 123 Stylus Properties Recalibration Matti 125 Stylus Properties Recalibtatigik srera ane arre re rE arae is 125 System Genera lta benne E r EE E E EO 126 System Memory nai aiii 127 System Deyice Name a iaa 127 Volume and SOUNA eslora ova 128 Pinout Serial Cable for SyichromiZa tm sia ddr tii 135 Avalanche Enabler Opening DCi lis 146 L ARC VX7 Reference Guide xvi Table of Contents igure 3 41 Connection Options nan das aciei E dui ere tecta ia dorus ae lios 149 Figure 3 42 Execution Options Dimmed usina e nri te i diee Lee EPI euh 150 Ligue 3 43 Server Contact OpHODs aia 151 Figure 3244 Startup Sh tdowr OPUS anita ETEen ESERE AE AOE Ce Ge ad dos 152 Figure 3 45 Scam Contis OPIO estonio 133 Figure 3 46 Window Display Options sumaria rr rr nta tn e ert ys 133 Eienie 347 Application SHO GCs cp opti p es EU Sind 154 Figure 3 48 Adapter Options Network irte tici ie ai aE eT E DEAE AE REEI ENESE ERE PREIS 153 Figure 3 49 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed sese 156 Figure 3 30 Manual Settines Properties Panels cin poter e o ce HH o OU HERE ERG 157 Figure 3 31 Status DISplay ice Dane th e HE HE spi UE HO rd E ere RS 158 Figute 3 52 E Xpress Scam Desktop co ir oia 159 Figure 3 53 eXpress Scan Password Input ined sitione iie tee Lb ed d ie e bd E RR deeds 159 Hottie 3 34 Scan Barcode T odo Saepe derriere oa 160 Bigiine 3 55 Scan Bemame Barcodes cupio e peto
149. ay not be available for all VX7 s Additionally some features require a certain revision level of system software Any feature that is not identified as platform specific or requiring a certain level of system software is available to all VX7 s Hardware Platforms To determine the platform level of your VX7 please refer to the VX7 serial number decal Platform 1 VX7 VX7 s identified as Platform 1 by a P1 notation on the serial number decal and VX7 s with no platform identification on the serial number decal are referred to as Platform 1 VX7 s These VX7 s DO NOT support the features identified as Platform 2 throughout this manual Note If software revision IED or greater is installed LXE VX7 Platform 1 is displayed during boot up See Software Revisions below to determine the software revision installed on the VX7 If no software revision is displayed during bootup the VX7 is a Platform 1 type as all Platform 2 VX7 s ship with software revision IED or greater Platform 2 VX7 VX7 s identified as Platform 2 by a P2 notation on the serial number decal support all features including those noted as Platform 2 specific Note If software revision IED or greater is installed LXE VX7 Platform 2 is displayed during boot up See Software Revisions below to determine the software revision installed on the VX7 Software Revisions system software These features are available on all VX7 s if
150. ayed After selecting the application from the Browse dialog tap OK Title Default is blank Enter the Title to be associated with the application The assumption is that multiple copies of the same application may need unique titles in order to differentiate them in the application switcher panel Arguments Default is blank Enter the command line parameters for the application in the Arguments text box Order Default is 1 Enter the Order in which the application is to be loaded or presented to the end user Applications are launched in lowest to highest number order Internet Default is Disabled Enable the Internet checkbox to use the End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE When the checkbox is enabled the Internet Menu and Internet Status are available See the section titled End user Internet Explorer EUIE for more details Launch Button See following section titled Launch Button Note AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other LXE Control Panels Global Key Default is Ctrl Spc Select the Global Key key sequence the end user is to press when switching between applications The Global Key default key sequence must be defined by the AppLock Administrator The Global key is presented to the end user as the Activation key Global Delay Default is 10 seconds Enter the number of seconds that Applications mus
151. be used to configure Single Application AppLock with the following differences E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Control tab is used to specify the application to lock instead of the Application tab While the Application tab contains provisions for multiple applications the Control tab only allows the administrator to specify a single application The section on End User Switching Technique does not apply to this version Some configuration items may not be available VX7 Reference Guide 272 Setup a New Device Setup a New Device LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the device is first booted the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed After the administrator specifies the applications to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the device switches to end user mode Briefly the process to configure a new device is as follows T 2 3 4 O wc 0 p UA Connect an external power source to the device and press the Power button Adjust screen display audio volume and other parameters if desired Install accessories Tap Start Settings Control Panel Administration icon Assign applications on the Control single application or Application dual application tab screen Assign a password on the Security tab screen Select a view level on the Status tab screen if desired Ta
152. bols The Shift and lt gt keys can be used in combination for capitalized international characters Note When the virtual keyboard is displayed the physical keyboard is still active if attached Therefore it is possible to input data from both keyboards E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 64 The Keyboards Enabling the Input Panel The Input Panel is disabled by default To enable the Input Panel select Start Settings Control Panel Input Panel icon Make sure the Allow applications to change the input panel state checkbox is checked and warmboot the VX7 Input Panel Properties Figure 2 38 Input Panel Properties VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Display The Display 65 The VX7 Display is a thin film transistor display capable of supporting SVGA graphics modes Display size is 800 x 600 pixels The display covering is designed to resist stains The touchscreen allows signature capture and touch input The display supports screen blanking to eliminate driver distraction when the vehicle is in motion Please see Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable earlier in this chapter and Screen Blanking in Chapter 4 Scanner for details Cleaning the Display Keep fingers and rough or sharp objects away from the display If the glass becomes soiled or smudged clean only with a standard household cleaner such as Windex without vinegar or use Isopropyl Alcohol Do not
153. ce Guide 348 Valid VK Codes for CE Valid VK Codes for CE This is the list of codes parsed by KEYCOMP compiler Refer to Microsoft Windows documentation for further clarification of the meaning of these key codes Any VK keys not defined here are not valid for use under Windows CE VK ADD VK F3 VK NUMPAD9 VK APOSTROPHE VK F4 VK OEM CLEAR VK APPS VK F5 VK OFF VK ATTN VK F6 VK PAI VK BACK VK F7 VK PAUSE VK BACKQUOTE VK F8 VK PERIOD VK BACKSLASH VK F9 VK PLAY VK BROWSER BACK VK FINAL VK PRINT VK BROWSER FAVORITES VK HANGUL VK PRIOR VK BROWSER FORWARD VK HANJA VK RBRACKET VK BROWSER HOME VK HELP VK RBUTTON VK BROWSER REFRESH VK HOME VK RCONTROL VK BROWSER SEARCH VK HYPHEN VK RETURN VK BROWSER STOP VK INSERT VK RIGHT VK CANCEL VK JUNJA VK RMENU VK CAPITAL VK KANA VK RSHIFT VK CLEAR VK KANJI VK RWIN VK COMMA VK LAUNCH APPI VK SCROLL VK CONTROL VK LAUNCH APP2 VK SELECT VK CONVERT VK LAUNCH MAIL VK SEMICOLON VK CRSEL VK LAUNCH MEDIA SEL
154. ce the VX7 does not support power management all devices show the high power level There are no user options on this screen E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 124 Control Panel Options Regional Settings Access Start Settings Control Panel Regional Settings Set the appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and language settings No change from general desktop PC Regional Settings Properties options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Options and defaults for the regional settings depend on the fonts included in the OS image Please refer to the section on the About control panel earlier in this chapter for more details A language must be installed before it can be selected After selecting a language to use and after all changes are made tap OK to save your changes then warmboot the device Factory Default Settings Regional Settings Your Locale English United States Number 123 456 789 00 123 456 789 00 neg Currency 123 456 789 00 pos 123 456 789 00 neg Time h mm ss tt tt AM or PM Date M d yy short dddd MMMM dd yyyy long User Interface Language User Interface Language Dimmed default is Your Locale setting Input Language Input Language Dimmed default is Your Locale setting Installed Input Languages English US Tap the Customize button to set Number
155. cia 139 Appearance Scheme seen 106 321 Application Panel sessseeeeee 276 AppLock End user mode rete 273 EUIE ooo PERDRE OI RES 281 Hotkey for Administrator 273 Passwords 274 A A NT 269 E EQ VX7RG L ARC Index AppLock Registry settings esses 347 ASCII Control Codes in hex ssss 349 At Power OM ccccnnnonocnnncnnononnannnnncncnnnanananoncnnos 120 327 Audio Connector inox e epe o ess 47 Auto hide coe sce ee ere rrt erbe RA 90 312 Auto reconnect Bluetooth oooooonnoncccnonnccononos 103 B Background and Window colors 106 321 Backlight Control Keyboard 142 Backlight timers esses 106 321 Barcode Data Entty A E EE 8 Enable or Disable ees 167 Symbology Settings sss 169 Barcode data edit buttons nee rere 172 Barcode manipulation ees 164 Barcode match list ees 172 Barcode processing overview seseess 163 Barcode scanner data entry esses 8 Barcode Tab orent EH 167 Battery CMOS SpecificatiOWMS ooooonocnncnincnoccnicncnnonononos 295 Battery Auto Turn Off 106 321 Baud Rate eeina 124 163 332 Beeper Specifications 295 Bluetooth barcode reader setup ooooooccoccnoccconicononononnnnn
156. ct to non preferred networks Disabled Networks to access Only APs Only comp to comp All available Encryption WEP TKIP WEP Authentication WPA Open Shared WPA PSK WPA Ad hoc network Disabled Key provided automatically Enabled Enable 802 1X authentication Enabled EAP Type MDF Challenge PEAP TLS TLS NETWLAN1 ox x Y Add New A APOL apne Status Connected to APO1 Signal Strength Low LIP Information IPv6 Information Wireless Information Select a network and press connect or right click for more options Notify me when new wireless networks are available j Advanced View Log Figure 5 76 Symbol Wireless Information Tab Displays the logon connection data for the current network connection VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Symbol Radio 253 Add a new connection Select Add New Enter the SSID in the Network Name text box Wireless Network Properties APOL a Figure 5 77 Symbol Wireless Network Properties Disable WEP e If WEP is to be disabled tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box Select Open e Tap the down arrow in the Encryption drop down box Tap Disabled and WEP is disabled e Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab Enable WEP e Tap the down arrow in the Authentication drop down box e Tap the WEP Authentication protocol e Ifthe key is provided automatically by your network check
157. curity and Status tabs then the device has LXE Multi Application AppLock installed The Administrator can configure multiple applications to lock and the end user can swap between the applications Administrator Control Filename El Icon El Title FO Order la Arguments Internet 7 Menu Status Global Key ctrl Spa y Delay fic clear Lale APLCKPNET2BF Figure 6 1 Multi Application AppLock The configuration instructions in this chapter are designed for users of Multi Application AppLock VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Introduction 271 Single Application AppLock A mobile device running the Single Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated single application device In other words only the application or feature specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator is available to the user If your Administrator Control Panel has Control Security and Status tabs then the device has LXE s Single Application AppLock installed The Administrator can configure a single application to lock and the end user is limited to that application Administrator Control fia OK A Control Security Status Application I Internet Command Line rere Application Startup Delay fio seconds Figure 6 2 Single Application AppLock Though this chapter is designed for users of the newer Multi Application AppLock the instructions may also
158. d LXE Standard D9 ANSI PC Overlay QWERTY Keyboard LXE Standard D9 IBM 5250 Overlay QWERTY Keyboard LXE Standard D9 IBM 3270 Overlay QWERTY Keyboard Rugged PC Style w Mouse PS2 D9 Data Cables Cable Combo D15 to USB and Ethernet Adapter 1 Ft Cable Combo D15 to USB H USB C and Ethernet Adapter Cable Keyboard Mouse Dual PS2 Adapter 1 Ft Cable Printer PC D9 to D25 Cable PC D9 to D9 Power Cables Cable Input Power 12 FT VX5 VX6 VX7 Adapter Cable VX1 VX2 VX4 Power Cable to VX5 VX6 VX7 Power Supplies Power Supply External AC W US Power Cord VX5 VX6 VX7 Power Supply External AC No Power Cord VX5 VX6 VX7 UPS Battery and Cables Battery UPS Lead Acid VX5 VX6 VX7 Cable UPS Battery Remote Mount Extender 6 Ft Antenna and Antenna Mount Kits Replacement antenna 2 4GHz Remote Mount Antenna Kit 8 Ft Cable a b g Remote Mount Antenna Kit 6 Ft Cable a b g Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit 6 Ft Cable a b g Right Angle Remote Mount Antenna Kit 15 Ft Cable a b g Miscellaneous Stylus with Tethers and Sleeves 5 Pack Protective Film 12 in Display 10 Pack VX5 VX7 Voice Recognition Accessories Headset coiled adapter cable with quick disconnect connector to a 2 5 mm audio jack A headset see below is required Single Ear Headset with Noise Cancelling Microphone Tethered Scanners Scanner LS3408 Fuzzy Logic SR D9 Interface Cable 8ft Scanner LS3408 Extended Range D9 Interface Cable 8ft Imager
159. d depending upon the type of certificate you request perform other security tasks You can also use this Web site to download a certificate authority CA certificate certificate chain or certificate revocation list CRL or to view the status of a pending request For more information about Certificate Services see Certificate Services Documentation Select a task Request a certificate View the status of a pending certificate request Download a CA certificate certificate chain or CRL Figure 5 88 Certificate Services Welcome Screen E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 260 Certificates Click the Request a certificate link Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Request a Certificate Select the certificate type User Certificate Or submit an advanced certificate request Figure 5 89 Request a Certificate Screen Click on the advanced certificate request link Microsoft Certificate Services johndoe Advanced Certificate Request The policy of the CA determines the types of certificates you can request Click one of the following options to Create and submit a request to this CA Submit a certificate request by using a base 64 encoded CMC or PKCS 10 file or submit a renewal request by using a base 64 encoded PKCS 7 file Request a certificate for a smart card on behalf of another user by using the smart card certificate enrollment station Note You must have an enrollment agent certi
160. d the Owner and Password Control Panel options require the password to be entered before the Control Panel option can be accessed If you forget the password it cannot be restored without performing a cold boot on the unit which erases all memory Enter the password then type it again to confirm it and click the OK box to save the changes The password is immediately in effect Tap the Power On checkbox to set whether the user types a password at Power On Tap the Screen Saver checkbox to set whether the user types a password to clear the screensaver If there is no screensaver chosen this checkbox is ignored Note Screensaver option only works with Remote Desktop screensavers a E EQ VX7RG L ARC Password Properties Password Settings Password Password Confirm password Enable Password Protection _ At Power On _ Screen Saver Figure C 15 Password Properties VX7 Reference Guide 328 Control Panel Options PC Connection Access Start Settings Control Panel PC Connection Control the connection between the VX7 and a nearby desktop laptop computer Factory Default Settings Allow Connection Enabled Connect Using USB Client Tap the Change button to adjust the settings and click the OK button to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Unchecking the Allow connection with disables ActiveSync Change Clicking Change
161. d the barcode data will be processed based on the settings for All 2 If symbology is disabled the scan is rejected 3 Strip leading data bytes unconditionally 4 Strip trailing data bytes unconditionally 5 Parse for and strip if found Barcode Data strings 6 Replace any control characters with string as configured 7 Add prefix string to output buffer 8 If Code ID is not stripped add saved code ID from above to output buffer 9 Add processed barcode string from above to output buffer 10 Add suffix string to output buffer 11 Adda terminating NUL to the output buffer in case the data is processed as a string 12 If key output is enabled start the process to output keys If control characters are encountered e f Translate All is set key is translated to CTRL char and output e If Translate All is not set and key has a valid VK code key is output e Otherwise key is ignored not output The data is ready to be read by applications See Barcode Processing Examples at the end of the Barcode Manipulation section E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 164 Barcode Manipulation Barcode Manipulation Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner If your scanner applet has an Advanced tab instead of a Barcode tab please see section titled Advanced at the end of this chapter Factory Default Settings
162. d COM connections Any updates available will be applied to the mobile device immediately upon a successful connection Abort Stop transmission Settings The Settings option under the File menu allows the user to access the control panel to locally configure the Enabler settings The Enabler control panel is by default password protected The default password is system The password is not case sensitive Scan Config E EQ VX7RG L ARC Note LXE does not support the Scan Configuration feature on Windows CE devices The Scan Config option under the File menu allows the user to configure Enabler settings using a special barcode that can be created using the Avalanche Mobility Center Console utilities Refer to the Wavelink Avalanche Mobility Center User s Guide for details The Exit option is password protected The default password is leave The password is not case sensitive If changes were made on the Startup Shutdown tab screen then after entering the password tap OK and the following screen is displayed Avalanche Monitor E Do you want to Em e Continue monitoring Stop monitoring Change the option if desired Tap the X button to cancel Exit Tap the OK button to exit the Avalanche applet VX7 Reference Guide 148 Avalanche Update Settings Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Access Start Avalanche File Settings Use these menu options to setup the Avalanche
163. d Credentials earlier in this chapter Click the Credentials button e Noentries except the User Certificate Filename and the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network e For Stored Credentials User Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered Enter these items as directed below Credentials Figure 5 29 EAP TLS Credentials VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 223 Enter the Domain Username if the Doman is required otherwise enter the Username Leave the certificate file name entries blank for now Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab Once successfully authenticated import the user certificate into the Windows certificate store Return to the Credentials screen Use the Browse button to locate the User Cert from the certificate store Highlight the desired certificate and press the Select button The name of the certificate is displayed in the User Cert box Enter the password for the user certificate in the User Cert pwd box Please review Windows Certificates Store vs Certs Path earlier in this chapter Check the Validate server a checkbox Credentials E User user2 User Cert fusercert User Cert pwd pe CA Cert E trusted store E Validate server Use MS store Figure 5 30 EAP TLS Creden
164. d Link speed The user cannot edit this information VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 149 Connection Avalanche Update Settings Connection Server Contact Startup Shut Avalanche Server Address Check serial connection Disable ActiveSync Restrict Adapter Link Speed Min Link Speed 1000 kbs Figure 3 41 Connection Options Avalanche Server Address Enter the IP Address or host name of the Mobile Device Server assigned to the mobile device Check Serial Connection Indicates whether the Enabler should first check for serial port connection to the Mobile Device Server before checking for a wireless connection to the Mobile Device Server Disable ActiveSync Disable ActiveSync connection with the Mobile Device Server Restrict Adapter Link Speed E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 150 Execution Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Note the dimmed options on this panel This menu option is designed to manage downloaded applications for automatic execution upon startup Avalanche Update Settings OK E Execution server Contact Startun Shut_ lt gt Auto Execute selection Select Auto Execution App Delay before execution seconds P Figure 3 42 Execution Options Dimmed Auto Execute Selection An application that has been installed with the Avalanche Mobility Center C
165. d which are not necessarily the defaults This checkbox enables checked or disables unchecked the symbology field The scanner driver searches the beginning of the barcode data for the type of ID specified in the Barcode tab Enable Code ID field AIM or Symbol plus any custom identifiers When a code ID match is found as the scanner driver processes incoming barcode data if the symbology is disabled the barcode is rejected Otherwise the other settings in the dialog are applied and the barcode is processed If the symbology is disabled all other fields on this dialog are grayed When there are no customized settings and the Enable checkbox is unchecked All 1s selected and no other settings are customized a confirmation dialog is presented to the user You are about to disable all scan input Is this what you want to do Tap the Yes button or the No button Tap the X button to close the dialog without making a decision If there are customized settings uncheck the Enable checkbox for the All symbology This results in disabling all symbologies except the customized ones This field specifies the minimum length that the barcode data not including Code ID must meet to be processed Any barcode scanned that is less than the number of characters specified in the Min field is rejected The default for this field is 1 This field specifies the maximum length that the barcode data not including Code ID can
166. dapter is selected for Current Adapter e To disable the internal network adapter create a file in the system directory named NoEther tag The contents of the file are unimportant but the file must be named NoEhter tag and it must be in the system directory If the system directory contains a file named Ether tag you can rename this file to NoEther tag instead of creating a new file After creating the file coldboot the VX7 After the VX7 finishes booting the internal Ethernet adapter is disabled The restore the adapter delete the NoEther tag file and coldboot and the VX7 Enabler Uninstall Process To remove the LXE Avalanche Enabler from a Windows CE mobile device e Delete the Avalanche folder located in the System folder e Warm boot the mobile device The Avalanche folder cannot be deleted while the Enabler is running See Stop the Enabler Service If sharing errors occur while attempting to delete the Avalanche folder warm boot the mobile device immediately delete the Avalanche folder and then perform another warm boot E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 144 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Stop the Enabler Service To stop the Enabler from monitoring for updates from the Avalanche MC Console 1 Open the Enabler Settings Panels by tapping the Avalanche icon on the desktop Select File Settings Enter the password Select the Startup Shutdown tab ee do Select the Do not monitor or launch Enabler para
167. de E EQ VX7RG L ARC Screen Blanking 183 Operation To prevent a general user from disabling the screen blanking feature at least one of the two following actions must be taken e Password protection can be set via the Password icon in the Windows Control Panel Without this password general users are unable to access the Control Panel to disable the screen blanking feature For more information on the Password feature please refer Password earlier in this chapter e AppLock can be used to restrict the general user s access to only a certain program Since the user under AppLock cannot access the Control Panel the user cannot disable the screen blanking feature For more information on AppLock please refer to Chapter 6 AppLock Operation of the VX7 is unchanged except for the blank display The keypad and touchscreen are still enabled however any input from they keypad touchscreen or other device DOES NOT wake up the display E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 184 Screen Blanking VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Introduction The VX7 computer may have a Summit Cisco or Symbol radio The Summit radio is either an 802 11b g radio or an 802 1 1a b g radio The Cisco and Symbol radios are 802 11b radios The radio can be configured for no encryption WEP encryption or WPA security N A with Symbol radio Certificates are necessary for many of the WPA authenticatio
168. ded with any configured Custom Code IDs Notes VX7 Reference Guide When Strip Code ID see Symbology panel is not enabled the code ID is sent as part of the barcode data to an application When Strip Code ID see Symbology panel is enabled the entire custom code ID string is stripped 1 e treated as a Code ID UPC EAN Codes only The code id for supplemental barcodes is not stripped When Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol Custom Code IDs appear at the end of the list of standard Code IDs When Enable Code ID is set to Custom Custom Code IDs replace the list of standard Code IDs When Enable Code ID is set to Custom AIM or Symbol Code IDs must be added to the end of the Custom Code ID For example if a Custom Code ID AAA is created to be read in combination with an AIM ID for Code 39 A1 the Custom Code ID must be entered with the AIM ID code first then the Custom Code ID JA1AAA When Enable Code ID is set to None Custom Code IDs are ignored Custom symbologies appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog They are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the Code ID The tethered scanner operation cannot be controlled by the VX7 scanner application therefore a good beep may be sounded from the tethered scanner even if a barcode from a tethered scanner is rejected because of the configuration specified
169. deo SUOSYS O NN 29 Power SUPP siii iii 30 Uninterruptible Power Suppl orinal ni pts 30 Backup id dida 30 POMCIA elis ARCH PPM HER 30 E A TH PET TE 30 xpo e pL 30 Bluetooth LXEZ oir is 31 Power o 32 Physical COTOS E 33 OMOR SW UU pop EDU 33 Fa cq imei ecl Pe nrin a nnna n nE E E 34 Scanner Serial Connector CON aiii 35 lan s orisni ne R 35 Printer PC Serial Connector AA A 36 A n M e 36 Technical Specifications Connection Cable unnssssi its 37 RTS CTS Handshaking and the Serial Polka ias 3j VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents 111 Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable sisi ninio 38 Keyboard Mo s Connector As 39 uir ri dt 39 P352 Keyboard Mouse Dongle Cable nai ii 40 DI Male Connector srne n a ee ae 40 A S 40 PS2 A TE 41 O 41 PS2 MOIS Pe TCR 41 lg 41 Ethernet USB Concluida 42 A soena a T 42 Ethernet USB Done tables ira 43 A A TPP d gni mem 44 USB Host OCC PR 45 Unni A RE 45 USB Client nuo ANNE 45 PU E 45 A T m 46 luni 46 Audio CAMEO YER sa 47 y rl 47 Power Supply Connector A 48
170. device in the list to open the device properties menu The targeted device does not need to be active E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 100 Control Panel Options LXEZ Pairing Bluetooth Devices Settings Name Last 4 Bluetooth Address LXEZ Pairing Bluetooth Devices settings Name Last 4 Bluetooth Address PrinterO1 12 34 00 20 E0 00 12 34 PrinterQ2 Bu ditti Hs ScannerO1 Pair as Scanner 76 00 AB CD Scanner 2 S TE7A 00 1A 2B PrinterO1 12 34 00 20 E0 00 12 34 ge Printer 2 LI Scanner01 Pair as Scanner 76 00 AB CD ScannerD2 UU 74 00 1A 2B Pair as Printer 5 b Disconnect Properties Pair as Printer Delete D Properties Figure 3 11 Bluetooth Device Disconnect Delete Tap Pair as Scanner to set up the VX7 to receive data from the scanner Tap Pair as Printer to set up the VX7 to send data to the printer Tap Disconnect to stop the connection between the VX7 and a paired Bluetooth device Tap Delete to remove an unpaired device from the Bluetooth device list The device name and identifier is removed from the VX7 Bluetooth Devices panel after the user taps OK Bluetooth Device Properties Bluetooth Properties E Name ET Bluetooth Address 00 20 E0 00 12 34 COD 0x8B00614 Subclass COM port Status not paired Figure 3 12 Bluetooth Device Properties Menu Data on the Bluetooth Properties panel cannot be changed by
171. e 5235 Cisco Profile WEP Keys usaras 227 Eieineo 96 TNO A db 230 Figure 5 3 USO e 230 Figure 5 38 Cisco ACU Profile Selec naar lor adas 232 E19nre 5 39 Cisco ACU Reboot MeSS8B8 iie P EO ER MERO ia 232 Figure 5 40 Figure 5 41 Figure 5 42 Figure 5 43 Figure 5 44 Figure 5 45 Figure 5 46 Figure 5 47 Figure 5 48 Figure 5 49 Figure 5 50 Figure 5 51 Microsoft Wireless Connection COE nicas 232 Wireless Intormatiol SCEOC ae c uc ie ute i rtu aeiae e i 233 Advanced Wireless SEMI aaron aan LH OD TRUCO Hr prets 233 Wireless Network Propertie eT P H A 234 PEAP MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties 5 2 iet retenti rre reed 233 Authentication Settings usina RETIRER ARE VENERE ttt PROFITE ERA IET ERE canes 233 Wireless Network LO Maese 236 O O e ad 236 Authentication Settings Validate Server cp ad iros 237 Advanced Wireless Settings Authenticated SSID eese 237 PEAP GTC Wireless Network Properties sica caida 238 PEAP Prop o eii 238 Eienre 5 52 LOSIN SOEC otoan ae ear aa a a rea HEURE s 239 Figure 5233 IP Information Tintes 239 Figure 5 54 PEAP Properties Validate Server Certificate ec alt erario leave ibi 240 HFigute S 9 Server Connection Wallace cas 240 His re 5 56 PEAP Properties Trusted Root Cert iG ave ein 241 Figure S 57 Accept Server Connecti m Wa oi i 241 Figure 5 58 PEAP Properties Connect Only If Server Name Ends In iine eet 242 Figure 5 59 Wireless Information
172. e Options Auto Rate negotiated automatically with the AP 1 2 5 5 6 9 11 12 18 24 36 48 or 54 Mbit Default Auto VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 195 Radio Mode Specify 802 11a 802 11b and or 802 11g rates when communicating with AP The options displayed for this parameter depend on the type of radio 802 1 1b g or 802 1 1a b g installed in the mobile device Options B rates only 1 2 5 5 and 11 Mbps BG Rates Full All B and G rates G rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps BG optimized or BG subset 1 2 5 5 6 11 24 36 and 54 Mbps A rates only 6 9 12 18 24 36 48 and 54 Mbps ABG Rates Full All A rates and all B and G rates with A rates preferred BGA Rates Full All B and G rates and all A rates with B and G rates preferred Ad Hoc Default BG Rates Full for 802 11b g radio BGA Rates Full for 802 1 1a b g radio Note For the802 11 b g radio some SCU versions may have the default set as BG Optimized rather than BG Rates Full It is important this parameter correspond to the AP to which the device is to connect For example if this parameter is set to G rates only the LXE device may only connect to APs set for G rates and not those set for B and G rates The options for this parameter should be set as follows Antenna Configuration Radio Mode A Main and BG Main ABG Rates Full BGA Rates Full A Main and A Aux A Rates Only BG Main and BG Aux B Rate
173. e ATA card The SD slot accepts an SD memory card These cards are hot swappable VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Hardware Configuration 31 Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing The VX7 contains Bluetooth version 2 0 with Enhanced Data Rate EDR up to 3 0 Mbit s over the air Bluetooth device connection or pairing can occur at distances up to 32 8 ft 10 meters Line of Sight The wireless client retains wireless connectivity while Bluetooth is active The user will not be able to select PIN authentication or encryption on connections from the HX3 However the HX3 supports authentication requests from pairing devices If a pairing device requests authentication or encryption the HX3 displays a prompt for the PIN or passcode Maximum encryption is 128 bit Encryption is based on the length of the user s passcode Bluetooth will simultaneously support one printer as a slave Bluetooth device and one scanner either as a slave or as a master Bluetooth device See Chapter 3 System Configuration control panel section titled Bluetooth Notes e The VX7 does not have a Bluetooth managed LED e The LED on the Bluetooth scanner illuminates during a scanning operation e Barcode data captured by the Bluetooth scanner is manipulated by the settings in the VX7 Scanner Properties control panel applet e Multiple beeps may be heard during a barcode scan using the Bluetooth scanner beeps from the Bluetooth scanner as the barcode data is accepted rejected
174. e Disable Appearance Scheme Windows Standard Backlight Battery Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Time 30 seconds External Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Time 2 minutes Background There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties Background options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Appearance No change from general desktop PC Display Properties Appearance options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately The default is Windows Standard Backlight Display Properties Ed OK x1 Background Appearance Backlight To save battery life you can adjust when the backlight automatically shuts off Automatically turn off backlight while on battery power Turn aff after fac seconds gt of continuous idle time Automatically turn off backlight while on external power Turn off 2 minutes gt of continuous idle time Figure 3 17 Display Properties Backlight Tab Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately When the backlight timer expires the display and display backlight Note The display can also be configured to turn off when the vehicle to which the VX7 is mounted is in motion This feature required a serial cable connection and is enabled using the Scanner control panel Please see Screen Blanking later in this chapter fo
175. e EUIE menu which contains navigation functions like Back Forward Home Refresh etc functions that are familiar to most Internet Explorer users When the Menu checkbox is blank the EUIE menu is not displayed and Navigation functions are unavailable When the Status checkbox is enabled the status bar displayed by EUIE gives feedback to the end user when they are navigating the Internet If the standard Internet Explorer that is shipped with the mobile device is desired it should be treated like any other application This means that IEXPLORER EXE should be specified in the Application text box and the internet application should be entered in the command line In this case do not check the Internet checkbox E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 282 Application Configuration Security Panel Administrator Control m OK A Application Security Options Status JE Hot Key mmo Password t o Confirm Password er o ooo Figure 6 6 Security Panel Hotkey Specify the hotkey sequence that triggers AppLock to switch between administrator and user modes and the password required to enter Administrator mode The default hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A A 2 key keypress is an invalid keypress for a hotkey sequence Move the cursor to the Hot Key text box Enter the new hot key sequence by first pressing the Shift state key followed by a normal key The hotkey selected must be a key sequence that the
176. e directory 12 LXEConnect is now installed and ready to use E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 14 Configuring the VX7 with LXEConnect Using LXEConnect 1 Ifan ActiveSync connection is has not been established connect the VX7 to the PC Details on ActiveSync are included in the following section 2 Double click the LXEConnect icon that was created on the desktop 3 LXEConnect launches Yx3x001 Elle zoom Tools Help RFTERM u A ar El My Device My b About CERDisp Docurnents Recycle Bin Remote Desktop ger gt LL tl Internet Summit Explorer Client Utility amp Sa 8 59 Pm Figure 1 10 LXEConnect Notice 4 Click the OK button to dismiss the About CERDisp dialog box The dialog box automatically times out and disappears after approximately 30 seconds Yx3x001 File Zoom Tools Help RETERM r nar LU gt 2 EJ My Device My LXE RFTerm Docurnents Microsoft Recycle Bin E Windows CE Internet Summit Microsoft t Windows CE v5 00 MX3XPESO01Bb Explorer Client Utility amp Sal 9 01 PM Figure 1 11 LXEConnect Desktop 5 The VX7 can now be configured from the LXEConnect window Input from the PC s mouse and keyboard are recognized as if they were attached to the VX7 6 When the remote session is completed terminate the LXEConnect program by selecting File Exit or clicking on the X in the upper right hand corner to close the application then disconnect the Ac
177. e neta te ee A 15 j 16 1p PTT cU EE 16 Settings Tab Bluetooth O DOR na 17 Report when connection lost una ali ewer 17 Report when CO ta hts me toad 17 Report failure to TECOS td 17 Computers Conpnectable iie e a ESFHARBNEURT NIAE MESSA MERE SUMA 17 Computer iy discoverables eda nito na 17 Prompt if devices re guest to PLA 17 Continuous searches 18 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide ii Table of Contents vlc Hr cm Hs 18 Bluetooth bonor eR 19 Bluetooth Barcode Reader SSP sensu sape du RN Fed n n don Ma IM NNUS 20 TGCFOR UC CIOTI A OP udis 20 VA T with Label uns atacarlo 20 VAT dal abdiatasst eeagsessubadaga lace dautenlenss waagonnunhansesstledsimsbetanieaanedunsandgaans 21 Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications sia ta 22 Toggle the Status Popup Window On or Off eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 23 Saving Changes to th Negielry siii and 23 AAA AA 24 Manuals and AA ee 24 Mantal NENNEN a retry Peu terres 24 A A 24 CHAPTER 2 PHYSICAL DESCRIPTION AND LAYOUT 27 RU AA e OS O un 27 Hardware PIS ies 27 Software Revisions ias 27 Hardware ConfigurahiOM me 28 A E t RU TTE MES RE 28 Central Processie A tI ies mU Ue 29 VO COMPONEN Tr A 29 System Memory A 29 Vi
178. e the changes The changes take effect immediately VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation 167 Barcode Tab Buttons Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner Barcode Note The Barcode tab replaces the Advanced tab used in previous software revisions and adds several new features Please contact your LXE support representative for details The Scanner application Wedge can only enable or disable the processing of a barcode inside the Wedge software The Scanner application enables or disables the Code ID that may be scanned Enabling or disabling a specific barcode symbology is done manually using the configuration barcode in the Integrated Scanner Programming Guide available on the LXE Manuals CD and the LXE ServicePass website Choose an option in the Enable Code ID drop down box None AIM ID Symbol ID or Custom ID Scanner Control mi OK E Man comi coma Barcode fo Enable Code ID Symbology Settings None y Ctrl Char Mapping Custom Identifiers Figure 4 3 Scanner Control Barcode tab Symbology Individually enable or disable a barcode from being scanned set the minimum Settings and maximum size barcode to accept strip Code ID strip data from the beginning or end of a barcode or based on configurable Barcode Data add a prefix or suffix to a barcode before transmission Ctrl Char Define the operations the LXE Wedge performs on control characters values
179. e time interval for periodic contact with the Mobile Device Server occurs a mobile device that is in Suspend Mode can wakeup and process updates Reboot before attempt Reboot mobile device before attempting to contact Mobile Device Server Require external power Only connect when the device has external power Use relative offset E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 152 Startup Shutdown Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration LXE recommends using LXE AppLock to manage the taskbar AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS AppLock configuration instructions are located in Chapter 6 Avalanche Update Settings Execution Server Contact Startup Shutdown Scan gt Program Startup Do not monitor or launch Enabler 8 Monitor For updates Monitor and launch Enabler Manage Taskbar Lan Lock Hide a Program Shutdown Stop monitoring e Continue monitoring Figure 3 44 Startup Shutdown Options Do not monitor or launch Enabler When the device boots do not launch the Enabler application and do not attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server Monitor for updates Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are available Do not launch the Enabler application Monitor and launch Enabler Attempt to connect to the Mobile Device Server and process any updates that are ava
180. eck this checkbox to enable IPv6 Allow Remote Desktop Autologon By default Remote Desktop Autologon is disabled Check this checkbox to enable Remote Desktop Autologon Note The RDP file must be saved in the NSystem folder When prompted use the Save As button to save the RDP file is the NSystem directory If the RDP file is saved in the default root folder location the RDP file will not persist across a warmboot E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 116 Control Panel Options Autolaunch TimeSync Misc CapsLock NumLock By default TimeSync does not automatically run on the VX7 To enable TimeSync to run automatically on the VX7 check this checkbox Synchronize with a Local Time Server By default GrabTime synchronizes via an Internet connection To synchronize with a local time server 1 Use ActiveSync to copy GrabTime ini from the My Device Windows folder on the mobile device to the host PC 2 Edit the copy of GrabTime ini on the host PC Add the local time server s domain name to the beginning of the list of servers You can optionally delete the remainder of the list 3 Copy the modified GrabTime ini file to the My Device System folder on the mobile device The System GrabTime ini file takes precedence over the Windows GrabTime ini file System Grabtime ini also persists after a coldboot Windows Grabtime ini does not persist Options on this tab configure device specific options MX3X VXC Optio
181. ect Profile Use the drop down box to choose the profile just configured Click OK VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 245 The VX7 associates and displays the sign on screen LEAP EAP FAST Login Figure 5 64 Login Screen Click the Status tab to display status ACU Figure 5 65 ACU Status Tab E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 246 Cisco Radio EAP TLS Authentication Configuration To authenticate using the EAP TLS protocol you need a user certificate file and a private key file Once you have the user certificate files run the certificate installer from the Microsoft control panel For EAP TLS it does not matter which Cisco cab file is installed Note It is important that the date is correct on the device when using any type of certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication will fail User Certificate To check if a user certificate is installed navigate to Start Control Panel Certificates a 2 es Certificates Set the drop down box to My Certificates as shown below The correct user certificate should be shown in the right pane Certificates wv Certificates Lists your personal digital certificates Figure 5 66 Certificate Stores Click the View button Certificate Details Friendly Name Field Private Key y Present Figure 5 67 View Certificate Details Set the Field to Private Key
182. ectory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Converted Pwd Converted password from wide to mbs LOG_EX Could not create event The keyboard filter uses this event at the Administrator LOG ERROR EVT_HOTKEYCHG Control panel The event could not be created Could not hook keyboard If the keyboard cannot be controlled AppLock cannot LOG_ERROR process the hotkey This failure prevents a mode switch into user mode Could not start thread HotKeyMon The keyboard filter must watch for hot key changes LOG_ ERROR The watch process could not be initiated Ctrl after L or X Processing the backdoor entry LOG_EX Ctrl pressed The Ctrl key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG_EX HotKey processing Ctrl Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Decrypt acquire context failure Unable to decrypt password LOG_ERROR Decrypt acquired context OK Decryption process ok LOG_EX Decrypt create hash failure Unable to decrypt password LOG_ERROR Decrypt created hash OK Decryption process ok LOG_EX Decrypt failure Unable to decrypt password LOG_ERROR E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 340 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Decrypt import key failure Unable to decrypt password LOG_ERROR Decrypt imported key OK Decryption pr
183. ed Paired The SysAdmin is familiar with the pairing function of the Bluetooth devices LXEZ Pairing Bluetooth Devices Settings About Last 4 Bluetooth Address Figure 1 12 Bluetooth Devices Display Before Discovering Devices Initial Use 1 Select Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop 2 Tap the Settings Tab 3 Change the Computer Friendly Name at the bottom of the Settings display The Bluetooth VX7 default name is determined by the LXE factory installed software version LXE strongly urges assigning every VX7 a unique name up to 32 characters before Bluetooth Discovery is initiated 4 Check or uncheck the VX7 Bluetooth options on the Settings tab 5 Tap the OK button to save your changes or the X button to discard any changes See Also Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled Bluetooth VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Bluetooth 17 Settings Tab Bluetooth Options Note These options can still be checked or unchecked whether Bluetooth connection is enabled or disabled As Bluetooth devices pair with the VX7 the name of the device and an icon representing the type of device is displayed in the Devices window The icon state changes as the paired Bluetooth devices connect and disconnect from the VX7 When the Bluetooth devices are disconnected the device icon has a red background Report when connection lost A dialog box ap
184. eeeeeeeeeeeeeees 163 Barcode Mampukah peeccc 164 Mait rp ene a a E ue A a UM eee 165 COM Pori Tab A 166 Barcode as n is 167 BURNS usina 167 Enable Code TO MC 168 Barcode symbolog v SEUA is A Ion SR MEM ES o ee 169 Sp Leading Maline C Ont olo secos vn ies 171 Barcode Data Match List esce terte ie a es Em EH Se osi ta e asi ERE EUER ERREUR E QR boris 172 Barcode Data Edit Buttons ids on i D ete ore e e i rite bud debeo epi RP 172 Match List Rule aoi EISE a credet cete ie eto 173 Add Preta Sut Conta 174 Barcode Ctrl Char Mapping scissacscesnccsrdsianacartseacactiaedebeshinacotawaesaaes Gaeaweaiincsatossaeaiuessocdigs waoceiannaees 175 A HEP EAM EP URN 178 Barcode Custom IdentifictS in xaxaiececaeasneesaseackateasneceangidadecaneid ncaanseeuangadedadaannesnassaacdeatednes 176 Control Code Replacement Hamm les taaan 178 Barcode Processing Example diia peti ced 179 Length Based Barcode Stripping sip 180 Sereen Blanking P o ia 182 DS scrie O er ars perry 183 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents 1X CHAPTER 5 WIRELESS NETWORK CONFIGURATION 185 o AA 185 E PATRE d MAA 186 A UP HH REPE mU UN 187 BUB Loca EMI LEE EI MEE EM LEE E 187 Summit Te RR S 188 Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio uec rada licita 188 Mam E o RR rmm 189 A odiada 190 AUO PG Fie T 191 Prole Dann en ace enna 192 Usine DE Sea
185. eled PCMCIA B Slot 1 is the upper slot labeled PCMCIA A PCMCIA Control sito soti se Card Cisco Systems 350 Series Wireless LAM Adapter 512A Disable slot now E Write protect slot Power slot during sleep 3 3 Figure C 17 PCMCIA Control Tab Slot 0 and Slot 1 The Slot 2 Tab provides information on the internal Compact Flash ATA drive There are no user configurable options PCMCIA Control seo se soez Card Internal ATA 61 MB Figure C 18 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab Slot 2 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 330 Power Control Panel Options Depending on the Software Revision some devices may have a Schemes tab Factory Default Settings Switch state to User Idle Never Switch state to System Idle Never Switch state to Suspen Never The Schemes tab can be used to control the display and shut the VX7 Off The mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired For example if the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes For a VX7 the User Idle state turns off the display and display backlight There is no System Idle mode so the VX7 remains in User Idle mode until the Suspend timer expires or a primary even
186. elete This button is grayed unless an entry in the list box is highlighted When an entry or entries is highlighted and Delete is selected the highlighted material is deleted from the list box Barcode Custom Identifiers Code IDs can be defined by the user This allows processing parameters to be configured for barcodes that do not use the standard AIM or Symbol IDs or for barcodes that have data embedded at the beginning of the data that acts like a Code ID These are called custom Code IDs and are included in the Symbology drop down box in the Symbology dialog unless Enable Code ID is set to None When the custom Code ID is found in a barcode the configuration specified for the custom Code ID is applied to the barcode data The dialog below allows the custom Code IDs to be configured It is intended that custom code IDs are used to supplement the list of standard code IDs if Enable Code ID is set to AIM or Symbol or to replace the list of standard code IDs if Enable Code ID is set to Custom When Enable Code ID is set to None custom code IDs are ignored Note Custom symbologies will appear at the end of the list in the Symbology dialog and are processed at the beginning of the list in the scanner driver itself This allows custom IDs based on actual code IDs to be processed before the code ID itself Note When Strip Code ID is enabled the entire custom Code ID string is stripped i e treated as a
187. emote Desktop Connection as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Remote Desktop Connection options Select a computer from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button Tap the Options gt gt button to access the General Display Local Resources Programs and Experience tabs Click the button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help Access Start Programs Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start Programs menu To make changes to the Transcriber application enable or disable the current Transcriber session etc click the hand with a pen icon in the toolbar Click the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Windows Explorer Access Start Programs Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options Click the button to access Windows Explorer Help E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 90 Taskbar Start Menu Program Options Access Start Settings Taskbar and Start Menu Factory Default Settings Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options When the taskbar is auto hidden press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear Taskbar and Sta
188. ents last worked on change view settings for the control panel or taskbar on line help or run programs E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 84 Desktop Folders Copies at Startup The following folders are copied on startup System Desktop gt Windows Desktop System Favorites gt Windows Favorites System Fonts gt Windows Fonts System Help gt Windows Help System Programs gt Windows Programs This function copies only the directory contents no sub folders The following folders are NOT copied on startup Windows AppMer Windows Recent Windows Startup Because copying these has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from System Startup Windows Startup is parsed too early in the boot process so it has no effect Executables in System Startup must be the actual executable not a shortcut because shortcuts are not parsed by launch My Device Folders Folder Description Preserved upon Reboot Application Data Data saved by running applications No My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications No Network Mounted network drive No Program Files Applications No System Internal SD Flash Card CAB file storage Yes Temp Location for temporary files No Windows Operating System in Secure Storage No VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Start Menu Program Options 85 Start Menu Program Options T
189. er cable If this occurs a new power cable is required Caution Do not use this adapter with AC power supplies originally designed for the 1380 1390 VX1 VX2 or VX4 These power supplies do not have sufficient power for the VX7 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 78 Power Supply CMOS Battery The LXE VX7 has a permanent 190 mAh Lithium battery installed to maintain time date and CMOS setup information The lithium battery is not user serviceable and should last five years with normal use before it requires replacement Note This battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel Fuse The VX7 uses a 100V 10A time delay slow blow high current interrupting rating fuse that is externally accessible and user replaceable Should it need replacement replace with same size rating and type of fuse Littlefuse 0234010 or Optifuse MSC 10A 5x20mm 1 Fuse 2 Twist in this direction to remove 3 Twist in this direction to insert Figure 2 52 Fuse Replacement Caution Fuse has voltage on it even when power is off Always disconnect input power i before changing fuse VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Introduction Chapter 3 System Configuration There are several different aspects to the setup and configuration of the VX7 Many of the setup and configuration settings are dependent upon the optional features such as hardware and software installed on the unit The example
190. er for the VX7 to operate CF Card Figure 2 45 Inserting the CF ATA Card Note The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above Note When this process is complete reattach the access cover screws using a torque wrench capable of measuring to 91 inch pounds 1 016411 N m The screws must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each The screws require a Phillips size 1 driver head 4 Re connect the power cord cable and turn the VX7 on VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC PCMCIA CF and SD Slots 73 SD Card Slot The slot accepts a Secure Digital SD memory card The card in this slot can be hot swapped Note Although cards in the SD slot may be hot swapped the VX7 is not environmentally sealed while the access panel cover is removed to hot swap cards Install an SD Card 1 Turn the VX7 off and detach the power cable 2 Loosen the three 3 Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can be removed The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed 3 Insert the card into the ATA SD This slot accepts an SD memory card only SD Card Figure 2 46 Inserting the ATA Card Note The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above Note When this process is complete reattach the access cover screws using a torque wrench capable of measuring to 91 inch pounds 1 016411 N m The screws must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each The screws require a Ph
191. es button Check the Validate server Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes Advanced Wireless Settings Use Windows to configure my wireless settings Preferred Networks Y Add New peapTest preferred Automatically connect to Networks to only access points y non preferred networks access Figure 5 49 Advanced Wireless Settings Authenticated SSID Once the authentication completes the status changes to show the VX7 has authenticated to the lt SSID gt as shown in the figure above Click on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown in the figure labeled IP Information Tab earlier in this chapter E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 238 Cisco Radio PEAP GTC Authentication Configuration The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP GTC protocol Configuring the PEAP GTC Supplicant With the radio parameters configured set the EAP type to Cisco PEAP as shown below Wireless Network Properties Network name SSID lpeapTest This is a computer to computer ad hoc Wireless network key WEP This network requires a key for Encryption TKIP y Authentication we A y network wireless access points are not used Network key Key index fr Key provided automatically IEEE 802 1X Authentication Enable 802 1X authentication on this network EAP type Cisco PEAP y Figure 5 50 PEAP GTC Wireless Network Properties If
192. es scan A RR 138 P ELE HR E IRI NOTITIAE TNR E E E ETE 139 pil en AAA A 140 How To Reflash using Keypress Melodia 140 How To Reflash using TAG file Method pr 141 Clearing Persistent Storage Mew U 142 A A EA 142 Network o A aaa A AE MG RE 142 Wireless Radios icccccssccccccasscsocetsccseucsssdsonsesccscecaesdsouevsceseueedsdsosesssdsosssecenesevecesesedecesenesenesensvenes 142 Ethernet Come rin Tecta bichos iaa aod dae 142 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration eeeeeeeeseeses 143 O A A a 143 Enabler Install PROCESS tactica ie ld ia dias det e avus Dun 143 Enabler Uninstall Proceso 143 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide viii Table of Contents Stop he Enabler SEVICE ninien niian a EEEE E ad 144 Update Monitoring DS did 144 Mobile Device Wireless and Network SetidES escorias ribera 145 Enabler Conf UE FO susi iii 146 Pl ER a n G 147 Avalanche Update A A 148 Men Options ninesi ts 148 RO 149 IES GUUVON alma e Read db E redierit v Fl nda 150 SEN CONTIG D 151 Startup SHU OW ies sessccshiscacacaiiseasaacsscaarebssneatoassoeaddedjonabecsbanassbivnateedveawaaseteenate iio 152 DCAD OAM ii iia 153 Display acatar I 153 soci rM H Hn 154 AA ETT 155 MICI MEME 158 SH OECSS SOON 159 CHAPTER 4 SCANNER 163 o nn 163 Barcode Processing Overview ssssssssssseeseeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
193. etween the first characters of the barcode and a string from the list is found that string is stripped from the barcode data Processing the list terminates when a match is found or when the end of the list is reached If the wildcard is not specified the string is assumed to strip from the beginning of the barcode data The string ABC strips off the prefix ABC The string X YZ will strip off the suffix XYZ The string ABC XYZ will strip both prefix and suffix together More than one in a configuration string is not allowed The user interface will not prevent it but results would not be as expected as only the first is used in parsing to match the string The question mark wildcard may be used to match any single character in the incoming data For example the data AB D will match ABCD ABcD or ABOD but not ABDE It is valid to have more than one in a string to match multiple characters The Barcode Data is saved per symbology configured The Symbology selected in the Symbologies dialog defines the symbology for which the data is being configured Note that the Code ID if any are configured is ignored by this dialog regardless of the setting of Strip Code ID in the Symbologies dialog If Strip Code ID is disabled then the barcode data to match must include the Code ID If Strip Code ID is enabled the data should not include the Code ID since it has already been stripped E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 174 Barcode Mani
194. exit or switching methods and all Microsoft defined Windows CE key combinations such as close X icon File Exit File Close Alt F4 Alt Tab etc are disabled The Windows CE desktop icons menu bars task bar and system trays are not visible or accessible Task Manager is not available If the end user selects File Exit or Close from the applications menu bar the menu is cleared and nothing else happens the application remains active Nothing happens when the end user clicks on the Close icon on the application s title bar and the application remains active Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker Windows accelerator keys such as Alt F4 are disabled E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 274 Passwords Passwords A password must be configured If the password is not configured a new device switches into Administration mode without prompting for a password In addition to the hotkey press a mode switch occurs if inaccurate information has been configured or if mandatory information is missing in the configuration There are seve
195. ey is again selected How To Remap a Command Je Qv Uu BA d On the KeyMap tab select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select RunCmd 1 4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list Click on the RunCmd tab Make sure the FILE radio button is selected In the text box Cmd1 4 corresponding to the number selected for RunCmd1 4 enter the desired command If any parameters are needed for the command click on the PARM radio button This clears the text box though the command is saved Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control If the KeyMap tab is accessed again the command plus any specified parameters is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped key is again selected E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide Sidetone a 12 008 MA 34 5dB 12 0 dB Figure 3 22 Mixer Control Panel Options 2o x Input None O Mici Input Boost Select the Input for the mixer Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level Tap OK to save the e None No microphone Use this setting when stereo headphones are attached to the e Micl Use this setting when a mono headset with microphone is attached to the When checked enabled Input Boost provides increased sensitivity of the microphone by 20
196. eys Left and Right oooooonnnnnncinccnncononconncnnncnncnnncnnnnos 163 Scanner and Pin 9 on COMI sss 35 inks 8 Scanner Control Characters Tab 175 Screen blanking eene 182 acl M tere 38 Scroll ot cia ERR GIU UR 54 SD Flash Cards CAB Files and Programs 129 Secondary Mode LED Indicator 58 Security Options Wirerless sesss 185 Security Panel AppLock irre teneret tpe 282 Security Password APPLOck ssc esee eit perenne 283 Send Key Messages and Wedge 165 Serial Cable for ActiveSync esses 37 135 Serial Connector ertt terrea 35 36 Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps 115 325 Setup APPLOCK qu 269 Show Clock eem 90 312 Single Application AppLock 271 Slot 0 Left nin E EEE 66 Slot 1 Right sse 66 Soft Keyboard ssssssssssssses 107 322 Software and Files 80 136 302 Software Load con eon 80 302 Software Revision sese 27 Speaker Jack Location eese 5 7 Speaker Volume Control Keys 60 Speaker Beeper Location eeeeeeee 7 Specifications VX7 Reference Guide 366 Audio Connector sese 47 Displays aiite cere tens 297 Env
197. ficate to submit a request on behalf of another user Figure 5 90 Advanced Certificate Request Screen Click on the Create and submit a request to this CA link VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 261 Microsoft Certifica es johnd Advanced Certificate Request Certificate Template User E Key Options Create new key set Use existing key set CSP Microsoft Enhanced Cryptographic Provider v1 0 El Key Usage Exchange Key Size 1024 Min S80 512 1024 2048 4096 8192 Automatic key container name User specified key container name Y Mark keys as exportable v Export keys to file Full path name userlkey pvk Enable strong private key protection Store certificate in the local computer certificate store Stores the certificate in the loca computer store instead of in the users certificate store Does not install the root CA s certificate You must be an administrator to generate or use a key in the local machine store Additional Options Request Format 9 CMC OPKCS10 Hash Algorithm SHA 1 Only used to sign request Save request to a file Attributes gt ul Friendly Name Figure 5 91 Advanced Certificate Details For the Certificate Template select User Check the Mark keys as exportable and the Export keys to file checkboxes
198. file e Set EAP Type to PEAP MSCHAP e Set Encryption to WPA TKIP e Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility put m Figure 5 18 PEAP MSCHAP Please review Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter Click the Credentials button e No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network e For Stored Credentials User Password and the CA Certificate Filename must be entered Enter these items as directed below Credentials Figure 5 19 PEAP MSCHAP Credentials VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 215 Enter the Domain Username if the Doman is required otherwise enter the Username Enter the password Leave the CA Certificate File Name blank for now Click OK then click Commit Ensure the correct Active profile is selected on the Main tab Please review Windows Certificates Store vs Certs Path earlier in this chapter Once successfully authenticated import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store Return to the Credentials screen and check the Validate server checkbox Password LXE CA Cert tru trusted store Validate server Use MS store Figure 5 20 PEAP MSCHAP Certificate Filename If using the Windows certificate store e Check the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted St
199. file provides for all authentications except Cisco PEAP When the default CISCO CAB file is loaded the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the figure labeled No Cisco PEAP above VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 231 If Cisco PEAP is desired 1 Rename the CISCO CAB file to CISCOMSCHAP CAB 2 Rename the CISCOPEAP CAB file to CISCO CAB 3 Coldboot the terminal to install the new driver with the registry The renamed CISCO CAB file provides for Cisco PEAP and PEAP GTC authentications When the renamed CISCO CAB file is loaded the Wireless Network Properties screen looks like the figure labeled Cisco PEAP Installed above If it becomes necessary to switch to a different authentication than Cisco PEAP or PEAP GTC 1 Rename the CISCO CAB file to CISCOPEAP CAB 2 Rename the CISCOMSCHAP CAB file to CISCO CAB 3 Coldboot the terminal to install the new driver with the registry E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 232 Cisco Radio Wireless Network Configuration Use the following instructions for all authentication protocols to configure the Microsoft Wireless Network configuration utility unless WPA LEAP is used WPA LEAP is configured with the Cisco ACU see Section WPA LEAP Authentication Configuration Click the ACU icon on the desktop Select Active Profile Profiled External Settings gt y 350 Series Radio is Not iated B Figure 5 38 Cisco ACU Profile Selection
200. flash from the Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired VX7 without Label If the VX7 Bluetooth address barcode label does not exist follow these steps to create a unique Bluetooth address barcode for the VX7 First locate the VX7 Bluetooth address by tapping Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth About tab Computer Friendly Name vxcoo1 Bluetooth Address o0 40 FD 02 03 04 BTC version 1 0 BTCFPCESOAb Bluetooth Stack Revision 1 3 Bluetooth Radio HCI 2 12288 Bluetooth Radio LMP 2 16907 Copyright 2006 2007 LXE Inc y Figure 1 14 About Tab and Bluetooth Address Next create a Bluetooth address barcode label for the VX7 The format for the barcode label is as follows e Barcode type must be Code 128 e FNC3 character followed by string Uppercase L lowercase n lowercase k uppercase B and then the Bluetooth address 12 hex digits no colons For example LnkB0400fd00203 1 Create and print the label Scan the VX7 Bluetooth address barcode label with the Bluetooth barcode reader The devices are paired The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes Refer to the following section titled Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Note After scanning the VX7 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED flash from the Bluetooth device the devices are currently paired Free barcode creation software is available for download on the World Wide
201. from the application menu and select the host type that you require This will depend on the type of host system that you are going to connect to 1 e 3270 mainframe AS 400 5250 server or VT host 4 Enter the Host Address of the host system that you wish to connect to This may either be a DNS name or an IP address of the host system 5 Update the telnet port number if your host application is configured to listen on a specific port If not just use the default telnet port 6 Select OK 7 Select Session Connect from the application menu or tap the Connect button on the Command Bar Upon a successful connection you should see the host application screen displayed To change options such as Display Colors Cursor Barcode etc please refer to the RFTerm Reference Guide on the LXE Manuals CD E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 12 Configuring the VX7 with LXEConnect Configuring the VX7 with LXEConnect Requirements ActiveSync version 3 8 or higher must be resident on the host desktop laptop computer Please see the following section ActiveSync for more details on ActiveSync ActiveSync is already installed on the VX7 The VX7 is preconfigured to establish a USB ActiveSync connection to a PC when the proper cable is attached to the VX7 and the PC If The VX7 uses a serial port for ActiveSync it is necessary to configure the VX7 to use the serial port Complete details on the proper cables and por
202. ge LORAX scanner Desk Cradle Radio Charging Multi Interface Desk Cradle Charge Only Mulit Interface Forklift Cradle Radio Charging Multi Interface Forklift Cradle Charge Only Multi Interface US AC Power Cord Universal Desktop Power Supply 90 264VAC 9 60VDC Forklift Power Supply Power Cable connects Power Supply to Forklift Cable Assembly DA9F 9 ft Cradle to Terminal Forklift Rugged Scanner Holder with RAM mount 8800 Spare Battery Single slot Universal Battery Charger Adapter Cup Single Slot Battery Charger w International Power Universal Battery Charger 4 slot Requires 4 adapter cups Scanner Holster for Belt Mounted take up Reel Auto Sense Intellistand Hands Free Scanning Strap with Scanner Clip VX7 Reference Guide Manuals and Accessories 8651 100RINGSCR 8652100RINGSCR 86503 76BATTERY 8650377CHARGER 8650378CHARGER 8650379CHARGER 8650380CHARGER 8700A301SCNRBTSRI 8700A501BASERS232 8700A502PSACUS 8700A001 CBL8DA9F 8700A503CHGR4US 8700A504BATT 8810A326SCNRBTFZ 8820A327SCNRBTER 8800001 CRADLE 8800002CRADLE 8800003CRADLE 8800004CHARGER 8800051 CABLE 8800A301ACPS 8800A302DCPS 8800052CABLE 8500A051CBL9DA9F 8800A005STAND 8800A376BATTERY 8800377CHARGER 8800378CHARGER 8800A379CHGRBASE 8200A501HOLSRBELT 8000A501INDREEL 8500A505STANDSMT 9000A411SCNRSTRAP E EQ VX7RG L ARC Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Identifying Your VX7 Some features discussed in this document m
203. gies Refer to the previous section Barcode Symbology Settings for instruction Symbology a Strip Enable Min 5 Max p Leading k Trailing 18 Em Figure 4 11 AIM Custom Setup for C1 Click the Barcode Data button Click the Add button Add the data for the match codes Barcode Data Figure 4 12 Barcode Match Data for C1 Refer to the previous section BarcodeData Match List for instruction Scan a barcode and examine the result E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 182 Screen Blanking Screen Blanking The VX7 can be configured to blank the display when the vehicle to which it is mounted is moving eliminating a possible distraction for the driver When configured properly the screen blanking feature provides a tamper resistant method to blank the vehicle screen The screen blanking feature consists of Scanner Control Panel Options and a customer supplied cable connected to one of the COM ports on the VX7 Properly configured the display is visible only when the cable provides a signal that the vehicle has stopped The customer must supply their own cable The cable specifications are detail in Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout The cable can be hooked to either the COM1 or COM3 port The COM port used must be selected in the Scanner control panel Screen blanking is configured on the Main tab of the Scanner control panel Scanner Con
204. ging graphics keyboard and touchscreen input window management and common controls Network and Device Drivers Wavelink Avalanche Optional LXE AppLock Java Optional e Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option when installed Terminal Emulation Optional e RFTerm VT220 TN5250 TN3270 Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot if installed LXE API Routines see Accessories for the LXE SDK Kit part number Note Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are released by LXE Software Applications The following applications are included e WordPad was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE e Pocket Inbox e Word Viewer e Excel Viewer e PDF Viewer VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Installed Software 303 e Image Viewer e Scanner Wedge LXE developed e ActiveSync e Transcriber e Media Player e Internet Explorer Note that the viewer applications allow viewing documents but not editing them Java Optional Installed by LXE Files can be accessed by tapping Start Programs JEM CE Doubletap the EVM icon to open the EVM Console A folder of Java examples and Plug ins is also installed with the Java option LXE does not support Java applications running on the mobile device LXE RFTerm Optional AppLock Installed by LXE The application can be accessed by tapping Start Programs RFTerm Please refer
205. gure 5 86 Certificate Import Confirmation Click Yes to import the certificate Once the certificate is installed return to the proper authentication section earlier in this manual VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 259 User Certificates User certificates are only needed for EAP TLS Generating a User Certificate LL Please refer to the LXE Security Primer for more information on obtaining and installing user certificates The easiest way to get the user certificate is to use a browser on a PC to navigate to the CA To request the user certificate open a browser to http lt CA IP address gt certsrv Sign into the CA with the username and password of the person who will be logging into the mobile device Connect to 100 100 100 100 BE Connecting to 100 100 100 100 were 8 rz Password T Remember my password OK Cancel Figure 5 87 Logon to Certificate Authority This process saves a user certificate and a separate private key file Windows CE equipped devices such as the VX7 require the private key to be saved as a separate file rather than including the private key in the user certificate Microsoft Certificat es johndoe Welcome Use this Web site to request a certificate for your Web browser e mail client or other program By using a certificate you can verify your identity to people you communicate with over the Web sign and encrypt messages an
206. h E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 360 Revision History VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC A About software hardware version network IP 92 314 AC Adapter Specifications cesses eneeees 295 AC to DC Power Supply ooococccococccocconononononnnonnnonnno 74 Accessibility settings ccccccessseeeseeteeeees 95 317 ActiveSync ci M rete easereereerr 15 Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection 132 Configure id 15 COMME CEs cune cnc ter EE RP ERR 15 131 Create Comm Option sse 134 EXPlOre nta Uca Cova 131 Hood 86 308 IR port transmission eene 86 308 OptiOnS 22 cnini in er tene Rs 130 Prerequisites inconciee teas 130 Setup Wizard esee 130 Troubleshooting see 133 Use this cable esee 37 135 Version 3 7 eoi ORO HRS 86 308 ActiveSync version 3 8 12 Adapter Cable VX1 2 4 Power Supply 77 Add prefix and suffix control s 174 Admin Hotkey AppLock eite Rente aea 273 Allow Close 4 erret tete 280 Allow ComnectiOM oooconocccononancnononnncnnonananonnos 121 328 Antenna Connector Locati0M oooooconncccnononncinnnancnonnnanoss 5 7 Diversity A gone me e eaei 202 Transmit cococcccoccnonconnconono nono nono nono ncnnnonnnonnnonnos 201 Exiemnaleto soot ee er ene eee renee Ri ii 51 A Epiri ein 52 hou ER 51 API calS ini
207. hanges VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 209 Summit Wireless Security Use the instructions in this section to complete the entries on the Profile tab according to the type of wireless security used by the network The instructions that follow are the minimum required to successfully connect to a network Your system may require more parameters than are listed in these instructions Please see your system administrator for complete information about your network and its wireless security requirements To begin the configuration process e On the Main tab click the Admin Login button and enter the password e LXE recommends editing the default profile with the parameters for your network Select the Default profile from the pull down menu Summit Client Utility profe New Rename Delete Scan lt i Security EAP type None y None WEP keys PSKs Credentials Figure 5 12 Default Profile e Make any desired parameter changes as described in the applicable following section determined by network security type and click the Commit button to save the changes Be sure to click the Commit button after all changes have been made E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 210 Summit Radio No Security To connect to a wireless network with no security make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to None e
208. he Microsoft File Viewers cannot display files that have been password protected E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 86 Start Menu Program Options Communication Access Start Programs Communication Note Some communication menu options require an external modem connection to the VX7 Modems are not available from LXE nor supported by LXE ActiveSync Once a relationship partnership has been established with Connect ActiveSync will synchronize using the radio link on the VX7 See also Chapter 1 Introduction section ActiveSync Initial Setup Requirement ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher must be resident on the host desktop laptop computer ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website Follow their instructions to locate download and install ActiveSync on your desktop computer For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help See also section titled Backup VX7 Files Using ActiveSync for more ActiveSync information Synchronizing from the VX7 using a USB ActiveSync connection You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device 1 To initiate synchronization from your device connect the USB cable to the PC and to the dongle cable on the VX7 The VX7 connects automatically 2 Click the Syne Now button to synchronize
209. he Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Java and Java based trademarks and logos are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the U S or other countries and are used under license Intel and Intel XScale are trademarks or registered trademarks of Intel Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and other countries RAMO and RAM Mount are both trademarks of National Products Inc 1205 S Orr Street Seattle WA 98108 The Cisco Square Bridge logo is a trademark of Cisco Systems Inc Aironet Cisco and Cisco Systems are registered trademarks of Cisco Systems Inc and or its affiliates in the United States and certain other countries Summit Data Communications Inc Summit Data Communications the Summit logo and The Pinnacle of Performance are trademarks of Summit Data Communications Inc All rights reserved Symbol the Symbol logo and Spectrum24 are registered trademarks of Symbol Technologies Inc The Bluetooth word mark and logos are owned by the Bluetooth SIG Inc and any use of such marks by LXE Inc is under license Wavelink and Wavelink Avalanche are registered trademarks and the Wavelink logo tagline and Avalanche MC are trademarks of Wavelink Corporation Kirkland WA All other brand or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies or organizations When th
210. he following options represent the factory default program installation Your system may be different based on the software and hardware options purchased Access Start Programs Cisco Communication ActiveSync Connect Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server Microsoft File Viewers Excel Viewer Image Viewer PDF Viewer Word Viewer Summit Command Prompt Internet Explorer Java LXE RFTerm Media Player Microsoft WordPad Remote Desktop Connection Transcriber Avalanche Windows Explorer Set Cisco radio network parameters Please see Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for details Stores Network communication options Transfer files between a VX7 and a desktop computer Run this command after setting up a connection Begin connection to FTP server End connection to FTP server View downloaded files see Note View Excel 97 and newer documents View BMP JPEG and PNG images View Adobe Acrobat documents View Word 97 and newer documents and RTF files Set Summit radio network parameters Please see Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for details The command line interface in a separate window Access web pages on the world wide Internet Option Option Terminal emulation application Music management program Opens an ASCII notepad Log on to a Windows Terminal Server Enter data using the stylus on the touchscreen Option Remote management for networked devices File management program Note T
211. he keyboard integrated scanner or a device connected to a serial port Note The touchscreen may be disabled Please refer to Disabling the Touchscreen in Chapter 3 System Configuration for details A right click can be simulated on the touchscreen To perform a right click touch the touchscreen with the stylus and hold it in the same location for a short time Note Some applications may not support this right click method Please review documentation for the application to see if it provides for right mouse click configuration Input Panel Virtual Keyboard Data may be entered via the input panel virtual keyboard on the touchscreen For more details on the input panel please refer to Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 10 Data Entry Touchscreen and Mouse The behavior of the mouse pointer on the touchscreen varies by VX7 construction To identify your VX7 platform type please see Identifying Your VX7 in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Platform 1 VX7 s Because the touchscreen also functions as a mouse the pointer for on the 95 key keyboard a USB mouse or a PS 2 mouse pointer may not always be visible on the screen The mouse pointer reappears when the 95 key keyboard pointer or external mouse is moved or clicked Please see USB Mouse earlier in this manual for more details e When a USB mouse is first attached to the VX7 the
212. he mixer Move the sliders to adjust the decibel level Tap OK to save the e None No microphone Use this setting when stereo headphones are attached to the e Micl Use this setting when a mono headset with microphone is attached to the When checked enabled Input Boost provides increased sensitivity of the microphone by 20 dB Input Boost can only be enabled after an Input type other than None is selected 324 Mixer Access Start Settings Control Panel Mixer Icon Adjust the volume record gain and sidetone for microphone input Factory Default Settings Master Volume 0dB Record Gain 22 5dB Sidetone 12 0dB Input None Input Boost Disabled Mixer Master Volume Record Gain a Ode a 22 5d8 KA 46 5d8 KA Ode 6 0 dB 22 5 dB settings The following options are available for Input device device e Bluetooth Reserved for future use VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 325 Mouse Access Start Settings Control Panel Mouse Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen or an external mouse Network and Dialup Connections Access Start Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections Create a dialup direct or VPN connection on the VX7 To configure the VX7 to use DHCP or a fixed IP address select the desired connection The default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP A static IP address can be assigned by clicking the Specify an IP addre
213. he vicinity The Discovery process also queries for the unique identifier for each device discovered Bluetooth Devices Settings Bluetooth Address Discovering Bluetooth devices Figure 3 9 Discover Bluetooth Devices Tap Stop at any time to end the Discover and Query for Unique Identifier functions VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 99 Bluetooth Devices A device previously discovered and paired with the VX7 is shown in the Bluetooth Devices panel LXEZ Pairing Bluetooth Devices Settings Last 4 Bluetooth Address PrinterO1 00 20 E0 00 12 34 E Printeroz 00 05 4E 00 AA BB Fi scannero 00 04 76 00 AB CD Scanner02 00 03 74 00 14 26 Figure 3 10 Bluetooth Devices Panel Note When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the VX7 Bluetooth scanning range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the VX7 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the VX7 The discovered paired devices may or may not be identified with an icon Discovered devices without an icon can be paired as printers or scanners the Bluetooth panel will assign an icon to the device name An icon with a red background indicates the device Bluetooth connection is inactive An icon with a white background indicates the device is connected to the VX7 and the device Bluetooth connection is active Doubletap a
214. hen Replace is tapped the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at a time Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide Configuration data Ignore drop Printable text Hat encoded text Escaped hat encoded text Hex encoded text Escaped hex encoded text VX7 Reference Guide Control Code Replacement Examples Translation The control character is discarded from the barcode data prefix and suffix Text is substituted for Control Character The hat encoded text is translated to the equivalent hex value The hat encoding to pass thru to the application The hex encoded text is translated to the equivalent hex value The hex encoding to pass thru to the application Example Control Character Start of TeXt Carriage Return Horizontal Tab Carriage Return Vertical Tab Barcode Manipulation Translated data Ox1B in the barcode is discarded Example configuration Ignore dro
215. his could LOG_ERROR happen if the application being locked encountered an error after performing its initialization and shut itself down prior to being locked by AppLock Hook wndproc of open app failure The application is open but AppLock cannot lock it LOG_ERROR Hot key event creation failure The Admin applet is unable to create the hotkey LOG_ERROR notification Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key pressed Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Hot key set event failure When the administrator changes the hotkey LOG_ERROR configuration the hotkey controller must be notified This notification failed Hotkey press message received The user just pressed the configured hotkey LOG_PROCESSING VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC hook WM_WINDOWPOSCHANG ED exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window position and corrects it AppLock Error Messages 343 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level In app hook WM SIZE In addition to preventing the locked application from LOG EX exiting AppLock must also prevent the application from enabling the taskbar and resizing the application s window This message traps a change in the window size and corrects it In app In addition to preventing the locked application from LOG EX Initializing keyb
216. ials screen for the desired authentication do not check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox 4 Enter the certificate name in the CA Cert textbox 5 Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile changes E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 208 Summit Radio How To Use Windows Certificate Store i Ze Follow the instructions later in this chapter for Downloading a Root CA Certificate to a PC To import the certificate into the Windows store follow the instructions for Installing a Root CA Certificate on the Mobile Device later in this chapter When completing the Credentials screen for the desired authentication be sure to check the Use MS store checkbox after checking the Validate server checkbox The default is to use all certificates in the store If this is OK skip to Step 8 Otherwise to select a specific certificate click on the Browse button Choose certificate E Use full trusted store Issued By Thawte Server CA Thawte Premium Server CA Secure Server Certification Authority GTE CyberTrust Root GTE CyberTrust Global Root of Figure 5 11 Choose Certificate Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox Select the desired certificate and click the Select button to return the selected certificate to the CA Cert textbox Click OK to exit the Credentials screen and then Commit to save the profile c
217. ica ri 353 AM N A pn ne up Oii 355 INDEX 361 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide xiv Illustrations Figure 1 1 Figure 1 2 Figure 1 3 Figure 1 4 Figure 1 5 Figure 1 6 Figure 1 7 Figure 1 8 Figure 1 9 Figure 1 10 Figure 1 11 Figure 1 12 Figure 1 13 Figure 1 14 Figure 2 1 Figure 2 2 Figure 2 3 Figure 2 4 Figure 2 5 Figure 2 6 Figure 2 7 Figure 2 8 Figure 2 9 Figure 2 10 Figure 2 11 Figure 2 12 Figure 2 13 Figure 2 14 Figure 2 15 Figure 2 16 Figure 2 17 Figure 2 18 Figure 2 19 Figure 2 20 Figure 2 21 Figure 2 22 Figure 2 23 Figure 2 24 Figure 2 25 Figure 2 26 Figure 2 27 Figure 2 28 Figure 2 29 Figure 2 30 Figure 2 31 Figure 2 32 Figure 2 33 Figure 2 34 Figure 2 35 Figure 2 36 Figure 2 37 VX7 Reference Table of Contents VX7 Components Top VIew estie noit n se vie E Ud e E IL ev IN DERI 3 VX7 Components Front VIGW a iicet n de e v a UR te d ERI E ERE UA 5 NRT Components Boltong Vi Wii ie biu E rds Spb RE ERE EP ines 6 VX7 Components Back View iaceret ane rat sprint 6 boeRes lvi Ie E 7 NOT Acc Panel vere e diia 7 ActiveSync EXplOPe uiii eb kv toi 12 LXEConnect Installation Files ceca itio iia 13 ID epe ti USER ERE HEU Ure etr Eee EE EE CE Ub rie ese vro aero 13 LXECOnBnDEct INUlOS ne b de 14 EXEConnect Dedo pueda tus n n tester atten arado 14 Bluetooth Devices Display Before Discovering Devices sss 16 Sample Blue
218. ication completes the status will change to Authenticated to lt SSID gt as shown Click on the IP Information tab and make sure there is a valid IP address as shown previously in this section VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 243 WPA LEAP LEAP is a Cisco proprietary authentication protocol and is not supported by the Microsoft supplicant To configure the VX7 for WPA LEAP use the Cisco ACU installed during normal installation of the Cisco radio driver Cisco ACU Start the Cisco ACU by clicking the icon on the desktop or navigate to Start Programs Cisco ACU Click on the Profile tab Select Active Profile ProfileO Profile 350 Series Radio is Not Associated Figure 5 60 ACU Profile Tab Click the Rename button Name the profile Select Active Profile LEAP WPA LEAP WPA 350 Series Radio is Not Associated Figure 5 61 Renaming Profile Click the Edit button E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 244 Cisco Radio The profile properties screen is displayed LEAP WPA Properties Value wpaTest PAC Import Network Security Type WEP Keys WEP Authentication Type User Name User Password ly Cancel Figure 5 62 Profile Properties Screen Enter the SSID and Client Name in the correct fields Set the Network Security Type to LEAP WPA Click the OK button Select Active Profile LEAP WPA LEAP WPA 350 Series Radio is Not Associated Figure 5 63 Sel
219. ice does not need to have been Discovered by the VX7 before the pairing request is received Click the Accept button or the Decline button to remove the dialog box from the screen Note In some cases if a Bluetooth device is already paired this setting cannot be changed If this is the case an error message is displayed and the option is not changed The Bluetooth device must be disconnected before changing this setting E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 18 Bluetooth Continuous search When enabled the VX7 never stops searching for a device it has paired with once the connection is broken such as the paired device entering Suspend mode going out of range or being turned off When disabled the VX7 stops searching after one half hour The search can be restarted by putting the VX7 through a Suspend Resume cycle or accessing the Bluetooth control panel This option is disabled by default Subsequent Use Note Taskbar and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered 90 m eo vw dE pair connect and disconnect A taskbar Bluetooth icon with a red background indicates Bluetooth is active and not paired with any device A device icon with a red background indicates a disconnected paired device Tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar or on the desktop to open the Bluetooth LXEZ Pairing application Tap the Bluetooth Devices tab Tap the Discover button When the Bluetooth module begins se
220. ices for each VX7 The System Administrator has also enabled disabled Bluetooth settings and assigned a Computer Friendly Name for each VX7 See Chapter 3 System Configuration Bluetooth control panel applet and supported Bluetooth printers and scanners The Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth LED states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered pair connect and disconnect There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the VX7 Only LXE printers or scanners are recognized and displayed in the Bluetooth panel All other Bluetooth devices are ignored Taskbar Legend Icon 3 Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s VX is not connected to any Bluetooth device 3 VX7 is ready to connect with any Bluetooth device VX7 is out of range of all paired Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive Note When an active paired device enters Suspend Mode is turned Off or leaves the VX7 Bluetooth scan range the Bluetooth connection between the paired device and the VX7 is lost There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices disconnect from the VX7 See Accessories for supported Bluetooth printers and scanners AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using Bluetooth applications nor does it stop authorized Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the VX7 while AppLock is in control See Chapter 6 AppLock for more informat
221. ich the VX7 is mounted is in motion This feature required a serial cable connection and is enabled using the Scanner control panel Please see Screen Blanking later in this chapter for details E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 322 Control Panel Options Input Panel Access Start Settings Control Panel Input Panel Select the current key data input method Factory Default Settings Input Method Keyboard Allow applications to Disabled change input panel state Keys Small keys Use gestures Disabled Input Panel Properties El OK E Input Panel Current input method lt eyboa To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired method from the menu that appears Allow applications to change the input panel state Figure C 11 Input Panel Properties Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the keypad primarily available when entering data Selecting Keyboard enables both The Input Panel is disabled by default To enable the input panel make sure the checkbox for Allow applications to change input panel state is checked and warmboot the VX7 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options Internet Options 323 Set General Connection Security and Advanced options for Internet connectivity Factory Default Settings General Sta
222. ied together incorrectly This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port ActiveSync indicator on the host turns green and spins but connection never occurs Baud rate of connection is not supported or detected by host Try forcing ActiveSync on the desktop PC to use a specific baud rate and set the VX7 to use the same baud rate or Incorrect or broken data lines in cable ActiveSync indicator on the host remains gray The host doesn t know you are trying to connect May mean a bad cable with no control lines connected or an incompatible baud rate Try the connection again with a known good cable Testing connection with a terminal emulator program or a serial port monitor You can use HyperTerminal or some other terminal emulator program to do a rough test of ActiveSync Set the terminal emulator to 8 bits no parity 1 stop bits and the same baud rate as the connection on the CE device After double clicking REPLLOG EXE on the CE device the word CLIENT appears on the display in ASCII format When using a serial port monitor you see the host echo CLIENT followed by SERVER After this point the data stream becomes straight binary PPP E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 134 Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSync Create a Communication Option l 10 11 12 13 14 On the VX7 select Start Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Con
223. igure 5 102 Private Key Present The private key should now say present If it does not there is a problem Possible items to check e Make sure the certificate was generated with a separate private key file as shown earlier in this section If the certificate was not generated with a separate private key file generate a new certificate and follow the import process again e Make sure the certificate and private key file have the same name for example vx7user cer for the certificate and vx7user pvk for the private key file If the file names are not the same rename the private key file and import it again E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 268 Certificates VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Chapter 6 AppLock Introduction LXE s AppLock is designed to be run on LXE certified Windows CE based devices only LXE loads the AppLock program as part of the LXE customer installation process Configuration parameters are specified by the AppLock Administrator for the mobile device end user AppLock is password protected by the Administrator End user mode locks the end user into the configured applications The end user can still reboot the mobile device and respond to dialog boxes The administrator specified applications are automatically launched in the specified order and run in full screen mode when the device boots up When the mobile device is reset to factory default values for example after a cold reset the Administra
224. ilable Launch the Enabler application Manage Taskbar Lock or Hide Note the dimmed options The Enabler can restrict user access to other applications when the user interface is accessed by either locking or hiding the taskbar Program Shutdown Continue or Stop monitoring The system administrator can control whether the Enabler continues to monitor the Mobile Device Server for updates once the Enabler application is exited VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 153 Scan Config Note Scan Config functionality is a standard option of the Wavelink Avalanche System but is not currently supported by LXE on Windows CE Avalanche Update Settings B Figure 3 45 Scan Config Option Display Avalanche Update Settings Figure 3 46 Window Display Options Update Window Display The user interface for the Enabler can be configured to dynamically change based on the status of the connection with the Mobile Device Server At startup Half screen Hidden or Full screen Default is Half screen On connect As is Half screen full screen Locked full screen Default is As is Normal Half screen Hidden or As is Default is As is E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 154 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Shortcuts LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function AppLock is resident on each mobile device with a Windows OS AppLock configuration inst
225. ill be continuously pinged The Stop Ping button can be tapped to end the ping process ahead of the ping timeout Options 0 to 30 000 ms Default 5000 Ping Delay ms The amount of time specified in milliseconds between each ping Options 0 to 30 000 ms Default 1000 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 205 Sign On vs Stored Credentials When using wireless security that requires a user name and password to be entered the Summit Client Utility offers two choices e The Username and Password may be entered on the Credentials screen If this method is selected anyone using the device can access the network e The Username and Password are left blank on the Credentials screen When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed The user must enter the Username and Password at that time to authenticate How to Use Stored Credentials I mode ow ge After completing the other entries in the profile click on the Credentials button Enter the Username and Password on the Credentials screen and click the OK button Click the Commit button For LEAP and WPA LEAP configuration is complete For PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC and EAP TLS import the CA certificate into the Windows certificate store For EAP TLS also import the User Certificate into the Windows certificate store Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked
226. illips size 1 driver head 4 Re connect the power cord cable and turn the VX7 on E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 74 Power Supply Power Supply AC to DC power input for the VX7 is delivered via an optional external power supply See External Power Supply Vehicle power input for the VX7 is 12V to 80V DC nominal and is accepted without the need to perform any manual operation within the VX7 See Vehicle 12 80VDC Direct Connection An optional uninterruptible power supply UPS battery can be used with the vehicle DC power supply Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible on the VX7 External Power Supply 1 AC Input Cable US only 0 9 2 DC Output Cable Figure 2 47 Optional Power Supply Cable In North America this unit is intended for use with a UL Listed ITE power supply with output rated 12 80 VDC minimum 75 W Outside North America this unit is intended for use with an IEC certified ITE power supply with output rated 12 80 VDC minimum 75 W The external power supply may be connected to either a 120V 60Hz supply or outside North America to a 230V 50Hz supply using the appropriate detachable cordset In all cases connect the external AC supply to a properly grounded source of supply provided with maximum 15 Amp overcurrent protection 10 Amp for 230V circuits Note Instructions for using this configuration are contained in VX7 User s Guide sectio
227. ing one flash card for another E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 130 Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSync Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSync Using Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher you can synchronize information on your desktop computer with the VX7 and vice versa Synchronization compares the data on your VX7 with your desktop computer and updates both with the most recent data For example you can e Back up and restore your device data e Copy rather than synchronize files between your device and desktop computer e Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode For example you can synchronize continually while connected to your desktop computer or only when you choose the synchronize command If the VX7 is connected to a PC by a RS 232 or USB cable disconnect the cable from the VX7 and reconnect Check that the correct connection is selected Serial or USB Client Note By default ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information Use ActiveSync Options to specify the types of information you want to synchronize The synchronization process makes the data in the information types you select identical on both your desktop computer and your device When installation of ActiveSync is complete on your desktop computer the ActiveSync Setup Wizard begins and starts the following processes e connect your device to your desktop computer e setup a partnership
228. inistrator Control panel the two passwords are compared to verify that they match If they do not match a dialog box is displayed notifying the user of the error After the user closes the dialog box the Security Panel is displayed and the password can then be entered and confirmed again If the passwords match the password is encrypted and saved See Also Passwords and Troubleshooting Multi Application AppLock Options Panel AppLock contains several types of delays and timeouts to accommodate different applications Please note that the delays specified on the Launch panel are delays before AppLock attempts to start the specified application s The timeouts specified on this panel are delays after AppLock has attempted to launch the application Administrator Control E OK ES Application Security Options Status Launch timeout 60000 Replace timeout 20000 Restart timeout 20000 Figure 6 7 Options Panel Launch timeout This timeout specifies the period of time in milliseconds for AppLock to wait for the application to initially launch after the application has been called For example 1f the application takes time to launch and then initialize before a display a window is created use this delay to specify the delay period Replace timeout This timeout specifies the period of time in milliseconds for AppLock to wait after an initial screen like a password prompt screen is replaced by another
229. installing see Installing a Root CA Certificate in this chapter The RADIUS server certificate is not required only the root CA which issued the server certificate Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen Click the Properties button PEAP Properties ES Walidate server certificate Connect only if server name ends in Trusted root certificate Connect only if server is signed by specified trusted root CA Always try to resume secure session Figure 5 54 PEAP Properties Validate Server Certificate Check the Validate server certificate box Click OK to dismiss the configuration boxes When the login box appears enter valid user credentials It is possible for to be prompted to accept a Root CA certificate when using PEAP GTC If the trusted root certificate box as shown in the previous figure is blank the user will be prompted to accept the Root CA certificate by name as shown below Validate Server Certificate N You have connected to a server that is signed by Root Certification Authority RFRootCA which is different than the specified trusted CA Do you want to accept this connection Warning Connecting to a server signed with untrusted CA might compromise your security Figure 5 55 Server Connection Warning If this is the correct server certificate Root CA click OK If not install the correct Root CA as described in Installing a R
230. ion See Also Chapter 3 System Configuration section titled Bluetooth E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 20 Bluetooth Bluetooth Barcode Reader Setup Introduction Please refer to the Bluetooth scanner manufacturer s User Guide it may be available on the manufacturer s web site Contact your LXE representative for Bluetooth product assistance LXE supports several different types of barcode readers This section describes the interaction and setup for a mobile Bluetooth laser scanner or laser imager connected to the VX7 using Bluetooth functions e The VX7 must have the Bluetooth hardware and software installed An VX7 operating system upgrade may be required Contact your LXE representative for details e Ifthe VX7 has a Bluetooth address identifier barcode label affixed then Bluetooth hardware and software is installed e The mobile Bluetooth laser scanner laser imager battery is fully charged e The barcode numbering examples in this segment are not real and should not be created nor scanned with a Bluetooth scanner e To open the LXEZ Pairing program tap Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth or tap the Bluetooth icon on the desktop or tap the Bluetooth icon in the taskbar TT Tl ll Figure 1 13 Sample Bluetooth Address Barcode Label Locate the barcode label similar to the one shown above attached to the mobile device The label is the Bluetooth address identifier for
231. ion by the Administrator are available to the user LXE devices with the AppLock feature are shipped to boot in Administration mode with no default password thus when the device is first booted the user has full access to the device and no password prompt is displayed After the administrator specifies an application to lock a password is assigned and the device is rebooted or the hotkey is pressed the device switches to end user mode AppLock also contains a component which sets configuration parameters as specified by the Administrator To set the AppLock parameters please see Chapter 6 AppLock for details VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 319 Bluetooth Certificates Date Time Access Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth Bluetooth is not supported with the Windows CE NET Operating System Please contact your LXE representative for upgrade options Access Start Settings Control Panel Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the VX7 user These values may change based on the type of radio security resident in the client access point or the host system Access Start Settings Control Panel Date Time Icon Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Factory Default Settings Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT 05 00 Daylight Savings Disabled Date Time Properties Ea OK 53
232. ion is now included in Chapter 5 Added new chapter containing sections removed from Chapter 4 Explanation Updated When To Use This Guide Updated Accessories list Renamed Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages section to Configuring IPv6 and revised section Revised Introduction and Cisco Aironet Client Utility ACU section Renamed Configuring VX7 Radio to Configuring VX7 Radio Without WPA Added WPA for the VX7 section VX7 Reference Guide 356 Revision History Revision D August 2006 Revised Accessories listing Chapter 2 Physical Revised On Off Switch Scanner Serial Connector COM1 Description and Layout Printer PC Serial Connector COM3 Install the 2 4GHz Type II PCMCIA Radio Input Panel Virtual Keyboard Video Subsystem and The Display Added new section Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable Chapter 3 Power Supply Revised VX7 Input Power Specifications Chapter 4 System Revised Installed Software Start Menu Program Options Network Configuration and Dialup Connections Control Panel Options About Date Time Keyboard Password Regional Settings Remote Desktop Connection Scanner Storage Manager LAUNCH EXE and Reflash the VX7 sections Added new sections Folders Copie
233. ions Set General Connection Security Privacy Advanced and Popups options for Internet connectivity Keyboard Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate KeyPad Remap keys to a single keypress combination of keypresses or to launch an application or command Mixer Adjust the volume record gain and sidetone for microphone input Mouse Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen MX3X VXC Set various device specific configuration options Options Network and Dial Set network driver properties and network access properties Up Options Owner Set VX7 owner details Password Set VX7 access password properties PC Connection Control the connection between the VX7 and a local desktop or laptop computer PCMCIA Manage PCMCIA cards Power Displays the status of all power managed devices E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 92 Control Panel Options Option Function Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and language settings Remove Programs Remove user installed programs in their entirety Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports See Chapter 4 Scanner Storage Manager Manage storage devices create partitions Stylus Set double tap
234. ions are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to LEAP e Set Encryption to Auto WEP e Set Auth Type as follows o Ifthe Cisco CCX certified AP is configured for open authentication set the Auth Type radio parameter to Open o Ifthe AP is configured for network EAP only set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP Please see WPA LEAP later in this section to configure the radio for WPA LEAP Summit Client Utility Figure 5 16 LEAP Configuration Please review Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 213 To use Stored Credentials click on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network Credentials E User user2 Password LXE Figure 5 17 LEAP Credentials Enter the Domain Username if the Doman is required otherwise enter the Username Enter the password and click OK Once configured click the Commit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 214 Summit Radio PEAP MSCHAP To use PEAP MSCHAP make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this pro
235. ironmental eeeeeeeeenene 296 Input POWER tesis isa 77 Keyboard Connector sss 39 Physical ri 295 Power Connector eese 48 USB Connector eese 42 Start Menu coocooocconncnnononnonononcncnncnnnnononconononnanonoss 85 307 Static IP Address oooooocccnonocccononcnnonancnonanannnnn 118 325 Status LED Indicator eee 58 Status Panel AppLock nier 284 Status popup eese nennen nennen 117 Stop Bits ssssssssssseeeeeeees 124 163 332 Storage Manager NI M P 332 Storage Temperature Specifications 296 Stored certificates oooooocononnccconoonnnnonaannnonnnnnon 104 319 Strip Code ID nene eiit emen three 176 Strip leading and trailing sss 171 Strip Leading and Trailing 163 SLylUS iia iced e e end 9 65 Data Eintty eee tee tete renes 9 ptopetties osse e unes de Cabe 125 333 sensitivity eesseeseeseeseeeerseeessrseeseesesseseeses 125 333 Symbol ID and EV 15 Imager 168 Symbology setting parameters sss 170 Symbology Settings sss 167 System Hardware Configuration sss 28 System Memory cooocococcconcnononoconononnnoconcnonn cor nennen 29 System Requirements WPA Cisco 229 T Terminal Emulator List
236. is manual is in PDF format Acrobat Reader Copyright 2010 Adobe Systems Incorporated All rights reserved Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat and the Acrobat logo are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated applies Revision Notice VX7 Reference Guide Upgrade to Revision L ARC Section Explanation Entire document Archived to capture obsolete features Note A complete revision history is included in Appendix D Reference Material Table of Contents CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION 1 J 1 When to Usa MS GUID 2 IB o EE SI UI RET T eRem 3 Ded An PPP 4 o do MTM TURPE 4 Meus a E E T 5 A A E E A E E E TT 8 Keyboard Data 35 5 3 snieman enre E E R RM MU 8 A R R eal eae eral 8 A a a n 8 A WI quM eH 8 Touchscreen BUE sicarios irre oci oeX SER DIA EOE A 9 D SUE T PP A i A Ee AC 9 Input Panel Virtual Keyboard ui Ri iia 9 Touchscreen and IU rios 10 Senn the Radio and NetWork ion A AA 11 Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters scssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 11 Configuring the VX7 with LXEConnect ssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneees 12 UL ARCA A A A 12 DB SNR dl COM ear ai 14 Aetiyesynes Initial S uc 15 UNA CAMI m m em 15 Seral Connecti Oii sersa pots pia xb cupa gieiun Has bu E a s qud cmd d essa M UE DR UE ttp 15 Comi 15 is M n
237. ive Config drop down list except ThirdPartyConfig Warmboot the VX7 Radio control is passed to the SCU VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio Main Tab 189 Summit Client Utility Status Diags Global Active Profile Default y SUMMIT Status Associated DATA COMMUNICATIONS Radio Type BG Auto Profle Don off List Admin Login Reg Domain FCC Driver v2 01 22 Disable Radio SCU v2 D1 12 About SCU Figure 5 2 SCU Main Tab The Main tab displays information about the radio including Active Profile Select from the profiles created using the Config tab Status of the radio Down Associated Authenticated etc Radio Type BG is 802 11b g radio ABG is 802 11a b g radio Auto Profile option Regulatory Domain Driver version SCU Summit Client Utility version Copyright Info may be accessed by clicking the About SCU button The Disable Radio button can be used to disable the radio card Once disabled the button label changes to Enable Radio By default the radio is enabled The Admin Login button provides access to editing radio parameters as well as adding renaming and deleting profiles Profile and Global parameters may only be edited after entering the Admin Login password The Active Config may be changed without logging in Once logged 1n the button label changes to Admin Logout The admin is also automatically logged out when the SCU is exited E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7
238. ivity Keyboard Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Mixer Adjust the volume record gain and sidetone for microphone input Mouse Set the double click sensitivity for stylus taps on the touchscreen Network and Dial Set network driver properties and network access properties Up Options Owner Set VX7 owner details Password Set VX7 access password properties PC Connection Control the connection between the VX7 and a local desktop or laptop computer PCMCIA Manage PCMCIA cards Power Displays the status of all power managed devices Regional Settings Set appearance of numbers currency time and date based on regional and language settings Remove Programs Remove user installed programs in their entirety E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 314 About Control Panel Options Option Function Scanner Set scanner keyboard wedge scanner icon appearance active scanner port and scan key settings Assign baud rate parity stop bits and data bits for available COM ports See Chapter 4 Scanner Storage Manager Manage storage devices create partitions Stylus Set double tap sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel System Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Volume and Sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events Wi Fi Set the parameters for a Summit radio See Chapter 5
239. key sequence is pressed on the keypad the next application in the AppLock configuration is moved to the foreground and the previous application moves to the background The previous application continues to run in the background End user key presses affect the application in focus only See Also Application Panel Global Key E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 276 Application Configuration Application Configuration The default Administrator Hotkey sequence is Shift Ctrl A Administrator mode allows access to all features on the device When the hotkey is pressed to switch into Administrator mode a password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured A password must be entered within 30 seconds and within three tries or the password prompt is removed and the device remains in end user mode with the focus returned to the locked application Without entry of a valid password the switch into Administrator mode will not occur Access Settings Control Panel Administration icon The password prompt is displayed if a password has been configured When the valid password is entered the Administration Control panel is displayed When a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the user is returned to the System Control Panel If a password has not been configured the Administrator Control panel is displayed Important Before setting up multiple instances of the same application make sure the targeted software
240. l Name Blank Proxy Server Disabled Bypass Proxy Disabled Security Allow cookies Enabled Allow TLS 1 0 security Disabled Allow SSL 2 0 security Enabled Allow SSL 3 0 security Enabled Warn when switching Enabled Privacy First party cookies Accept Third party cookies Prompt Session cookies Always allow Advanced Stylesheets Enable Theming Support Enable Multimedia All options enabled Security All options enabled Popups Block popups Disabled Display notification Enabled Use same window Disabled Select a tab Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 109 Keyboard Access Start Settings Control Panel Keyboard Icon Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Factory Default Settings Repeat Enable Delay Short Rate Slow Key Map Default There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately When new key maps are added to the registry they will appear in the Key Map dropdown list on the Keyboard Panel These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 110 Control Panel Options KeyPad Access Start Settings Control Panel KeyPad Icon Use this option to assign key functions to mappable
241. l Power Ground 6 DSR Data Set Ready Input 7 RTS Request to Send Output 8 CTS Clear to Send Input 9 5VDC Barcode Scanner Power 400mA max Default or or RI Ring Indicator Input Shell CGND Chassis Ground E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 36 External Connectors Printer PC Serial Connector COMI3 The serial connector labeled COM2 3 is an industry standard RS 232 9 pin D connector The connector and its pin assignments are shown below By default Pin 9 provides RI Pin 9 may also be configured to supply 5 VDC at 0 4A max for an external bar code scanner Refer to Chapter 4 Scanner section titled Serial Port Pin 9 for more information on configuring Pin 9 Please see Technical Specifications Connection Cable below for information on using a serial cable Figure 2 4 Printer PC Serial Connector COM3 Note Power the VX7 off before attaching a cable or device to the COM3 serial port Pinout Pin Signal E DCD RXD TXD DTR GND DSR RTS CTS RI or 5VDC NO ON OQ tA FP W N Description Data Carrier Detect Input Receive Data Input Transmit Data Output Data Terminal Ready Output Signal Power Ground Data Set Ready Input Request to Send Output Clear to Send Input Ring Indicator Input default or Bar Code Scanner Power 400mA max Chassis Ground Shell CGND VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC
242. l computer memory and the identification of the registered user is listed and cannot be changed by the user Memory sizes given do not include memory used up by the operating system Hence a system with 64 MB may only report 35 MB memory since 29 MB is used up by the Windows CE Operating system This is actual DRAM memory and does not include internal flash or the internal ATA card used for storage VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 127 Memory System Properties General Memory Copyrights Move slider to the left for more memory to run programs Move slider to the right for more storage room Only unused RAM can be adjusted Storage LEDITOCECKEUCOLEOHCOCUBIGOETUCPBECPCDETOCEHCCHGUCORELOCEDCEREDCERGEBODELUCEDCERUSU Program Memory Eoo M Memory Allocated 11892KB Allocated 24152KB In Use 1280KB In Use 8020KB Figure 3 36 System Memory Move the slider to allocate more memory for programs or storage If there isn t enough space for a file increase the amount of storage memory If the VX7 is running slowly try increasing the amount of program memory Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Device Name System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights These settings are used to identify your Windows CE device to other computers Please type a name without any spaces and a short description Device name
243. lOMS irren t iii diese ii 94 About Properties Network IP rusia lille alias 94 Accessibility Properties Keyboard iia AUS 95 Accessibility Properties Sound cuen cia 95 Control Panele BMEtoot hiscere onnee ae HH PH EDO ER eE N Ea EE 98 Discover Bluetooth DEVICE ui iia as 98 Bluetooth Devices Panele aeo uten Eat dde A iS 99 Bluetooth Device Disconnect Delle signups eter repertae eds 100 Bluetovih Device Properties Menus occi aret ter rry o E PEE HEU 100 Bluetooh Device Set nps Panel italian 101 Bluetooth About Panel csi costando D Ed DER 102 pater Tire Properties uc betur eer Oeo Doce putei rie hae e tar e e eine naan 104 pl e ace vaste cee E E E eee aes eels ete 105 Display Properties Baekliht Fab ivan isos 106 Input Panel Properties cues ua e delta 107 KeyPad Properties ReyMap T b i cii d eiit Lvl PW HERES 110 KeyMap Properties LaunchApp Tab eth ierit teet a ieri di i d bs 111 MX3X VXC Options Properties Communication Tab sse 115 MX3X VXC Options Properties Mise Tab aiii din iaa 116 MX3X VXC Options Properties Status Popup Tab 4 eene eterni 117 Network Connection PODES radianes 118 Owner Prope reS saco o eR REPRE ERECTA coe im t a eet etu cest pe dps M ers 119 Password Properties iaa to n T TO Eu a OR b HERO E CU t ts 120 Communication PC Connection Tab vocis ad 121 PCMCIA Control Tab Slot O and Slot 1 usa ren id 122 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab Slot aiii 122 Power ropero db atcur d
244. larity is required for safe and proper installation Connecting the cable to the VX7 with the polarity reversed will cause the VX7 s fuse to be blown See the following table for wire color coding specifics Wiring color codes for LXE supplied DC input power cabling Vehicle Supply Wire Color 12 80VDC DC White Return DC Black Vehicle Chassis GND Green Figure 2 50 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Power Supply 77 VX7 Input Power Specifications Feature Specification DC Input Voltage 12 80 VDC Input Current 3 5 Amps Input Fuse 10A Time Delay Input Power Switch SPST 6 Amp 125VDC Power Adapter Cable LXE offers an adapter cable part no 9000077CABLER to adapt certain VX1 VX2 or VX4 DC power supplies to the VX7 Please read and follow all cautions in the VX7 User s Guide to determine if your present power supply can be used with the VX7 1 VX7 Connector 2 VX1 2 4 Power Supply Connector Figure 2 51 Power Adapter Cable VX1 2 4 to VX7 Caution For use only with VX1 2 4 DC power cables with yellow colored cable containing 18AWG wires Do not use this cable with VX1 2 4 DC power cables with gray colored cable containing 22AWG wires These power cables must be replaced with a VX5 6 7 power cable Caution When a DC power cable that is eight feet or longer is in a 12V application there may be an excessive voltage drop over the long
245. list below and prompts for a name The name must be unique If not an error message is displayed and the profile is not created e Scan Scans for and displays a list of available APs Can be used to create a profile from the APs listed e Commit Ensures that the profile settings made on this screen are saved in the profile When not logged in the parameters can be viewed but cannot be changed VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 193 Using the Scan Feature Clicking the Scan button opens a pop up window displaying any APs found during the scan Figure 5 6 Scan The scan displays information on the available APs e SSID Lists the SSID of the network e RSSI Displays the Received Signal Strength Indication RSSI of the AP e Secure Displays True if the data encryption is used by the AP false is data encryption is not used Notes The APs can be sorted by clicking on any of the column headings If there is more than one AP with the same SSID the listing displays the AP with the strongest signal and least security If you are logged in as an administrator you can use the Connect button to create a new profile The button is grayed out is an administrator is not logged in e Highlight the desired network in the listing and click the Connect button e The new profile is named based on the SSID of the selected AP If a profile already exists with that name the new profile name contains an incremen
246. lists configured ActiveSync connections In addition there is a checkbox for Automatic Connect This option applies to USB connection only If this checkbox is checked when the USB cable is connected the VX7 will automatically try to start ActiveSync over the USB port Note that this interferes with processes on the configured port at the same time PC Connection Properties E OK 3 PC Connection ac These settings control the connection between your Windows CE device and desktop computer Warning Adjusting these Eu settings may result in an inability to connect with your desktop computer Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached Connect using USB Client Figure C 16 Communication PC Connection Tab Please refer to the Backup VX7 Files section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 329 PCMCIA Access Start Settings Control Panel PCMCIA Enable or disable the PCMCIA slots Information on the card currently in the PCMCIA slots and the Compact Flash slot is provided Factory Default Settings Disable slot now Unchecked The Slot 0 and Slot 1 Tabs contain the same parameters If a card is present in the slot a description of the card is displayed To disable a slot check the Disable slot now checkbox and tap OK The change takes effect immediately Slot 0 is the lower slot lab
247. loaded on the VX6 e Automatic backlight control By default the keyboard backlight and the display share the same timer which is configured in the Windows CE Control Panel When the display is On the keyboard backlight is also On Please refer to Control Panel Options in the VX7 Reference Guide for more information If your VX6 does not have automatic backlight control contact your LXE representative so see if a system software update is available to add this feature Even when the backlight is automatically controlled the backlight can be toggled with the manual control described below e Manual backlight control The LXE keyboard keys are backlit with LEDs The backlight is manually controlled using the lt 2 gt lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt keypress sequence E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 58 The Keyboards Keyboard LEDs The VX7 keyboard has three 2 LED indicators 1 CapsLock Mode LED Indicator eeeooaeenn aee SHSGS2GG00800688 ELLAS LE LLLA AE 2 Secondary Mode LED Indicator Figure 2 33 Keyboard LEDs CAPS LED This LED indicates the state of the keyboard CapsLock mode If CapsLock is enabled this LED 1s illuminated green When CapsLock is off the LED 1s dark Figure 2 34 The CapsLock Key Press lt 2 gt then lt F1 gt to toggle CapsLock On and Off The default value of CapsLock is Off For information on preserving CapsLock configuration after a reboot please see
248. low as appropriate Platform 1 VX7 s e Wait for the Loading system from ATA toolbar to appear When it does press and release the Power button When the Press power switch again for confirmation message appears the Power button must be pressed and released in the next three seconds to confirm the reload If the Power button is not pressed during the three second period the operating system resumes loading VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Reflash the VX7 10 141 Platform 2 VX7 s e Wait for the Loading system from ATA toolbar to appear When it does press and release the A key When the confirmation message appears Y key must be pressed and released in the next three seconds to confirm the reload If the Y key is not pressed during the three second period the operating system resumes loading The VX7 automatically reboots after flashing the bootloader Loading OS Image is displayed on the screen and when the new OS finishes loading all software upgrades are complete Secure the user access cover using the captive screws How To Reflash using TAG file Method revision please click on the About icon in the Windows CE Control Panel S This method requires software revision 2BT or greater To identify the software 1 Do d eS 10 11 Place the PCMCIA adapter containing the CF card with new image files on it in the PCMCIA slot next to the radio
249. m View Note COMI is configured with Pin 9 5V COMS3 is labeled COM2 3 and is configured with Pin 9 RI Please see Chapter 4 Scanner for details on configuring Pin 9 of the serial ports 1 Antenna Connectors 2 Bracket Mounting Area 3 Strain Relief Bracket and Screws Figure 1 4 VX7 Components Back View VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Components 7 1 Power LED 2 Power Switch 3 Brightness Increase 4 Brightness Decrease Figure 1 5 VX7 Control Panel 1 SD Memory Card Slot 2 Compact Flash Hard Drive 3 PCMCIA Slots Figure 1 6 VX7 Access Panel Note The tethered access panel cover is not shown in the illustration above E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 8 Data Entry Data Entry You can enter data into the VX7 through several different methods A tethered scanner connected to the COMI serial port provides barcode data entry the serial ports are used to input output data keyboards provide manual entry and the touchscreen also provides manual entry simulating a desktop PC s mouse Keyboard Data Entry A Refer to Appendix A Key Maps for 101 key keyboard equivalent keypresses The keyboard is used to manually input data that is not collected otherwise Almost any function that a full sized computer keyboard can provide is duplicated on the LKE VMT keyboard but it may take a few more keystrokes to accomplish a keyed task When using the LXE 60 key keyboard alm
250. manufacturer e g Summit Cisco Symbol for the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable Software Load The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE 5 0 OS hardware specific OEM Adaptation Layer device drivers Internet Explorer 6 0 for Windows CE browser and utilities The software supported is summarized below Operating System e Full Operating System License Includes all operating system components including Windows CE 5 0 kernel file system communications connectivity for remote APIs device drivers events and messaging graphics keyboard and touchscreen input window management and common controls Network and Device Drivers Bluetooth Optional Wavelink Avalanche Optional LXE AppLock Java Optional e Java executables and browser components are handled by the Java option when installed Terminal Emulation Optional e RFTerm VT220 TN5250 TN3270 Runs automatically at the conclusion of each reboot if installed LXE API Routines see Accessories for the LXE SDK Kit part number Note Please contact your LXE representative for software updates and CAB files as they are released by LXE Software Applications The following applications are included e WordPad was PocketWord in previous versions of Windows CE e Word Viewer e Excel Viewer e PDF Viewer VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Installed Software 81 e Image Viewer e Scanner Wedge
251. me Blank Infrastructure Mode Yes Power Save Mode Fast PSP Network Security Type None WEP No WEP Authentication Types Open LEAP Disabled Mixed Mode Disabled World Mode Disabled Data Rates Auto Transmit Power MAX Offline Channel Scan Enabled Select an active profile to manage ProfileO Properties Property Client Name Infrastructure Mode Power Save Mode Network Security Type WEP Authentication Type User Name User Password No Security Create a new profile or edit an exiting profile e Network security must be set to None e WEP must be set to No WEP VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 227 WEP To use WEP create a new profile or select an exiting profile e WEP must be set to either Static WEP keys or Dynamic WEP keys When one of the WEP methods is selected the WEP Keys button is active e Authentication must be set to Open e The appropriate WEP keys must be entered o 40 bit WEP keys consist of 10 hexadecimal characters of 5 ASCII characters o 128 bit WEP keys consist of 26 hexadecimal or 13 ASCII characters o After a WEP key is entered it will be hidden from view if you return to the screen However the Already Set indicates if a key has previously been entered Tap the WEP Keys button to enter WEP information If a key is already entered the Already set Checkbox is checked The previously entered key value is not displayed for security Profile WEP Keys 3 OK nd Key Size Set Key 40 12
252. me is the name of the CAB file with the path usually System Installed is a DWORD value of 0 which changes to once auto launch installs the file FileCheck is the name of a file to look for to determine if the CAB file is installed The value in FileCheck is the name of one of the files with path installed by the CAB file Since the CAB file installs into DRAM when memory is lost this file is lost and the CAB file must be reinstalled Three optional fields are also added Order Delay and PCMCIA These are all DWORD fields described below The auto launch process goes as follows The launch utility opens the registry database and reads the list of CAB files to auto launch First it looks for FileName to see if the CAB file is present If not the registry entry is ignored If it is present and the Installed flag is not set auto launch makes a copy of the CAB file since it gets deleted by installation and runs the Microsoft utility WCELOAD to install it If the Installed flag is set auto launch looks for the FileCheck file If it is present the CAB file is installed and that registry entry is complete If the FileCheck file is not present memory has been lost and the utility calls WCELOAD to reinstall the CAB file Then the whole process repeats for the next entry in the registry until all registry entries are analyzed To force execution every time for example for AUTOEXEC BAT use a FileCheck of dummy which will never
253. meter to prevent automatic monitoring upon startup 5 Select Stop Monitoring for an immediate shutdown of all enabler update functionality upon exiting the user interface 6 Click the OK button to save the changes 7 Reboot the device if necessary Update Monitoring Overview There are three methods by which the Enabler on an LXE device can communicate with the Mobile Device Server running on the host machine e Wired via a serial cable between the Mobile Device Server and the LXE device e Wired via a USB connection using ActiveSync between the Mobile Device Server and the mobile device e Wirelessly via the radio and an access point After installing the Enabler on the mobile unit a reboot is required for the Enabler to begin normal functionality Following a mobile device reboot the Enabler searches for an Mobile Device Server first by polling all available serial ports and then over the wireless network The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche Mobility Center Manager is LXE_VXC The Enabler running on LXE Windows CE devices will attempt to access COMI COM2 and COM3 Agent not found will be reported if the Mobile Device Server is not located or a serial port is not present or available COM port settings can be verified using the LXE scanner applet in the Control Panel The wireless connection is made using the default radio interface on the mobile device therefore the device must be actively communic
254. mit button Ensure the correct Active Profile is selected on the Main tab and warmboot The SCU Main tab shows the device is associated after the radio connects to the network VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 225 Cisco Radio The Cisco radio is a 2 4GHz 802 11b radio This radio supports no encryption WEP LEAP or WPA PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC EAP TLS WPA LEAP and WPA PSK Configuring without WPA Cisco Aironet Client Utility ACU Note When making changes to profile parameters the VX7 should be warmbooted afterwards Access Start Programs Cisco ACU or ACU Icon on Desktop Aironet Client Utility Statistics Survey Manage Profiles Select Active Profile Profiled Profiled 350 Series Radio is Associated Figure 5 33 Cisco Aironet Client Utility Note To configure WPA please see Configuring for WPA later in this section E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 226 Cisco Radio Use this option to manage profiles and review firmware information status statistics and wireless Jaro PAC Import Figure 5 34 Cisco Profile Properties Screen e fno security is used the only entry necessary on the Profile Properties screen may be the SSID If the SSID is left blank the radio can associate to any available network Profiles Tab radio survey data Profile Parameter Default SSID Blank Client Na
255. mouse pointer may not be visible However moving or clicking the mouse causes the pointer to appear e When the USB mouse is unplugged the pointer may remain visible until the touchscreen is tapped e Ifthe touchscreen is used for input the mouse pointer may disappear However moving or clicking the mouse or pointing device on the 95 key keyboard causes the pointer to reappear Platform 2 VX7 s The mouse pointer is not visible unless a mouse P S2 or USB mouse or 95 key keyboard with pointing device is attached If a mouse of any kind is attached the mouse pointer is displayed on screen VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Setup the Radio and Network 11 Setup the Radio and Network Prerequisites e Network SSID or ESSID number of the Access Point e WEP or LEAP Authentication Protocol Keys 4 See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for complete information Setup Terminal Emulation Parameters Before you make a host connection you will at a minimum need to know e the alias name or IP address Host Address and e the port number Telnet Port of the host system to properly set up your host session 1 Make sure the mobile client network settings are configured and functional If you are connecting over wireless LAN make sure your mobile client is communicating with the Access Point 2 From the Start Programs run LXE RFTerm or tap the RFTerm icon on the desktop 3 Select Session Configure
256. moved when switching into user mode LOG_ERROR This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues Unable to move taskbar The taskbar is moved when switching into user mode LOG_ERROR This prevents them from being visible if the application is exited and restarted by the timer This error does not affect the screen mode switch processing continues Unhook taskbar wndproc failure AppLock could not remove its control of the taskbar LOG_ERROR This error does not affect AppLock processing Unhook wndproc failure AppLock could not remove the hook that allows LOG_ERROR monitoring of the application Unhooking taskbar In administration mode the taskbar should return to LOG_EX normal operation so AppLock s control of the taskbar should be removed Unhooking wndproc When the administrator leaves user mode the device is LOG_EX fully operational therefore AppLock must stop monitoring the locked application WM SIZE adjusted This message denotes that AppLock has readjusted the LOG EX window size X after Ctrl L Processing the backdoor entry LOG EX Ret from password lt gt Return value from password dialog LOG EX Decrypt data len lt gt Length of decrypted password LOG EX Window handle to The window handle that is passed to the enumeration LOG EX enumwindows x function This message can be used by engineering with other development
257. n titled Installation VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Power Supply 75 Specifications 3 40 x 5 87 x 2 00 Power ON Indicator Input Surge Current included with US units only Output Voltage 8 measured at the end of the output Tolerance power cable Output Current 0 Amps min 1 87 Amps max Safety and Emissions FCC Part 15 Radio Frequency Devices Compliance Class B EN 55022 UL1950 and IEC 950 Environmental Specifications The AC to DC adapter will withstand the following environmental characteristics Operating Temperature see VX7 Environmental Specifications Storage Temperature see VX7 Environmental Specifications Humidity Operates in a relative humidity of 5 95 non condensing ESD Immunity Per IEC 801 1 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 76 Power Supply Vehicle 12 80VDC Direct Connection Note Instructions for using this configuration are contained in VX7 User s Guide section titled Installation 1 To Vehicle Battery 2 To Vehicle Mounted Device or UPS Battery Pack 3 White DC 4 Black DC 5 6 Green GND 12 80VDC Figure 2 48 Direct Vehicle Power Connection Cable 12 Ft 1 Vehicle Electrical System 2 10Amp Slow Blow Fuse DC DC Vehicle Chassis Red White Red Black 8 Green Figure 2 49 Connecting the Power Cable to the Vehicle DW 9 QU q 9 Note Correct electrical po
258. n box the default text Ignore drop is shown and highlighted in the Replacement edit control Ignore drop is highlighted so the user can type a replacement if the control character is not being ignored Once the user types any character into the Replacement edit control reselecting the character from the Character drop down box redisplays the default Ignore drop in the Replacement edit control E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 176 Barcode Manipulation Replacement The edit control where the user types the characters to be assigned as the replacement of the control character Replacements for a control character are assigned by selecting the appropriate character from the Character drop down box typing the replacement in the Replacement edit control according to the formats defined above and then selecting Assign The assigned replacement is then added to the list box above the Assign button For example if Carriage Return is replaced by Line Feed by specifying PJ or 0x0A in the configuration the value Ox0d received in any scanned barcode or defined in the prefix or suffix will be replaced with the value 0x0a The Wedge then sends Ctrl J to the receiving application rather than Ctrl M List Box The list box shows all user defined control characters and their assigned replacements All replacements are enclosed in single quotes to delimit white space that has been assigned D
259. n laos 193 Patattieters iio E E E 194 wii CAE eM TUNER 197 nic Wr rr rer PH 198 Goga I Devenir MM AM 199 lE ease T 199 Pig Cr vs Stored Credentials a a P UE A si 205 Windows Certificate Store vs Certs Path i 207 rg eG E EA E E E A A NE EE E A E ATT 207 Root CA react ens n ee ees a id 207 Summit Wireless A En 209 No Secuii uni 210 A E Sen E eda heptane 211 LEAP without WPA Authentication ii A Did dd 212 PEAP MSCHA Pus ue iio 214 A A d M aM D DER Tce nese Oe ree 216 pog A o ee 218 A A EA EMEN MTS 220 EAP A O ach ener Eee rer aoe ere MM ME MEME 222 pog o f c 224 Le ero ii eio RENI Rm 225 Cisco Aironet C Bent Lobby CO csi direis 225 Prones Taba ria ns AE Ni 226 DhpRrLdYuam T 226 MED ate scr EUR Id MEME 227 nig PLN UN I 227 Patgiware Taba daa 228 US ES 228 Statistics Tabs bete NEN IE IE PME EI 228 nagd E 228 Conieurme Tor lu RR Rt eT means 229 SR E MEUM DEDE E DN ED SM NE 229 Insolitas 229 Checking for the Cisco PEAP Suppl cant acosado cia 230 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide x Table of Contents Wireless Network COI rail ici 232 PEAP MS LHAP Authentication Configuration i 235 Contisurine the PEAP MS CHAP Suppl e a 235 Server Anthentic OM title ies 231 PEAP GTC Authentication Conor sisi 238 Configuring the PEAP GTC SUDDpLCAlt ue er ea I etre R 238 Server Atiende 240 MENTES P
260. n or safe vehicle operation e Can be easily accessed by anyone seated in the driver s seat Troubleshooting Can t calibrate the AppLock is installed and running on the mobile device AppLock touch screen change restricts User access to running programs Changes or modifications the date time or require Administrator access adjust the volume M Refer to Chapter 6 AppLock for setup and processing information RFTerm opens and runs upon each cold Tap File Exit to close the RFTerm application reset and warm reset There may be small delays while the wireless client connects to the VX7 seems to lockup Vigo a ass onas tis network authorization for Voxware enabled applications complete annbaoted Wavelink Avalanche management of the VX7 startup completes and RUTAS Bluetooth relationships establish or re establish VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Components 5 Components 1 Access Panel Cover See Following Illustrations for Detail 2 Antenna Connectors or Hole Plugs Figure 1 1 VX7 Components Top View 1 Speakers 2 Control Panel See Following Illustrations for Detail Figure 1 2 VX7 Components Front View E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 6 Components 1 COM1 Scanner Connector 2 COM3 Connector 3 Keyboard Mouse Connector 4 Ethernet USB Cable Connector USB Host and USB Client 5 Fuse 6 Audio Connector 7 Power Cable Connector Figure 1 3 VX7 Components Botto
261. nability to connect with your desktop computer Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached Connect using USB Client Figure 3 29 Communication PC Connection Tab Please refer to the Backup VX7 Files section later in this chapter for parameter setting recommendations E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 122 Control Panel Options PCMCIA Access Start Settings Control Panel PCMCIA Enable or disable the PCMCIA slots Information on the card currently in the PCMCIA slots and the Compact Flash slot is provided Factory Default Settings Disable slot now Unchecked The Slot 0 and Slot 1 Tabs contain the same parameters If a card is present in the slot a description of the card is displayed To disable a slot check the Disable slot now checkbox and tap OK The change takes effect immediately Slot 0 is the lower slot labeled PCMCIA B Slot 1 is the upper slot labeled PCMCIA A PCMCIA Control sito soti se Card Cisco Systems 350 Series Wireless LAM Adapter 512A Disable slot now E Write protect slot Power slot during sleep 3 3 Figure 3 30 PCMCIA Control Tab Slot 0 and Slot 1 The Slot 2 Tab provides information on the internal Compact Flash ATA drive There are no user configurable options PCMCIA Control seo se soez Card Internal ATA 61 MB Figure 3 31 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab Slot 2 VX7 Refe
262. name certnew cer File type Security Certificate From 100 100 100 100 amp This type of file could harm your computer if it contains malicious code Would you like to open the file or save it to your computer Open Save Cancel More Info Tv stays ask before opening this wpe of hie Figure 5 95 Download Security Warning Click Save to download and store the user certificate to the PC Make sure to keep track of the name and location of the certificate The private key file is also downloaded and saved during this process Be sure use the same name for the certificate file as was used for the private key file For example it the private key was saved as VX7USER PVK then the certificate file created must be given the same name for example VX7USER CER E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 264 Certificates Installing a User Certificate Copy the certificate and private key files to the VX7 Import the certificate by navigating to Start Control Panel Certificates 5 R ww Certificates Select My Certificates from the pull down list Certificates Figure 5 96 Certificates Click the Import button Import Certificate or Key Figure 5 97 Import Certificate Make sure From a File is selected and click OK VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 265 Select a Certificate File EE z QJ My Documents Shortcut to Office Templates Ink laa vx7user ce
263. nc 135 Technical Specifications Connection Cable The exact serial cable is crucial Many commercial null modem cables will not work LXE recommends the following cable Serial cable 9000A054CBL6D9D9 Pinout DB9 female DB9 female 1 7 2 3 3 2 4 6 8 5 5 6 8 4 7 9 no connection Figure 3 39 Pinout Serial Cable for Synchronization Some laptop devices do not properly implement all control lines on the serial port the laptop connection will not work E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 136 VX7 Utilities VX7 Utilities The following files are pre loaded by LXE LAUNCH EXE VX7 Reference All applications to be installed into persistent memory are normally in the form of Windows CE CAB files These CAB files exist as separate files from the main installation image and need to be copied to the mobile device using an internal ATA card or from a PC using ActiveSync The CAB files are loaded into the folder System which is the internal ATA drive Then information is added to the registry if desired to make the CAB file auto launch at startup The CAB file can update the registry as desired and cause the unpacked file s to be placed in the appropriate location The registry information needed is under the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist as follows The main subkey is any text and is a description of the file Then 3 values are added FileNa
264. nd ID Code fields and tap the Insert button The data is added to the selected line in the Custom IDs list Edit Double tap on the item to edit Its values are copied to the text boxes for editing The Add button changes to Replace When Replace is tapped the values for the current item in the list are updated Clear All When no item in the Custom IDs list is selected tapping the Clear All button clears the Custom ID list and any text written and not yet added or inserted in the Name and ID Code text boxes Remove The Clear All button changes to a Remove button when an item in the Custom IDs list is selected Tap the desired line item and then tap the Remove button to delete it Line items are Removed one at a time Contents of the text box fields are cleared at the same time Notes e Prefix and Suffix data is always added on after stripping is complete and is not affected by any stripping settings e Ifthe stripping configuration results in a 0 length barcode a good beep will still be sounded since barcode data was read from the scanner VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation Match List Rules 173 The data in the list is processed by the rules listed below Strings in the list will be searched in the order they appear in the list If the list contains ABC and AB in that order incoming data with ABC will match first and the AB will have no effect When a match b
265. nd Symbology Settings AIM ID Before manipulating data received from an 8300 series scanner and symbology settings are desired the user must configure and append the Symbology ID as a prefix See the documentation provided with the scanner for details COMG port is labeled COM2 3 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation 165 Main Tab Access Start Settings Control Panel Scanner Main Scanner Control fa OK ES Main comi coma Barcode Port 2 disabled O Bluetooth O disabled O comi O coma comi O coma O comi serctl COM3 ScrCtl O coM1 serctl coms ScrCtl Output Enable C Output Enable C Power Port 1 while asleep Send Key Messages WEDGE Enable Internal Scanner Sound 3000 On Delay Ms Figure 4 1 Scanner Control Main Tab Adjust the settings and tap the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately When Power Port 1 while asleep is checked whichever serial port is enabled as Port 1 will remain powered while the device is in Suspend This allows a tethered scanner to wake the device by pressing the trigger on the scanner When Send Key Messages WEDGE is checked any data scan is converted to keystrokes and sent to the active window When this box is not checked the application will need to use the set of LXE Scanner APIs to retrieve the data from the scanner driver Note that this latter method is significantly faster than using
266. nd is disabled by default This parameter setting does not apply to Summit Clients only Current Adapter Lists all network adapters currently installed on the mobile device Primary Adapter Indicates if the Enabler is to attempt to configure the primary adapter active only if there are multiple network adapters Icon on taskbar Places the Avalanche icon in the Avalanche taskbar that may optionally override the standard Windows taskbar Use Avalanche Network Profile The Enabler will apply all network settings sent to it by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 156 Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Avalanche Icon Selecting the Avalanche Icon will access the Avalanche Network Profile tab which will display current network settings Avalanche Network Profile Properties OK B Profile Property ManageNet no ManageWire no Figure 3 49 Avalanche Network Profile Displayed Use Manual Settings When enabled the Enabler will ignore any network or wireless settings coming from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and use only the network settings on the mobile device Properties Icon Selecting the Properties icon displays the Manual Settings Properties dialog applet From here the user can configure Network DNS and Wireless parameters using the displays shown below Note A reboot may be required after enabling or disabli
267. nected to the VX7 at a time LXE supports one scanner and one printer see Accessories Taskbar Icon Legend Q Bluetooth is ready to connect or Bluetooth module is connected to one or more of the targeted Bluetooth device s VX7 is not connected to another Bluetooth device or VX7 is out of range of all targeted Bluetooth device s Connection is inactive Note Configuration elements are persistent and stored in the registry Setup the Bluetooth module to establish how the user is notified by easy pairing and auto reconnect events AppLock if installed does not stop the end user from using the Bluetooth application nor does it stop other Bluetooth enabled devices from pairing with the VX7 while AppLock is in control See Chapter 6 AppLock for more information E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 104 Control Panel Options Certificates Access Start Settings Control Panel Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Lists the Stored certificates trusted by the VX7 user These values may change based on the type of radio security resident in the client access point or the host system Date Time Access Start Settings Control Panel Date Time Icon Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Factory Default Settings Current Time Midnight Time Zone GMT 05 00 Daylight Savings Disabled Date Time Properties
268. nections A window is displayed showing the existing connections Assuming the one you want does not exist double click Make New Connection Give the new connection an appropriate name Click the Direct Connection radio button Click the Next button From the popup menu choose the port you want to connect to Only the available ports are shown Click the Configure button Under the Port Settings tab choose the appropriate baud rate Data bits parity and stop bits remain at 8 none and 1 respectively Under the Call Options tab be sure to turn off Wait for dial tone since a direct connection will not have a dial tone Set the timeout parameter default is 90 seconds Click OK TCP IP Settings should not need to change from defaults Click the Finish button to create the new connection Close the Remote Networking window To activate the new connection select Start Settings Control Panel PC Connection and click the Change button Select the new connection Click OK twice Close the Control Panel window Connect the desktop PC to the VX7 with the appropriate cable Click the desktop Connect icon to test the new connection You can activate the connection by double clicking on the specific connection icon in the Remote Networking window but this will only start an RAS Remote Access Services session and does not start ActiveSync properly VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSy
269. nfiguration E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 30 Hardware Configuration Power Supply Vehicle power input for the VX7 is 12V to 80V DC nominal and is accepted without the need to perform any manual operation within the VX7 If 12V to 60V DC power is not available for example in an office environment an optional external Universal Input Power Supply can be used to convert AC wall power to an appropriate DC level See External Power Supply later in this chapter Power input is fused for protection and the fuse is externally accessible Uninterruptible Power Supply A DC uninterruptible power supply UPS battery is available to maintain power to the VX7 for a minimum of 15 minutes when vehicle power is not available such as when a vehicle battery is being swapped Backup Battery The LXE VX7 has a permanent lithium battery installed to maintain time and date The backup battery is not user serviceable and should last five years with normal use before it requires replacement Note This battery should only be changed by authorized service personnel PCMCIA Slots CF Slot SD Slot Microsoft Windows CE Plug and Play operating system controls the PCMCIA cards These cards are hot swappable per the PCMCIA specifications The CF ATA slot is not hot swappable The VX7 must be powered down to insert or remove an ATA card Since the operating system is stored on the ATA card the VX7 cannot operate without th
270. ng these options VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 157 Manual Settings Properties Network DNS Wireless Manage network settings O Use server assigned IP address O Use the following IP address IP Subnet Gateway Network Manual Settings Properties Network DNS Wireless _ Y Manage network These addresses may be re assigned if DHCP is enabled DNS 1 DNS 2 DNS 3 Domain DNS Manual Settings Properties Network DNS vires Manage wireless settings SSID Encryption Open System None y Wireless Figure 3 50 Manual Settings Properties Panels E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 158 Status Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration For descriptions of these Enabler parameters refer to Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration LXE does not recommend enabling Manage Wireless Settings for Summit Client devices When you download a profile that is configured to manage network and wireless settings the Enabler will not apply the manage network and wireless settings to the adapter unless the global Manage wireless settings and Manage network settings options are enabled on the Adapters panel see Figure titled Adapters Options Network Until these options are enabled the network and wireless settings are controlled by the third party software associated with these settings The Sta
271. nk match is not used AppLock works by associating display windows with the launched process ID If an application uses different process IDs for windows it creates the Match field must be used Use the Match field to specify up to 32 characters of the class name for the application For example DOS applications using a standard DOS display box should specify condev_appcls in the Match textbox End User Internet Explorer EUIE AppLock supports applications that utilize Internet Explorer such as HTML pages and JAVA applications The end user can run an application by entering the application name and path in Internet Explorer s address bar To prevent the end user from executing an application using this method the address bar and Options settings dialog are restricted in Internet Explorer This is accomplished by creating an Internet Explorer that is used in end user mode End user Internet Explorer EUIE EXE The EUIE executes the Internet Explorer application in full screen mode which removes the address bar and status bar The Options Dialog is also removed so the end user cannot re enable the address bar The administrator specifies the EUIE by checking the Internet checkbox in the Application tab of the Administrator applet The internet application should then be entered in the Application text box When the Internet checkbox is enabled the Menu and Status check boxes are available Enabling the Menu checkbox displays th
272. nnect antenna cable to Port A left port as shown below e Dual antennas Connect antenna cables to both ports Port A Port B Figure 2 44 Symbol 11Mb Antenna Cable Connections 4 Now complete the insertion of the Type II PCMCIA Radio into the slot Note When this process is complete reattach the access cover screws using a torque wrench capable of measuring to 9 1 inch pounds 1 016411 N m The screws must be fastened to 9 inch pounds each The screws require a Phillips size 1 driver head 5 Re connect the power cord cable and turn the VX7 on 6 For VX7 s with a Summit radio review RX Diversity and TX Diversity on the Global Settings tab of the Summit Client Utility to ensure these settings correspond to the VX7 s antenna configuration E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 72 PCMCIA CF and SD Slots CF Card Slot This slot contains the Compact Flash CF hard drive The operating system and settings are stored on the CF card The VX7 cannot operate without this card Cards in this slot CANNOT be hot swapped Replace a CF Card 1 Turn the VX7 off and detach the power cable 2 Loosen the three 3 Phillips head screws securing the access panel cover so the cover can be removed The screws are a captive part of the cover and cannot be removed 3 Remove the card currently installed present in the CF slot and replace it with the new CF card The replacement CF card must contain the operating system in ord
273. nonnnnnos 20 nuu N 19 Initial S6 a pa 16 LXEZ Pairing specification esses 31 OPON Em 17 Subsequent Use 18 Bluetooth control panel sss 97 Bluetooth Properties panel ssss 100 Bluetooth Settings Chart suus 101 C CAB Files on the Flash Card 129 Calibracion estas 125 333 CAPS LOCK Mode LED Indicator 58 CapsLock nich nri td 54 Caps Lock Mode eee 58 Central Processing Unit esses 29 VX7 Reference Guide 362 Certificates netto ns 104 319 Root CA mido tad 255 Us eoe tame mite e teneis 259 Character Recognition Touchscreen c ooocccconoccnononcnononancnnonnnnononnnanonnn 89 311 Cisco PEAP Suplicant eese 230 WPA Radio Driver 229 Cisco Client asossase iicet eire erba 228 Cisco Radio WEB ettet deta 227 Cleaning Display iicet tentem eres 65 Clear Contents of Document Folder 90 312 Clear persistant memory eene 142 CMOS Battery E 30 CMOS NiCd Battery essere 78 Code ID transmission setting ssessessss 168 Coldboot O aieeaa nia iis 23 COLDBOOT EXE ssessesseeereneeenenennnns 138 Color Cable Wins 76 Color screen Backlight ieies 106 321 COM port screen blanking sse 182 CO
274. ns Please refer to the Certificates section at the end of this chapter for more information on generating and installing certificates Please refer to the table below for the security options supported for each radio type Security Options Er z RA ENS PUDOR SS Som Cien EIU Yes Yes Yes Yes WEP Yes Yes Yes Yes LEAP Yes Yes Yes Yes WPA PSK Yes Yes Yes No WPA LEAP Yes Yes Yes No PEAP MSCHAP Yes Yes Yes No PEAP GTC Yes Yes Yes No EAP TLS Yes Yes No No EAP FAST Yes Yes No No Radio Availability The Summit 802 1 1a b g radio is available only with Windows CE 5 0 The Summit 802 1 1b g radio is available with Windows CE NET or CE 5 0 The Cisco radio is available only with Windows CE NET The Symbol radio is available only with Windows CE NET Note The Cisco and Summit radios are obsolete Information on these radios is provided as a courtesy to LXE s customer E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 186 Summit Radio Summit Radio S The Summit radio requires software revision 2BT or greater All VX7 s with a Summit radio ship with this software revision or greater To identify the software revision please click on the About icon in the Windows CE Control Panel Please refer to the LXE Security Primer to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for VX7 communication AD Date Time It is important that all dates are correct on C
275. ns i foki x Communication Misc Status Popup CapsLock Y NumLock 7 Touch Screen Disable Touch Screen Heater Disable L Screen size 640x480 Large SIP Figure 3 24 MX3X VXC Options Properties Misc Tab By default CapsLock is disabled after a warmboot To enable CapsLock after a warmboot check this checkbox By default NumLock is enabled after a warmboot To disable NumLock after a warmboot uncheck this checkbox VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 117 Touch Screen Disable By default the VX7 touchscreen is enabled To disable the touchscreen after a warmboot check this checkbox Touch Screen Heater Disable By default the VX7 touchscreen heater is enabled To disable the touchscreen after a warmboot check this checkbox Screen Size 640x480 By default the display resolution is 800 x 600 pixels Check this checkbox to enable 640 x 480 pixel resolution Status Popup MX3X VXC Options Communication Misc Status Popup 5 Second Timeout RFTerm SecID s Admin User Y Admin V User AIC Power CapsLock Y Admin v User Y Admin V User ActiveSync Network Status Y Admin V User M Admin V User WLAN Radio Bluetooth Status V Admin V User Y Admin V User Figure 3 25 MX3X VXC Options Properties Status Popup Tab When the Status popup window is displayed it is placed on top of the window in focu
276. nter the name of the application to launch Click the opt radio button to enter any options for the application launch Keypad Control ka OK 3 Kewap LaunchApo Appi App3 App2 App4 D HE o App Opt e exe O opt Figure 3 20 KeyMap Properties LaunchApp Tab For more information please see How To Remap an Application Launch later in this section Note E EQ VX7RG L ARC The executable file and options are not checked for accuracy If the launch fails the device emits a single beep VX7 Reference Guide 112 Control Panel Options RunCmd The default for all text boxes is Null The text boxes accept string values only Click the file radio button to enter the name of the command to launch Click the parm radio button to specify parameters for the command Keypad Control Keiao Launchapp Runtmd Cmdi Cmd3 Cmd2 Cmd4 po BS File Parm file parm Figure 3 21 KeyMap Properties RunCmd Tab For more information please see How To Remap an Application Launch later in this section How To Remap a Single Key 1 gt ped On the KeyMap tab select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select the value from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control How To Remap a Key Sequence 1 E op rq On the KeyMa
277. nto the Windows certificate store Access the Credentials screen again Make sure the Validate server and Use MS store checkboxes are checked The default is to use the entire certificate store for the CA certificate Alternatively use the Browse button next to the CA Cert CA Certificate Filename on the Credentials screen to select an individual certificate For EAP TLS also enter the User Cert User Certificate filename on the credentials screen by using the Browse button Click the OK button then the Commit button When the device attempts to connect to the network a sign on screen is displayed Enter the Username and Password Click the OK button SDC Credentials User Password Figure 5 10 Sign On Screen 10 Verify the device is authenticated by reviewing the Status tab When the device is property configured the Status tab indicates the device is Authenticated and the method used 11 The sign on screen is displayed after a reboot for each of the listed protocols Note Complete details are provided in the appropriate Summit Wireless Security section following in this chapter If a user enters invalid credentials and clicks OK the device associates but does not authenticate The user is again prompted to enter credentials If the user clicks the Cancel button the device does not associate The user is not prompted again for credentials until the device is rebooted the radio is disabled then
278. o not work in the Microsoft Zero Config utility at this time There is no server authentication when using WPA PSK Click the OK button to complete configuration VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Symbol Radio 251 Symbol Radio The Symbol radio is a 2 4GHz 802 11b radio This radio supports no encryption and WEP Note When making changes to profile parameters the VX7 should be warmbooted afterwards Access Double Tap the Network Connected Icon in the Status Bar NETWLAN1 IP Information IPv6 Information Wireless Information Internet Protocol TCP IP Address Type DHCP IP Address 100 100 100 100 Subnet Mask 255 255 0 0 Default Gateway Figure 5 75 Symbol NETWLAN Screen IP Information Tab After the IP Address has been assigned to the VX7 tap the Renew button to renew the IP address if necessary Tap the Details button to view the Network Connection details IPv6 Information Tab This is the TCP IPv6 information screen The contents cannot be edited by the user Note IPv6 can be disabled Please see Configuring IPv6 Broadcast Messages earlier in this chapter E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 252 Wireless Information Tab View Log Symbol Radio Factory Default Settings Wireless Information tab Notify when new networks available Enabled Advanced Button Use Windows to configure wireless settings Enabled Automatically conne
279. oaded by Launch A cold boot is initiated by running the Coldboot application in the Windows directory This application automatically cold boots the VX7 erasing any customer applied registry changes and returning the VX7 to its factory settings E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 302 Installed Software Installed Software When you order a VX7 you receive the software files required by the separate programs needed for operation and radio communication The files are loaded by LXE and stored in subdirectories in the VX7 This section lists the contents of the subdirectories and the general function of the files Files installed in each VX7 are specific to the intended function of the VX7 Files installed in each VX7 configured for an RF environment contain PCMCIA card radio specific drivers the drivers for each type of radio are specific to the manufacturer e g Summit Cisco Symbol for the radios installed in the RF environment and are not interchangeable Software Load The software loaded on the mobile computer consists of Windows CE NET 4 2 OS hardware specific OEM Adaptation Layer device drivers Internet Explorer 6 0 for Windows CE browser and utilities The software supported is summarized below Operating System e Full Operating System License Includes all operating system components including Windows CE NET 4 2 kernel file system communications connectivity for remote APIs device drivers events and messa
280. oard hook AppLock is calling the keyboard hook initialization LOG PROCESSING procedure Keyboard hook initialization failure The keyboard filter initialization failed LOG ERROR Keyboard hook loaded OK The keyboard hook dll exists and loaded successfully LOG EX L after Ctrl Processing the backdoor entry LOG EX Loading keyboard hook When AppLock first loads it loads a dll that contains LOG PROCESSING the keyboard hook processing This message is logged prior to the load attempt Open failure The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG ERROR file open has failed This could occur if the file is write protected If the file does not exist it is created Open registry failure If the Administration registry key does not exist the LOG ERROR switch to user mode fails because the AppName value in the Administration key is not available Opened status file The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG EX file has been opened successfully Out of memory for encrypted pwd Not enough memory to encrypt the password LOG ERROR pRealTaskbarWndProc already set The taskbar control has already been installed LOG_EX Pwd cancelled or invalid remain in The password prompt was cancelled by the user or the LOG_EX user mode maximum number of failed attempts to enter a password was exceeded Read registry error hot key The hotkey registry entry is missing or empty This is LOG_
281. ocess PrtScrn EXE Command line utility which performs a screen print and saves the file in BMP format in the System folder Tap Start Run and type prtscrn and tap OK or press Enter There is a 10 second delay before the screen print is made The device beeps and screen captured file scrnnnnn bmp is placed in the System folder The numeric filename is incremented by 1 each time the PrtScrn function is activated The command is not case sensitive VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC API Calls 139 API Calls See Also LXE CE API Programming Guide E SW WINAPIPG The LXE CE API Programming Guide documents only the LXE specific API calls for the VX7 It is intended as an addition to the standard Microsoft Windows CE API documentation Details of many of the calls in the LXE guide may be found in Microsoft s documentation The APIs documented in the programming guide are included in the file LXEAPI DLL which is in the standard Windows CE image on the VX7 For ease of software development the files LXEAPI H and LXEAPI LIB are available on the accessories CD which are the C C include files and the link library for the DLL respectively A full SDK is now included for Microsoft Embedded Visual C 4 0 which is available free on the Microsoft website E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 140 Reflash the VX7 Reflash the VX7 Note When reflashing LXE recommends using a Compact Flash CF card that is greater than 64MB
282. ocess ok LOG_EX Encrypt acquire context failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt acquire encrypt context Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR failure Encrypt acquired encrypt context Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX OK Encrypt create hash failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt create key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt created encrypt hash OK Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX Encrypt export key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt export key length failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt exported key OK Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX Encrypt failure The password encryption failed LOG_ERROR Encrypt gen key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt generate key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt get user key failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt get user key ok Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX Encrypt hash data failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt hash data from pwd OK Encrypt password process successful LOG_EX Encrypt length failure Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypt out of memory for key Unable to encrypt password LOG_ERROR Encrypted data OK The password has been successfully encrypted LOG_EX Enter AppLockEnumWindows In order for AppLock to control the application being LOG_EX locked so it can prevent the application from exiting AppLock launches
283. ode The VX7 turns off if the user presses the power button when the VX7 is On The VX7 is also off when it is not connected to a power source However an internal Real Time Clock RTC powered by an internal battery maintains the date and time while the VX7 is off VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Physical Controls 33 Physical Controls On Off Switch The power on off switch is a push button switch located on the front control panel of the VX7 The switch is a momentary switch If the VX7 is Off pressing the power switch turns the VX7 On For Platform 2 VX7 s the keyboard LEDs turn on for about one second when the operating system loads the keyboard driver If the LEDs blink more than once this indicates a keyboard problem e Ona USB or PS 2 keyboard the NumLock CapsLock and Scroll Lock keys blink the same as a desktop PC e On the 95 key keyboard the CapsLock NumLock and Scroll Lock keys are backlit amber However the keyboard backlight must be On for this feature to be used The brief illumination may not be visible unless the room is dark e On the 60 key keyboard only the CAPs led is lit during this process To identify your VX7 platform type please see Identifying Your VX7 earlier in this chapter If the VX7 is On pressing and releasing the power switch turns the VX7 Off An orderly shutdown is preformed Any open programs are closed the Windows CE operating system shuts down and then the VX7
284. of Symbologies The order in which these settings are processed are e Code ID e Leading Trailing e Barcode Data Note When Enable Code ID is set to None on the Barcode tab and when All is selected in the Symbology field Enable and Strip Code ID on the Symbology panel are grayed and the user is not allowed to change them to prevent deactivating the scanner completely When All is selected in the Symbology field and the settings are changed the settings in this dialog become the defaults used unless overwritten by the settings for individual symbologies This is also true for Custom IDs where the code IDs to be stripped are specified by the user Note In Custom mode on the Barcode tab any Code IDs not specified by the user will not be stripped because they will not be recognized as code IDs If a specific symbology s settings have been configured a star will appear next to it in the Symbology drop down box so the user can tell which symbologies have been modified from their defaults If a particular symbology has been configured the entire set of parameters from that symbologies screen are in effect for that symbology In other words either the settings for the configured symbology will be used or the default settings are used not a combination of the two If a symbology has not been configured does not have an next to it the settings for All are E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide Barcode Manipulation use
285. on ooooocnnnnccccononccononancnonnnnnos 5 7 PC Cards Plug anid Play fies cist ibis tenses iS 30 PCMCIA Cards Plug and Play inicio 30 Types Specifications seeesss 295 PCMCIA Slots nee edet enn 66 Disable Enable eese 122 329 PEAP GTC CISCO Radio onda 238 Summit Radio sese 216 222 PEAP MSCHAP Cisco Radio sssessessseeeeenenne 235 Summit Radio eee 214 Pen Stylus ii ure teri uttter des 9 65 Permanent storage of drivers and utilities 129 Phillips No 1 Screwdriver sessssss 68 Physical Controls eee 33 Physical Specification 295 Pin 9 E EQ VX7RG L ARC POWGE it 124 332 Pin 9 on COMI and Scanner ei 35 Pin 9 Power sesties rinte steiere anni 163 Pinout COM UE 35 COM EADEM IM ME 36 Pointing Device 95 key keyboard 10 Power Cable Adapting VX1 2 4 Power Supply 77 Power Connector ooooocoocccnococoncnononaconnnonnnacononononacancn n 48 A desires tet e adn 6 Specifications entente ges 295 Power Port 1 while asleep sssssse 165 Power Status LED sene 33 Power Supply CMOS Battery eniti 30 CMOS NiCd Battery sse 78 Power Supply Specifications ss 295 Power Switch essere 33 TO Cat ON a tacita teretes
286. on the host PC is checking COM ports to establish a connection for the first time Note USB will start automatically when the cable is connected not requiring you to select Connect from the Start menu Explore From the ActiveSync Dialog on the Desktop PC click on the Explore button which allows you to explore the VX7 from the PC side with some limitations You can copy files to or from the VX7 by drag and drop You will not be allowed to delete files or copy files out of the Windows directory on the VX7 Technically the only files you cannot delete or copy are ones marked as system files in the original build of the Windows CE image This however includes most of the files in the Windows directory E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 132 Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSync Disconnect Serial Connection e Disconnect the cable from the VX7 e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar Then click the Disconnect button USB Connection e Disconnect the cable from the VX7 e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar Then click the Disconnect button Radio Connection e Click the status bar icon in the lower right hand corner of the status bar Then click the Disconnect button Important Information Cold Boot and Loss of Host Re connection ActiveSync assigns a partnership between a client and a host computer A partnership is defined by two objec
287. onally This is disabled by default Trailing This strips the number of characters specified from the end of the barcode data not including Code ID The data is stripped unconditionally This is disabled by default Code ID Strips the Code ID based on the type code id specified in the Enable Code ID field in the Barcode tab Programmed custom identifiers are always checked in the order they are entered and stripped regardless of Enable Code ID setting By default Code ID stripping is enabled for all symbologies meaning code IDs will be stripped unless specifically configured otherwise E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 172 Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data Barcode Manipulation This panel is used to strip data that matches the entry in the Match list from the barcode Enter the data to be stripped in the text box and tap the Insert or Add button The entry is added to the Match list To remove an entry from the Match list highlight the entry in the list and tap the Remove button Tap the OK button to store any additions deletions or changes Barcode Data Figure 4 6 Barcode Data Match List Barcode Data Edit Buttons Add Entering data into the text entry box enables the Add button Tap the Add button and the data is added to the next empty location in the Custom ID list Insert Tap on an empty line in the Custom ID list The Add button changes to Insert Enter data into both the Name a
288. onsole can be run automatically following each boot Select Auto Execute App The drop down box provides a list of applications that have been installed by the Avalanche Mobility Center Console Delay before execution Time delay before launching Auto Execute application VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Server Contact 151 Avalanche Update Settings Connection Execution Server Contact Startup Shut gt ok x Sync clock Contact E D very at KI On startup On resume Periodic Update 00 00 Midnight Wakeup device if suspended Reboot before attempt Require external power use relative offset On ext power Figure 3 43 Server Contact Options Sync Clock Reset the time on the mobile computer based on the time on the Mobile Device Server Contact On Startup Connect to the Mobile Device Server when the Enabler is accessed On Resume Connect to the Mobile Device Server when resuming from Suspend mode On Ext Power Initiate connection to the Mobile Device Server when the device is connected to an external power source such as based on a docking event Allows the administrator to configure the Enabler to contact the Mobile Device Server and query for updates at a regular interval beginning at a specific time Wakeup device if suspended If th
289. oot CA Certificate in this chapter VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 241 By clicking OK the Trusted root certificate box is filled in on the properties window PEAP Properties REROOtCA Figure 5 56 PEAP Properties Trusted Root Certificate The same thing can be done for the Connect only if server name ends in field Check the box and leave the field blank A prompt window will appear asking for confirmation of the correct server name Validate Server Certificate Figure 5 57 Accept Server Connection Warning E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 242 Cisco Radio PEAP Properties Validate server certificate Connect only if server name ends in RFRootACServer Trusted root certificate RFRootCA Connect only if server is signed by specified trusted root CA Always try to resume secure session Figure 5 58 PEAP Properties Connect Only If Server Name Ends In If the ACS server name is correct click the OK button and the server name field will be filled in with the correct server name The other option is to fill in the correct name IP Information IPv6 Information Wireless Information Select a network and press connect or right click for more options Y Add New Y peapTest preferred Status Authenticated to peapTest Signal Strength Excellent Notify me when new wireless networks are available Figure 5 59 Wireless Information Authenticated Once the authent
290. oot and Loss of Host Re connection Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server These shortcuts call the Services Manager to start and stop the FTP server The server defaults to Off for security unless it is explicitly turned on from the menu The COMG port is labeled COM2 3 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 88 Start Menu Program Options Command Prompt Access Start Programs Command Prompt x Pocket CMD v 4 20 gt Figure 3 1 Pocket CMD Prompt Screen Type help at the command prompt for a list of available commands Exit the Command Prompt by typing exit at the command prompt or select File Close Internet Explorer Access Start Programs Internet Explorer This option requires a radio card and an Internet Service Provider There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Internet Explorer as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Internet Explorer options Click the button to access Internet Explorer Help Media Player Access Start Programs Media Player There are few changes in the Windows CE version of Media Player as it relates to the general desktop Windows PC Microsoft Media Player options Click the button to access Media Player Help VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Start Menu Program Options 89 Remote Desktop Connection Transcriber Access Start Programs Remote Desktop Connection There are few changes in the Windows CE version of R
291. or Auto Profile The Auto Profile selection screen displays all currently configured profiles Click on the checkbox for any profiles that are to be included in Auto Profile selection then click OK to save To enable Auto Profile click the On button on the Main tab When Auto Profile is On if the radio goes out of range from the currently selected profile the radio then begins to attempt to connect to the profiles listed under Auto Profile The search continues until e the SCU connects to and if necessary authenticates with one of the specified profiles or e until the Off button is clicked to turn off Auto Profile E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 192 Summit Radio Profile Tab Notes If the Admin password is not entered the user can view the Profile parameter settings but cannot make any changes The buttons on this tab are grayed out if the user is not logged in The Profile tab was previously labeled Config Summit Client Utility Figure 5 5 SCU Profile Tab When logged in as an Admin see the Main tab use the Profile tab to manage profiles e Rename Gives the profile a new unique name If the new name is not unique an error message is displayed and the profile is not renamed e Delete Deletes the profile The current active profile cannot be deleted In that case an error message is displayed and the profile is not deleted e New Creates a new profile with the default settings see the
292. ord that indicates an imminent hazardous situation which if not avoided gt will result in death or serious injury VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Quick Start Quick Start This section s instructions are based on the assumption that your new system is pre configured and requires only accessory installation e g antenna external keyboard and or barcode scanner and a power source In general the sequence of events is 1 Install Vehicle Mounting Bracket on vehicle and secure VX7 in Mounting Bracket Assembly see VX7 User s Guide 2 Connect power cable to the VX7 The power cable can also be connected to a UPS battery pack which is then connected to the VX7 see VX7 User s Guide 3 Connect accessories to VX7 e g scanner antenna etc see VX7 User s Guide 4 Secure all cables to the VX7 with the Strain Relief Cable Clamps 5 Turn the VX7 on 6 When instructed calibrate the touchscreen see Chapter 3 System Configuration 7 The screen may appear white while applications and drivers are loading When complete set Date and Time see Chapter 3 System Configuration 8 Pair Bluetooth devices 9 Configure radio see Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration 10 Warmboot to ensure all registry settings are saved 11 Device is ready for use The VX7 and its keyboard should be mounted in an area in the vehicle where it e Does not obstruct the vehicle driver s visio
293. ore e To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button e Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox e Select the desired certificate and click Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option e Leave the Use MS store box unchecked e Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox Click OK then click Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using PEAP MSCHAP for the user authentication For information on generating a Root CA certificate please see Root CA Certificate later in this chapter Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 216 Summit Radio PEAP GTC To use PEAP GTC make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to PEAP GTC e Set Encryption to WPA TKIP e Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility Figure 5 21 PEAP GTC Please review Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter Click the Credentials button e No entries except the CA Certificate Filename are necessary as the user will be prompted for the User Name and Password when connecting to the network Enter these items as directed below Credentials Figure 5 22 PEAP GTC Credentials Enter the Domain Username if the Doman is required otherwise enter the Username
294. ost every key has two or three different functions The primary alpha or numeric character is printed on the key For example when the lt 2 key is selected pressing the desired second function key produces the lt 2 gt character ie lt 2 gt Fl toggles the CAPS Lock function The specific lt 2 gt character is printed above the corresponding key Please refer to Appendix A Key Maps for instruction on the specific keypresses to access all PC compatible keyboard functions Tethered Scanners The VX7 supports an accessory barcode label reading device Keyboard data entries can be mixed with barcode data entries Any scanner that decodes the barcode internally and outputs an RS 232 data stream may be used COM port is designed to be used with a hand held tethered barcode scanner COM1 is set to 5V on pin 9 up to accept input from a barcode scanner by default To change the setting for pin 9 refer to Chapter 4 Scanner section titled Serial Port Pin 9 for details Bluetooth Scanners Bluetooth scanners are paired to the VX7 wirelessly using the VX7 Bluetooth wireless client The VX7 does not have a Bluetooth LED See previous sections on Bluetooth for more information Only LXE Bluetooth scanners and LXE Bluetooth printers are supported by LXE See Accessories RS 232 Data Entry The VX7 accepts input from an RS 232 device connected to either RS 232 port COM1 or COM3 labeled COM2 3 The d
295. ou can also get help from LXE by calling the telephone numbers listed on the LXE Manuals CD in the file titled Contacting LXE This information is also available on the LXE website www lxe com Explanations of terms and acronyms used in this guide are located in the file titled Glossary on the LXE Manuals CD Manuals and Accessories Manuals The following manuals are available on the LXE Manuals CD e VX7 User s Guide e RFTerm Reference Guide e Contacting LXE e LXE Technical Glossary Accessories The table below lists the available VX7 accessories VX7 Brackets Bracket U Style VX6 VX7 9000021 BRACKET Bracket U Style w Integrated Keyboard Mount VX7 9000025BRACKET Kit VXX U Bracket to VX6 VX7 Adapter 9000022BRACKET Kit VXX U Bracket to VX7 Adapter w Keyboard Mount 9000026BRACKET Bracket RAM Mount VX6 VX7 9000023 BRACKET Bracket Combo RAM VMT Mount w Keyboard Mount VX7 9000027BRACKET Bracket VXX RAM ball on plate 9000028BRACKET Bracket RAM keyboard mounting plate 9000029BRACKET Bracket RAM keyboard arm 9000030BRACKET Bracket RAM Squeeze Mount VX6 VX7 900003 1BRACKET Bracket Combo RAM Squeeze Mount w Keyboard Mount 9000032BRACKET Bracket RAM Backup Mounting Plate 9000033PLATE Keyboard Brackets Bracket Remote Keyboard LXE 9000012BRACKET Bracket Remote Mouse Keyboard 9000018BRACKET RAM Keyboard Mounting Kit 9000017BRACKET VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Manuals and Accessories Keyboards Keyboar
296. p 0x02 ina barcode is converted to the text STX Value Ox0d in a barcode is converted to the value 0x0d Value 0x09 in a barcode is converted to the text AT Value Ox0D in a barcode is converted to a value Ox0A Ox0A or O x0A Value 0x0C is a barcode is converted to text Ox0A E EQ VX7RG L ARC Barcode Manipulation Barcode Processing Examples 179 The following table shows examples of stripping and prefix suffix configurations The examples assume that the scanner is configured to transmit an AIM identifier Symbology All p di pow a T 5 Code93 Enable Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Min length 1 4 1 1 Max length all all all 10 Strip Code ID Enabled Enabled Disabled Enabled Strip Leading 3 0 3 3 Strip Barcode Data 123 qe 456 Strip Trailing 0 0 3 3 Prefix aaa bbb cec ddd Suffix www XXX yyy ZZZ Provided that the wedge is configured with the above table below are examples of scanned barcode data and results of these manipulations Barcode Symbology Raw Scanner Data Resulting Data EAN 128 C11234567890123 bbb1234567890xxx EAN 128 C111234567890123 bbb11234567890xxx EAN 128 C1123 lt rejected gt too short EAN 13 E01234567890987 ccc E04567890yyy EAN 13 E01231234567890987 ccc E0234
297. p OK Press the hotkey sequence to launch AppLock and lock the configured application s The device is now in end user mode VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Administration Mode 273 Administration Mode Administration mode gives full access to the mobile device hardware and software configuration options The administrator must enter a valid password when a password has already been assigned before access to Administration mode and configuration options are allowed The administrator can configure the following options e Create change the keystroke sequence to activate administrator access e Create change the password for administrator access e Assign the name of the application or applications to lock e Select the command line of the application to lock In addition to these configuration options the administrator can view and manage the status logs of AppLock sessions Administrator default values for this device Administrator Hotkey Shift Ctrl A Password none Application path and name none Application command line none End User Mode End user mode locks the end user into the configured application or applications The end user can still reboot and respond to dialog boxes Each application is automatically launched and runs in full screen mode when the device boots up The user cannot unintentionally or intentionally exit the application nor can the end user execute any other applications Normal application
298. p tab select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select Key Sequence from the Remapped Key pulldown list Select the first key of the string from the pulldown list Press the Add button to add the key to the string shown in the Key Sequence box Repeat this step until all keys desired have been added to the key sequence If necessary use the Clear button to erase all entries in the Key Sequence box Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control How To Remap an Application Launch l Bow On the KeyMap tab select the modifier key from the Modifier Mode options Select the key to be remapped from the Key pulldown list Select Launch App1 4 from the remapped key from the Remapped Key pulldown list Click on the LaunchApp tab VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 113 Make sure the EXE radio button is selected In the text box App1 4 corresponding to the number selected for Launch App1 4 enter the application to launch If any parameters are needed for the application click on the OPT radio button This clears the text box though the application name is saved Enter the desired parameters in the appropriate text box Click OK to save the result and close the Keypad Control If the KeyMap tab is accessed again the application plus any specified parameters is displayed in the Key Sequence text box when the remapped k
299. pears on the VX7 display notifying the user the connection between one or all of the paired Bluetooth devices has stopped This option is enabled by default Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen Report when reconnected A dialog box appears on the VX7 display notifying the user a connection between one or all of the previously paired Bluetooth devices is complete This option is disabled by default Click the OK button or the X button to remove the dialog box from the screen Report failure to reconnect If the reconnect timeout 30 minutes expires a dialog box appears on the VX7 display notifying the end user the connection between one or all of the previously paired Bluetooth devices has failed This option is enabled by default Click the OK button to remove the dialog box from the screen Computer is connectable There is no dialog connected to this checkbox Enable this checkbox when you want the VX7 to be able to pair with other Bluetooth devices This option is enabled by default Computer is discoverable There is no dialog connected to this checkbox Enable this checkbox when you want the VX7 to be Discovered by other Bluetooth devices This option is disabled by default Prompt if devices request to pair A dialog box appears on the VX7 screen notifying the user a Bluetooth device requests to pair with the VX7 This option is disabled by default The requesting Bluetooth dev
300. pin 8 Clear to Send Input of a D9 female connector provide continuity only when the vehicle is stopped for example via a switch on the accelerator pedal of the fork truck All other pins on the connector must be left unconnected If pins 7 and 8 do not provide continuity or the cable is removed the VX7 screen remains blank Serial cable Customer built cable with the following specifications oo C1 Pinout DB9 female Function 1 Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used Not Used No signal when in motion Continuity to Pin 8 when stopped NAYIL ND ATR w dy 8 No signal when in motion Continuity to Pin 7 when stopped 9 Not Used Figure 2 6 Pinout Screen Blanking Cable Pin T Figure 2 7 Sample Cable for Screen Blanking Please refer to Scanner in Chapter 4 Scanner for the proper COM port settings to support screen blanking VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 39 Keyboard Mouse Connector The VX7 external keyboard connector accepts e AnLXE VMT keyboard with integrated pointing device e AnLXE VMT keyboard without integrated pointing device e A dongle cable providing PS 2 connections for a standard PS 2 keyboard and mouse Figure 2 8 VX7 Keyboard Connector and External Keyboard Cable Connector The 5V supply available from the connector is current limited at 400mA Note Power the VX7 off before
301. powers off If a software lockup should occur and the VX7 is unresponsive to keyboard or touchscreen input pressing and holding the power button for several seconds forces a shutdown However the forced shutdown is not an orderly shutdown All unsaved data and any registry settings not saved to persistent storage are lost The Status LED located on the keyboard of the VX7 is lit when the power is on e Green VX7 is operating from vehicle power or AC power e Solid Yellow VX7 is operating from the UPS UPS battery is good e Flashing Yellow VX7 is operating from the UPS UPS battery is critically low E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 34 External Connectors Note Always turn the computer off prior to removing power cables Figure 2 2 The Power On Off Switch Caution The VX7 has voltage on it even when power is off Always disconnect input power before working on the VX7 changing fuse opening access panel etc External Connectors Most external connectors for the VX7 are located on the bottom of the unit e The Keyboard Mouse connector accepts an LXE VMT keyboard or a dongle cable for a PS 2 keyboard and mouse e COMI connects to a serial barcode scanner e COMG labeled COM2 3 connects to a serial printer or PC with the appropriate cables e The USB Ethernet connector accepts dongle cables offering a combination of the following ports o An Ethernet port o A USB Host port o
302. pplications without a checkmark are available for Launching by the user When Keyboard is selected the VX7 default input method Input Panel Transcriber or custom input method is activated Using a Stylus Tap When the mobile device enters end user mode a Switchpad icon it looks like three tiny windows one above the other is displayed in the taskbar The taskbar is always visible on top of the application in focus When the user taps the Switchpad icon a menu is displayed showing the applications available to the user The user can tap an application name in the popup menu and the selected application 1s brought to the foreground The previous application continues to run in the background Stylus taps affect the application in focus only When the user needs to use the Input Panel they tap the Keyboard option Input Panel taps affect the application in focus only The figure shown above is an example and is shown only to aid in describing how the user can switch between applications using a stylus The switchpad lists user applications as well as the Keyboard option See Also Application Panel Launch Manual Launch and Allow Close Using the Switch Key Sequence One switch key sequence or hotkey is defined by the administrator for the end user to use when switching between locked applications This is known as the Activation key The Activation key is assigned by the Administrator using the Global Key parameter When the switch
303. ps 206 Figures 1b Choose Grint cates usce rt HERE SE DOR ERES EARS catolica 208 Eiogre 5 12 Derant Profilerte tiet erred Da oe oot ase inet ae pel een EL ES 209 Eire ING SS CUNO oro Hoe E acest pus bd E rae x E E FREE UE MESE eram obses apod risese li T 210 Figure s 14 WEP BICEyVpLOD anie oa RETE UTOR TEE EGRE rH be 211 Pisne slo WEP Key Sui D deiude aded idu Ol e oH A aladas 211 FigureS 16 LEAP Configuration nica idas 212 Fipe S17 LEAP Credo ico DE c ir osa bte east GARE 213 Eipure 5 18 PAP MS CHAR ooh open eo pape ed Hte ues HEU e ara 214 Figure 5 19 PEAP MSCHAP Credentials titur srt ter ae eet tree rt a ce us 214 Figure 5 20 PEAP MSCHAP Certificate Filetiatti amp 3 scan oreet te perrea rias Leere asis 215 A O 216 Higute 5 22 PEAP GTC Credentials isaac iaa 216 Figure 5 23 PEAP GTG Certificate ln scans 217 Figure 5 24 W BAIL AD s s scsvssies shts seecesceveeseuss deseo e O A E 218 Figure 5 25 WPA LEAP Credentials ie eee eire eoa Hoe Ute E uve EU Ub aaea SEs asians iait 2 9 Figure 5 20 EAP FAST COn rr is 220 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents xvii Figure 5 27 Figure 5 28 Figure 5 29 Figure 5 30 Figure 5 31 WPA PSK Encriptar erara E E A utut rom tetigi 224 Figure 5 32 PSK EDY oraria E m rte pon Rr e E 224 Fiene 5 33 Cisco Aironet Clr eit Utility P C TERI EE 225 HFigute S5 34 Cisco Profile Properties SOPCEL ii rte METRE EG DOSE HAS RUMEUANE rU AERIS HE ENE ENESA 226 Figur
304. pulation Add Prefix Suffix Control See Also Barcode Processing Overview earlier in this chapter Symbology fan y Strip M Enable Min Max ang Leading Add Trailing Prefix Bear E e Suffix Figure 4 7 Add Prefix Suffix Controls Use this option to specify a string of text hex values or hat encoded values to be added to the beginning prefix or the end suffix of the barcode data Up to 19 characters can be included in the string The string can include any character from the keyboard plus characters specified by hex equivalent or entering in hat encoding Please see the Hat Encoding section in Appendix B for a list of characters with their hex and hat encoded values Using the Escape function allows entering of literal hex and hat values Add Prefix To enable a prefix check the Prefix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox The default is disabled unchecked with a blank text string When barcode data is processed the Prefix string is sent to the output buffer before any other data Because all stripping operations have already occurred stripping settings do not affect the prefix The prefix is added to the output buffer for the Symbology selected from the pulldown list If All is selected the prefix is added for any symbology that has not been specifically configured Add Suffix To enable a suffix check the Suffix checkbox and enter the desired string in the textbox
305. puter from the drop down list or enter a host name and tap the Connect button Tap the Options gt gt button to access the General Display Local Resources Programs and Experience tabs Click the button to access Remote Desktop Connection Help Transcriber Access Start Programs Transcriber Select Transcriber on the Start Programs menu To make changes to the Transcriber application enable or disable the current Transcriber session etc click the hand with a pen icon in the toolbar Click the button or the Help button to access Transcriber Help Windows Explorer Access Start Programs Windows Explorer There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Windows Explorer as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Explorer options Click the button to access Windows Explorer Help E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 312 Taskbar Start Menu Program Options Access Start Settings Taskbar and Start Menu Factory Default Settings Always on Top Enabled Auto hide Disabled Show Clock Enabled There are a few changes in the Windows CE version of Taskbar as it relates to the general desktop PC Windows Taskbar options When the taskbar is auto hidden press the Ctrl key then the Esc key to make the Start button appear Taskbar and Start Menu Properties Always on top Auto hide Show Clock Figure C 2 Taskbar Properties Advanced T
306. r Name Type Certificates Figure 5 98 Browsing to Certificate Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the certificate select the certificate desired and click OK The certificate is now shown in the list Certificates Lists your personal digital certificates Figure 5 99 Certificate Listing With the certificate you just imported highlighted click View From the Field pull down menu select Private Key E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 266 Certificates Certificate Details Friendly Name Field Not Present Figure 5 100 Private Key Not Present e Ifthe private key is present the process is complete e Ifthe private key is not present import the private key To import the private key click OK to return to the Certificates screen Click import Select a Certificate File Ef mu _ ex 2 My Documents Shortcut to Office Templates Ink la vx7user pvk Name Type Private Keys Figure 5 101 Browsing to Private Key Location Using the explorer buttons browse to the location where you copied the private key file change the Type pull down list to Private Keys select the certificate desired and click OK Enter the password for the certificate if appropriate Click on View to see the certificate details again VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 267 Certificate Details F
307. r to prepare the Authentication Server and Access Point for VX7 communication A23 It is important that all dates are correct on CE computers when using any type of ES certificate Certificates are date sensitive and if the date is not correct authentication Date Time will fail System Requirements To support Wi Fi Protected Access WPA the VX7 must be equipped as follows e Cisco 350 radio card with driver release 2 60 or later The LXE VX7 supports WPA and all authentications The Microsoft supplicant and Cisco supplicants are used separately or together to provide support for the different authentications Most of the configuration is done with the Microsoft Wireless Configuration tool WPA LEAP requires the Cisco supplicant and configuration tool Installing Radio drivers Which version of the Cisco driver should be installed depends on what authentication protocol is to be configured e Cisco PEAP should not be installed if using PEAP MSCHAP e Cisco PEAP must be installed if using PEAP GTC e Forall other authentications LEAP EAP TLS WPA PSK it does not matter if Cisco PEAP is installed or not To determine if Cisco PEAP is installed or to change the installation follow the instructions below E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 230 Cisco Radio Checking for the Cisco PEAP Supplicant With a Cisco radio installed open the Wireless network properties as described in Wireless Network Configu
308. r details VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 107 Input Panel Access Start Settings Control Panel Input Panel Select the current key data input method Factory Default Settings Input Method Keyboard Allow applications to Disabled change input panel state Keys Small keys Use gestures Disabled Input Panel Properties El OK E Input Panel Current input method lt eyboa To quickly switch input methods tap the Input Panel arrow and then tap the desired method from the menu that appears Allow applications to change the input panel state Figure 3 18 Input Panel Properties Use this option to make the Soft Keyboard or the keypad primarily available when entering data Selecting Keyboard enables both The Input Panel is disabled by default To enable the input panel make sure the checkbox for Allow applications to change input panel state is checked and warmboot the VX7 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 108 Internet Options Set General Connection Security connectivity Control Panel Options Privacy Advanced and Popups options for Internet Factory Default Settings General Start Page http www lxe com Search Page http www google com Cache Size 512 Kb User Agent Windows CE Connection Use LAN Disabled Autodia
309. r set the EAP type to PEAP as shown above If the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see Installing Radio Drivers earlier in this chapter to change the radio cab file Click the Properties button Authentication Settings User Certificate Issued to Issued by Validate Server Figure 5 45 Authentication Settings When first configuring and authenticating do not validate the server certificate This allows the user authentication to be tested When that works come back to this screen and validate the server certificate E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 236 Cisco Radio The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network Enter Network Password Figure 5 46 Wireless Network Login Once authenticated click the IP Information tab CISCO1 Figure 5 47 IP Information Tab If the network is set to use DHCP the VX7 displays the IP address given by the DHCP server Now go back and authenticate the server VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 237 Server Authentication To validate the server certificate install the root CA certificate For instructions for installing see Root Certificates later in this chapter Authentication Settings User Certificate Issued to Issued by Validate Server Figure 5 48 Authentication Settings Validate Server Navigate to the Wireless Network Properties configuration screen Click the Properti
310. r the target s center and then lift the stylus To start tap Recalibrate Recalibrate Figure 3 33 Stylus Properties Recalibration Start Carefully press and briefly hold stylus on the center of the target Repeat as the target moves around the screen Press the Esc key to cancel E EQ VX7RG L ARC Figure 3 34 Stylus Properties Recalibration VX7 Reference Guide 126 Control Panel Options System Access Start Settings Control Panel System Icon Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Factory Default Settings General N A Memory 1 3 storage 2 3 program memory Device Name VXCO0001 Device Description LXE VXC Copyrights N A General System Properties General Memory Device Name Copyrights Computer Processor Type intel Corp ARM XSca Expansion Slots Memory 36044 KB RAM System Microsoft Windows CE NET Version 4 20 1996 2003 Microsoft Corp All rights reserved This computer program is protected by U S and international copyright laws Registered to Figure 3 35 System General tab System This screen is presented for information only The System parameters cannot be changed by the user Computer The processor type is listed The type cannot be changed by the user The name of the installed radio card is listed in the dropdown list Tota
311. ral situations that display a password prompt after a password has been configured If the configured hotkey is pressed the password prompt is displayed In this case the user has 30 seconds to enter a password If a valid password is not entered within 30 seconds the password prompt is dismissed and the device returns to end user mode All other situations that present the password prompt do not dismiss the prompt this is because the other situations result in invalid end user operation These conditions include e If inaccurate configuration information is entered by the administrator i e an application is specified that does not exist e Ifthe application name which is mandatory for end user mode is missing in the configuration e Invalid installation of AppLock e g missing DLLs e Corrupted registry settings To summarize if an error occurs that prevents AppLock from switching to user mode the password will not timeout and AppLock will wait until the correct password is entered Troubleshooting Can t locate the password that has been set by the administrator Enter this LXE back door key sequence Ctrl L Ctrl X Ctrl E Or Ctrl 5 Ctrl 9 Ctrl 3 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC End User Switching Technique 275 End User Switching Technique Note The touch screen must be enabled Keyboard v RFTerm EXE v pword exe Figure 6 3 Switchpad Menu A checkmark indicates applications currently active A
312. ration later in this chapter With the Authentication tab selected check the text in the EAP type drop down box Refer to the following figures to determine if Cisco PEAP is installed Wireless Network Properties Network name SSID peapTest This is a computer to computer ad hoc Wireless network key WEP This network requires a key for Encryption TKIP Authentication we A y network wireless access points are not used Network key Key index fr Key provided automatically IEEE 802 1X Authentication Enable 802 1 authentication on this network EAP type PEAP y Figure 5 36 No Cisco PEAP Wireless Network Properties Network name SSID peanTest This is a computer to computer ad hoc i i jpeapTest network wireless access points are not used Wireless network key WEP This network requires a kev for Encryption TKIP y Authentication wea y Network key Key index m Kev provided automatically IEEE 802 1X Authentication Enable 802 1X authentication on this network EAP type Cisco PEAP y Figure 5 37 Cisco PEAP installed If the Cisco installation is correct continue with the configuration If it is not correct follow the procedures below Note Instructions are also included in the README file located in the SYSTEM folder There are two Cisco CAB files in the SYSTEM folder of the VX7 The default files are e CISCO CAB e CISCOPEAP CAB The default CISCO CAB
313. reference guide uses the following document conventions ALL CAPS All caps are used to represent disk directories file names and application names MenulChoice Rather than use the phrase choose the Save command from the File menu this guide uses the convention choose FilelSave Quotes Indicates the title of a book chapter or a section within a chapter for example Document Conventions Indicates a key on the keyboard for example lt Enter gt Indicates a reference to other documentation Differences in operation or commands due to platform type e Differences in operation or commands due to software revision ATTENTION Keyword that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow A Attention symbol that indicates vital or pivotal information to follow Also when marked on product means to refer to the manual or user s guide A International fuse replacement symbol When marked on the product the label includes fuse ratings in volts v and amperes a for the product Note Keyword that indicates immediately relevant information e S S ES S S gt Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury WARNING Keyword that indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury DANGER Keyw
314. rence Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options Power 123 Depending on the Software Revision some devices may have a Schemes tab Factory Default Settings Switch state to User Idle Never Switch state to System Idle Never Switch state to Suspen Never The Schemes tab can be used to control the display and shut the VX7 Off The mode timers are cumulative The System Idle timer begins the countdown after the User Idle timer has expired and the Suspend timer begins the countdown after the System Idle timer has expired For example if the User Idle timer is set to Never the power scheme timers never place the device in User Idle System Idle or Suspend modes For a VX7 the User Idle state turns off the display and display backlight There is no System Idle mode so the VX7 remains in User Idle mode until the Suspend timer expires or a primary even occurs Please see Power Modes in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout IMPORTANT There is no Suspend mode on the VX7 If the Suspend timer is enabled the VX7 will shut down when the Suspend timer expires Power Properties Device Status Power Scheme Schemes Switch state to User Idle Switch state to System Idle Switch state to Suspend ac Power 5 Never y Never y Never y Figure 3 32 Power Properties The Device Status tab displays the status of power managed devices Note that sin
315. ror te eu ise a aro 322 Ligure C12 MINE ond Ge HER ERE OO UE DO rU DE THU o ER LED eee eee 324 Figure 6 13 Network Connection Properties aii leia ian eran 325 Fiure C A Owner Propecia a 326 Fienre 0 15 Password PIODEBIBS enint o rro epo pn bera reri epp rude exti E Pete retards 327 Figure C 16 Communication PC Connection Tab ic petierit eor ee epe ence opt ia a E A EE DER Peach 328 Figure C 17 PCMCIA Control Tab Slot 0 and Slot Linn erde 329 Figure C 18 Compact Flash ATA Control Tab Slot Zunino dia 329 Fip re C19 Power Proponi eSa cs eise HER SUR HSHP S RENE ele ERA EE 330 Figure C 20 Stylus Properties Recalibratioli Statte sooo Bo ee hs EE Pre Oana eee 333 Figure C 2 Stylus Properties RECA PAO asics secco ictor bee tee ree URe iria 333 Figure C22 System General tab ciet dte iE ut lates ii iHd NE vesc eR aeneo eR UU ee HUC osa REOR UC ede 334 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Table of Contents xix Ficas C2 System Menos aa iaa 335 Figure C 24 Systemy Device Naci ds 333 Figure C25 Volume and SOUDUS c iio die D cds 336 Figure D 1 Decimal Hexadecimal Chart 0 to 159 Decimal sssssesseseseeeeneeeennnnn ns 353 Figure D 2 Decimal Hexadecimal Chart 160 10255 Decimal asociacion 354 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide XX Table of Contents VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Chapter 1 Introduction Overview The VX7 Vehicle Mount Computer VMC is a rugged vehicle mounted PC Personal Computer
316. round Applications set up with Manual Launch enabled may or may not be launched at bootup This function is based on the application s Auto At Boot setting The applications have been listed as approved applications for end user manual launch using the Switchpad menu structure The approved applications are listed on the Switchpad A checkmark indicates the applications active status When Manual Launch is disabled for an application and Allow Close is enabled for the application when the end user closes the specific application it is no longer available shown on the Switchpad When Auto At Boot and Manual Launch are both disabled for a specific application the application is 1 not placed on the list of approved applications for end user manual launch and 2 never launched and 3 not displayed on the Switchpad Default is Disabled When enabled the associated application can be closed by the end user This option allows the administrator to configure applications that consume system resources to be terminated if an error condition occurs or at the end user s request Error conditions may generate a topmost popup requiring an end user response memory resource issues requiring an end user response etc Also at the administrator s discretion these types of applications can be started manually see Manual Launch by the end user VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Application Configuration 281 Match Default is bla
317. rt Menu Properties Always on top Auto hide Show Clock Figure 3 2 Taskbar Properties Advanced Tab Expand Control Panel Tap the checkbox to have the Control Panel folders appear in drop down menu format from the Settings Control Panel menu option Clear Contents of Document Folder Tap the Clear button to remove the contents of the Document folder VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 91 Control Panel Options Access Start Settings Control Panel or My Computer Control Panel Getting Help Please click the box to get Help when changing Control Panel options Option Function About Displays hardware and software details Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard display or mouse functions Administrator AppLock configuration See Chapter 6 AppLock Control Aironet Client Utility Set the parameters for a Cisco radio See section Start Menu Program Options only present if Cisco radio software installed Bluetooth Discover and manage Bluetooth devices Certificates Manage digital certificates used for secure communication Date Time Set Date Time Time Zone and Daylight Savings Dialing Set dialup properties for internal modems not supplied supported by LXE Display Set background graphic color scheme appearance and power scheme properties Input Panel Select the current key data input method Internet Opt
318. rt Page http www lxe com Search Page http www google com Cache Size 512 Kb Connection Use LAN Disabled Autodial Name Blank Proxy Server Disabled Security Allow cookies Enabled Allow TLS 1 0 security Disabled Allow SSL 2 0 security Enabled Allow SSL 3 0 security Enabled Warn when switching Enabled Advanced Display web images Enabled Play web sounds Enabled Enable web scripting Enabled Display script error note Disabled Underline links Never Select a tab Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Keyboard Access Set key repeat delay and key repeat rate Start Settings Control Panel Keyboard Icon Factory Default Settings Repeat Enable Delay Short Rate Slow Key Map Default Windows CE 5 0 0409 Windows CE NET There is no change from general desktop PC Keyboard Properties options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately When new key maps are added to the registry they will appear in the Key Map dropdown list on the Keyboard Panel These values do not affect virtual keyboard taps E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide Sidetone a 12 008 MA 34 5dB 12 0 dB Figure C 12 Mixer Control Panel Options 2o x Input None O Mici Input Boost Select the Input for t
319. ructions are located in Chapter 6 Avalanche Update Settings OK E Startup Shutdown Scan Config Shortcuts Figure 3 47 Application Shortcuts Configure shortcuts to other applications on the mobile device Shortcuts are viewed and activated in the Programs panel This limits the user s access to certain applications when the Enabler is controlling the mobile device display LXE recommends using LXE AppLock for this function See Chapter 6 AppLock for instruction VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration 155 Adapters Note LXE recommends the user review the network settings configuration utilities and the default values in Chapter 5 before setting All Adapters to Enable in the Adapters applet Avalanche Update Settings OK Fl Scan Config Display Shortcuts Adapters no All Adapters Manage Network Manage Wireless Current Adapter soccr 1061 Primary Use Avalanche Network Profile A adapter E Use Manual Settings Figure 3 48 Adapter Options Network Manage Network Setting When enabled the Enabler will control the network settings This parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console and is enabled by default Manage Wireless When enabled the Enabler will control the wireless settings This Settings parameter cannot be configured from the Avalanche Mobility Center Console a
320. ry third beacon contains a DTIM Signal strength RSST displayed in dBm and graphically Signal quality a measure of the clarity of the signal displayed in percentage and graphically There are no user entries on this screen Note After completing radio configuration it is a good idea to review this screen to verify the radio has associated no encryption WEP or authenticated LEAP any WPA as indicated above E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 198 Diags Tab Summit Radio Summit Client Utility Diagnostics Output Figure 5 8 SCU Diags Tab The Diags screen can be used for troubleshooting network traffic and radio connectivity issues VX7 Reference Guide Re connect Use this button to apply or reapply the current profile and attempt to associate or authenticate to the wireless LAN All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box on the lower part of the screen Release Renew Obtain a new IP address through release and renew All activity is logged in the Diagnostic Output box Ifa fixed IP address has been assigned to the radio this is also noted in the Diagnostic Output box Note that the current IP address is displayed above this button Start Ping Start a continuous ping to the IP address specified in the text box to the right of this button Once the button is clicked the ping begins and the button label changes to Stop Ping Clicking the button ends the ping The ping
321. s Only G Rates Only BG Rates Full BG Subset A Main only A Rates Only BG Main only B Rates Only G Rates Only BG Rates Full BG Rates Subset Please contact your LXE representative if you have questions about the antenna s installed on your VX7 Infrastructure Mode vs Ad Hoc Mode e When any of the options except Ad Hoc are selected the radio is in Infrastructure Mode meaning the radio attempts to associate with an AP e When Ad Hoc mode is selected the radio attempts to connect to another client radio Both client radios must be in Ad Hoc mode and have the same SSID specified E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 196 Summit Radio Auth Type 802 11 authentication type used when associating with AP Options Open Shared key LEAP Default Open Note Set the Auth Type radio parameter is set to Open for all configurations unless using LEAP not WPA and the AP is configured for network EAP only In this case set the Auth Type radio parameter to LEAP EAP Type Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP type used for 802 1x authentication to AP Options None LEAP EAP FAST PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC EAP TLS Default None Note The EAP type chosen determines if the Credentials button is active Available entries on the Credentials pop up window vary by EAP type chosen Security Type of encryption used to protect transmitted data This parameter was labeled as Encryption in some versions of the SCU
322. s and hides any data beneath it It is closed by pressing the assigned Status User or Status Admin key sequence Using the KeyPad control panel Start Settings Control Panel Keypad the System Administrator must first assign a Status User key sequence for the end user when they want to toggle the Status Popup Window on or off The System Administrator must also assign a Status Admin key sequence to perform the same function Status popup window display options taskbar icons are assigned on the Status Popup tab E g AC Power ActiveSync WLAN radio CapsLock Network status Bluetooth status etc The default is for the User and Admin status popup windows to show all status information The 5 second timeout to remove the status popup from the display is disabled by default for the User and Admin status popup windows E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 118 Control Panel Options Network and Dialup Connections Access Start Settings Control Panel Network and Dialup Connections Create a dialup direct or VPN connection on the VX7 To configure the VX7 to use DHCP or a fixed IP address select the desired connection The default is to obtain an IP address via DHCP A static IP address can be assigned by clicking the Specify an IP address radio button and entering the desired IP address subnet mask and gateway Cisco Wireless Lan Adapter Settings Figure 3 26 Network Connection Properties VX7 Reference Guide
323. s are supported by the Wavelink Avalanche Enabler when used in conjunction with the Avalanche Mobility Center MC Console After configuration Enabler files are installed upon initial bootup and after a hard reset Network parameter configuration is supported for e IP address DHCP or static IP e RF network SSID e DNS hosts primary secondary tertiary e Subnet mask e Enabler update Related Manual Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers The VX7 has the Avalanche Enabler installation files loaded but not installed on the mobile device when it is shipped from LXE The installation files are located in the System folder on CE devices The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 82 Installed Software After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Following this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface The designation of the mobile device to the Avalanche CE Manager Is LXE_VXC LXE CE devices manufactured before October 2006 must have their drivers and system files upgraded before they can use the Avalanche Enabler functions Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline If the user is NOT using
324. s at Startup and Enabling GrabTime Removed section Bluetooth Manager Renamed VX7 Command Line Utility to VX7 Command Line Utilities and updated section Chapter 5 Wireless Network Revised Profiles Tab section Configuration Split radio configuration section into two sections Cisco Radio and Symbol radio Added a new section Summit Radio Each section contains the manufacturer specific configuration information Moved all certificate generating and installation instructions to a new Certificates section Chapter 6 AppLock New chapter Information previously included in Appendix B is now referred to as Single Application Added Multi Application AppLock to chapter Appendix B Technical Added Revision History to appendix Specifications Added Summit Radio Technical Specifications Appendix C AppLock Deleted appendix Information is now included in Chapter 6 AppLock VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Revision History 357 Revision E November 2006 Added Wavelink trademark information Chapter Introduction Revised When to Use this Guide Chapter 2 Physical Added information that was previously included in Chapter 3 Power Description and Layout Supply Chapter 3 Power Supply Deleted chapter This information is now included in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Chapter 4 System Renamed
325. s changed the application name or command line LOG_ERROR Registry read failure at reenter user mode The registry has to be read when switching into user mode This is because the administrator can change the settings during administration mode The read of the registry failed which means the Administration key was not found or the AppName value was missing or empty LOG_ERROR Registry read failure The registry read failed The registry information read when this message is logged is the application information It the Administration key cannot be opened or if the AppName value is missing or empty this error is logged The other application information is not required If the AppName value is not available AppLock cannot switch into user mode LOG_ERROR Reset system work area failure The system work area is adjusted when in user mode to cover the taskbar area The system work area has to be adjusted to exclude the taskbar area in administration mode AppLock was unable to adjust this area LOG_ERROR Shift pressed The Shift key has been pressed and trapped by the HotKey processing LOG_EX Shift Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Show taskbar The taskbar is now being made visible and enabled LOG_PROCESSING Switching to admin backdoor The system is currently in user mode and is now switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of the backdoor key pres
326. s found in this chapter are to be used as examples only the configuration of your specific VX7 computer may vary The following sections provide a general reference for the configuration of the VX7 and some of its optional features Your VX7 operating system may be Windows CE NET 4 2 or Windows CE 5 0 The VX7 operating system is displayed on the Desktop as Windows CE NET or Windows CE This is the factory default value for the Desktop Display Background This chapter presents information and procedures for Windows CE 5 0 only Windows CE NET 4 2 information and procedures are contained in Appendix C VX7 CE NET 4 2 Windows CE Operating System LA For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE user s guides or the Windows CE on line Help application installed with the VX7 This chapter s contents assume the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers Therefore the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the VX7 and its Windows CE environment Wireless Network Configuration Warmboot Coldboot All radio configuration is included in Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration A warmboot reboots the computer without erasing any registry data However any applications installed to RAM are lost as is all data in RAM This happens because the operating system is stored
327. s the VX7 has TFT LCD screen with no provision for contrast adjustments The 2 functions of the F8 and F9 keys are not used as the sound volume on the VX7 is controlled with the Volume and Sounds icon in the Microsoft Windows CE Control Panel The lt F10 gt key is used to toggle the backlight as part of the keypress sequence lt 2 lt CTRL gt lt F10 gt This key sequence immediately toggles the status of the keyboard backlight Pressing lt 2 gt lt F10 gt has no effect on the keyboard backlight 1007940999908 00601000006 Saveccesnt Lll 1 Display Brightness Control Keys Not used 2 Display Contrast Control Keys Not S EVEVES ES E s co u F F F F ro J rio gt a 8 Speaker Volume e E E Control Keys Not used 4 Backlight Control Key See above Figure 2 36 The VMT Keyboard Display Controls VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Keyboards 61 Custom Key Maps A key or combination of keys can be remapped to provide a single keypress a string of keypresses or to execute an application or command All key remapping is done using the KeyPad option in the Control Panel Please see KeyPad in Chapter 3 System Configuration for details General Windows CE Keyboard Shortcuts Use the keyboard shortcuts in the chart below to navigate with any VX7 keyboard These are standard keyboard shortcuts for Windows CE applications Press these keys T05
328. seconds for 802 1 1a b g radio BG Channel Set Defines the 2 4GHz channels to be scanned for an AP when the radio is contemplating roaming By specifying the channels to search roaming time may be reduced over scanning all channels Options Full all channels 1 6 11 the most commonly used channels 1 7 13 For ETSI and TELEC radios only Custom see Note above Default Full DFS Channels Not currently supported Support for 5GHz 802 11a channels where support for DFS is required Options On Off Default Off Aggressive Scan When set to On and the current connection to an AP becomes weak the radio scans for available APs more aggressively Aggressive scanning work with standard scanning set through Roam Trigger Roam Delta and Roam Period Aggressive scanning should b set to On unless there is significant co channel interference because of overlapping APs on the same channel Options On Off Default On VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 201 CCX Features Use of Cisco Compatible Extensions CCX radio management and AP specified maximum transmit power features Options Full or On Use Cisco IE and CCX version number support all CCX features Optimized Use Cisco IE and CCX version number support all CCX features except AP assisted roaming AP specified max transmit power and radio management Off Do not use Cisco IE and CCX version Default Off for 802 1 1b g radio Optimized for 802
329. sensitivity properties and or calibrate the touch panel System Review System and Computer data and revision levels Adjust Storage and Program memory settings Volume and Sounds Set volume parameters and assign sound wav files to Windows CE events Wi Fi Set the parameters for a Summit radio See Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration for details on the SCU About Access Start Settings Control Panel About Displays hardware and software details Tab Title Contents Software GUID Windows Windows CE version OAL Version Bootloader Version Compile Version FPGA Version and Language Hardware CPU Type Codec Type FPGA Version Scanner type Display Flash memory and DRAM memory Versions LXE Utilities LXE Drivers LXE Image LXE API and Internet Explorer Network IP Current network connection IP and MAC address User application version information can be shown in the Version window Version window information is taken from the registry Modify the Registry using the Registry Editor see section titled VX7 Utilities LXE recommends caution when editing the Registry and also recommends making a backup copy of the registry before changes are made The registry settings for the Version window are under HKEY LOCAL MACHINE Software V LXE Version in the registry Create a new string value under this key The string name should be the Application
330. ses were entered by the administrator LOG_PROCESSING VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC AppLock Error Messages 345 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Switching to admin hotkey press The system is currently in user mode and is now LOG_PROCESSING switching to admin mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator Switching to admin kbdhook dll not The keyboard hook load failed so AppLock switches to LOG PROCESSING found admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered Switching to admin keyboard hook If the keyboard hook initialization fails AppLock LOG_PROCESSING initialization failure switches to admin mode If a password is specified the password prompt is displayed and remains until a valid password is entered Switching to admin registry read See the explanation of the Registry read failure above LOG_PROCESSING failure AppLock is switching into Admin mode If a password has been configured the prompt will be displayed and will not be dismissed until a valid password is entered Switching to TaskbarScreenMode In administration mode the taskbar is visible and LOG_EX enabled Switching to user mode The registry was successfully read and AppLock is LOG_PROCESSING starting the process to switch to user mode Switching to user hotkey press The system is c
331. ss Start Settings Control Panel Display Icon Set background graphic color scheme appearance and power scheme properties Factory Default Settings Background Windowsce Tile Disable Appearance Scheme Windows Standard Backlight Battery Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Time 30 seconds External Auto Turn Off Enabled Idle Time 2 minutes Background There is no change from general desktop PC Display Properties Background options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Appearance No change from general desktop PC Display Properties Appearance options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately The default is Windows Standard Backlight Display Properties Ed OK x1 Background Appearance Backlight To save battery life you can adjust when the backlight automatically shuts off Automatically turn off backlight while on battery power Turn aff after fac seconds gt of continuous idle time Automatically turn off backlight while on external power Turn off 2 minutes gt of continuous idle time Figure C 10 Display Properties Backlight Tab Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately When the backlight timer expires the display and display backlight turned off Note The display can also be configured to turn off when the vehicle to wh
332. ss radio button and entering the desired IP address subnet mask and gateway Cisco Wireless Lan Adapter Settings m OK E3 IP Address An IP address can be Obtain an IP address via DHCP automatically assigned to this computer If your network Specify an IP address does not automatically assign e IP addresses ask your network IP Address administrator for an address Subnet Mask aa and then type it in the space gt provided Default Gateway as Figure C 13 Network Connection Properties E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 326 Control Panel Options Owner Access Start Settings Control Panel Owner Icon Set VX7 owner details Factory Default Settings Identification Blank Notes Blank There is no change from general desktop PC Owner Properties display Enter the information and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Owner Properties Identification Notes Network ID At Power On Name _ Display owner identification Company Address Work Home Area code Phone Figure C 14 Owner Properties VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options Password Access Start Settings Control Panel Password Icon Set VX7 access power up password properties Factory Default Settings Password Blank At Power On Disabled 327 Note Once a password is assigne
333. stalled software installed on the VX7 is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the VX7 The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software installed Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level i e in the example below the revision level is 2BT About OK E Software Hardware Versions Network IP LXE CF Radio Driver SGCFGCECO1A NET Compact Framework v1 1 Internet Explorer MSIE 6 0 LXE Utilities YXCPC422BT LXE Drivers VXCPC422BT LXE Image P2 VACPC422BT Figure C 4 About Properties Versions Radio MAC Address The Network IP tab displays the MAC address of the radio card About kd OK ES Software Hardware Versions Network IP l Adapter 0 5M5C1111 Adapter 1 CISCO1 MAC 00 40 FD 00 00 00 MAC 00 0F 34 00 00 00 IP 0 0 0 0 IP 100 100 100 100 GW GW Figure C 5 About Properties Network IP VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 317 Accessibility Access Start Settings Control Panel Accessibility Customize the way the keyboard sound display mouse automatic reset and notification sound function There is no change from general desktop Accessibility options Adjust the settings and click the OK box to save the changes The changes take effect immediately Accessibility Keyboard Sound Display Mouse General Use Sticky
334. sword is Case Sensitive Default SUMMIT Note Password is case sensitive Auth Timeout Specifies the number of seconds the Summit software waits for an EAP authentication request to succeed or fail If the authentication credentials are stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the association fails No error message or prompting for corrected credentials is displayed If the authentication credentials are not stored in the active profile and the authentication times out the user is again prompted to enter the credentials Options An integer from 3 to 60 Default 8 Certs Path A valid directory path of up to 64 characters where Root CA certificates for EAP authentication PEAP MSCHAP PEAP GTC EAP TLS and manual PACs for EAP TLS are stored The Windows certificate store can also be used to store Root CA certificates User certificates EAP TLS must be stored in the Windows certificate store LXE suggests ensuring the directory path currently exists before assigning the path in this parameter For example if the certificate is stored in My Computer System mycertificate cer enter System in the Certs Path text box as the directory path Default System Ping Payload Maximum amount of data to be transmitted on a ping Options 32 64 128 256 512 1024 bytes Default 32 E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 204 Summit Radio Ping Timeout ms The amount of time in milliseconds that a device w
335. t wait before starting to run after reboot Note Delay Global may not be available in all versions of AppLock You can simulate a Global Delay function by setting a delay for the first application lowest Order launched and setting the delay to O for all other applications See Boot Options Input Panel Default is Disabled Enable check to show the Keyboard option on the Switchpad menu When enabled the input panel cannot be enabled or disabled for each individual application and is available to the user for all configured applications Clear Button Tap the Clear button to clear all currently displayed Filename or Application information The Global settings are not cleared E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 278 Application Configuration Option Explanation Scroll Buttons Use the left and right scroll buttons to move from application setup screen to application setup screen The left and right buttons update the information on the screen with the previous or next configured application respectively VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Application Configuration 279 Launch Button Note The Launch button may not be available in all versions of Multi AppLock Contact your LXE representative for assistance downloads and AppLock update availability When clicked displays the Launch options panel for the Filename selected on the Administration panel Application Launch
336. t configuration are included in the ActiveSync section later in this chapter LXEConnect allows a user to view the VX7 screen remotely from a PC using an ActiveSync connection Install LXEConnect 1 Install Microsoft ActiveSync version 3 8 or higher on a PC with a USB port For details please see ActiveSync later in this chapter 2 Power up the VX7 3 Connect the VX7 to the PC using the proper connection cable Once connected the ActiveSync dialog box appears If using the USB connection the ActiveSync connection is automatically established If using a serial connection it is necessary to initiate the connection from the VX7 4 Select No for partnership when prompted Dismiss any ActiveSync dialog boxes warning a partnership is not set up It is not necessary to establish a partnership to use LXEConnect However if a partnership is desired for other reasons one may be established now More details on partnerships are included in ActiveSync later in this chapter 5 When the ActiveSync screen appears select Explore Microsoft ActiveSync I ES File View Tools Help e o saa 5top Details Explore Options Guest Connected Information Type Status Figure 1 7 ActiveSync Explore 6 Anexplorer window is displayed for the VX7 Browse to the System LXEConnect folder VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Configuring the VX7 with LXEConnect 13 LXEConnect
337. t if devices request to pair Disabled Continuous search Disabled Bluetooth taskbar Icon state and Bluetooth device Icon states change as Bluetooth devices are discovered pair connect and disconnect There may be audible or visual signals as paired devices re connect with the mobile device e The default Bluetooth setting is On and all options on the Settings Panel are enabled e The VX7 cannot be discovered by other Bluetooth devices when the Computer is discoverable option is disabled unchecked on the Settings panel e Other Bluetooth devices cannot be discovered if they have been set up to be Non Discoverable or Invisible e The mobile device can pair with one Bluetooth scanner and one Bluetooth printer e tis not necessary to disconnect a paired scanner and printer before a different scanner or printer is paired with the VX7 e The Bluetooth device should be as close as possible line of sight to the mobile device during the pairing process Assumption The System Administrator has Discovered and Paired targeted Bluetooth devices for the VX7 The VX7 operating system has been upgraded to the revision level required for Bluetooth client operation E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 98 Control Panel Options Discover LXEZ Pairing Bluetooth Devices Settings Bluetooth Address Discover Figure 3 8 Control Panel Bluetooth Tap the Discover button to locate all discoverable Bluetooth devices in t
338. t with 01 The barcodes are different lengths e 34 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 18 e 26 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 10 e 24 character length with first two characters 01 strip first 2 and last 8 This 24 character barcode is CODE128 e 20 character length with first two characters 00 strip first 0 no characters and last 4 On the Barcode tab set Enable Code ID to AIM Create four custom IDs using 1 for EAN128 barcode and 0 for Code128 barcode e cl Code Cl e c2 Code Cl e c3 Code C0 24 character barcode is CODE128 e c4 Code C1 Custom IDs MN CE joe ES nmn 00 ci cr E JC1 pe M ID Code c4 ci El Figure 4 10 AIM Custom IDs AIM custom symbology setup is assigned in the following manner e cl min length 34 max length 34 strip leading 2 strip trailing 18 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c2 min length 26 max length 26 strip leading 2 strip trailing 10 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Length Based Barcode Stripping 181 e c3 min length 24 max length 24 strip leading 2 strip trailing 8 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 01 e c4 min length 20 max length 20 strip leading 0 strip trailing 4 Code ID enabled Barcode Data 00 Add the AIM custom symbolo
339. tal number to avoid duplicate names e The SSID parameter is assigned the value of the SSID of the AP Other profile entries must be completed manually Click the Refresh button to update the display E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 194 Summit Radio Parameters IMPORTANT Remember to click the Commit button after making changes to ensure the changes are saved Newer versions of the SCU display a reminder if the Commit button is not clicked before an attempt it made to close or browse away from the Config tab if there are unsaved changes If changes are made to the stored credentials click Commit to save those changes before making any additional changes to the profile parameters Config A string of 1 to 32 alphanumeric characters name of the Profile Default Default SSID A string of up to 32 alphanumeric characters the Service Set Identifier SSID of the WLAN to which the radio connects Default Blank Client Name A string of up to 16 characters Name assigned to the radio and the device using the radio The client name may be passed to networking radio devices e g Access Points Default Blank Power Save Power save mode Options CAM Constantly Awake Mode power save off Maximum Maximum power saving mode Fast Fast power saving mode Default Fast Tx Power Desired transmit power Options Maximum Max power for current regulatory domain 50 30 20 10 5 or 1 mW Default Maximum Bit Rat
340. ter 3 System Configuration Windows CE NET 4 2 Operating System LA For general use instruction please refer to commercially available Windows CE user s guides or the Windows CE on line Help application installed with the VX7 This chapter s contents assume the system administrator is familiar with Microsoft Windows options and capabilities loaded on most standard Windows computers Therefore the sections that follow describe only those Windows capabilities that are unique to the VX and its Windows CE environment Wireless Network Configuration All radio configuration is included in Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration Warmboot A warmboot reboots the computer without erasing any registry data However any applications installed to RAM are lost as is all data in RAM This happens because the operating system is stored on the flash drive but must be loaded into RAM to run All registry configurations are automatically preserved Any applications stored as CAB files in the System directory and configured in the registry to persist are reinstalled on boot up by the Launch utility Coldboot A coldboot reboots the computer erases all registry data and returns the computer to factory default settings In order to be preserved applications and data must be stored in the System folder Registry information is not preserved Only factory default applications and drivers stored as CAB files in the System directory are l
341. terere iterom Eos 6 Specifications esee eee 295 PREGEDIT EXE e itirrnite eines 138 Pre loaded Files 80 136 302 Printer Serial Port esse 36 Processing order sess 169 Prompt Command cani a treten aae 88 310 PS 2 MOUS se idee re ec TED Te ERE 10 Q Quick Start Instructions sse 4 R Radio MAC Address eee 94 316 Radio Specifications 2 4 GHZ ici ROREM 298 299 Rates OBERE anun 109 323 Recalibrati0N ocooooononoccccnoncccnononancnnnancnronnnoos 125 333 Reason di ais 140 141 Regional Setting eese 124 331 Registry and save settings 23 Registry content back up location eee 129 Registry settings APPlOCk T 347 REGLOAD EXE retirer eere e Eae eps 138 Remote desktop connection sss 89 311 Remove user installed programs 124 331 Repeat iid doo eeu etes 109 323 TA 175 E EQ VX7RG L ARC 365 R solution rer E eas 29 Resolution Specifications sss 297 Reverso Pola ositos 76 Revision HIStOTY sese 355 Revision Level Hard Water 27 29 186 229 SOltw ate naaa 27 Root CA Certificates A ehe Dette 255 Installing on VX7 sse 257 RS 232 Data Entry aeree reine 8 Rules Match list iuit eaa peter tit Reinas 173 Mate MISE uobis ONE 173 S Save settings iiser issirinko eni 23 Scan K
342. th automatic or manual PAC provisioning With automatic PAC provisioning the user credentials whether entered on the saved credentials screen or the sign on screen are sent to the RADIUS server The RADIUS server must have auto provisioning enabled to send the PAC provisioning credentials to the client device Please refer to the LXE Security Primer for more information on the RADIUS server configuration Summit Client Main Profile cars E ES wea TKIP y EAP FAST WEP keys PSKs Credentials Figure 5 26 EAP FAST Configuration For automatic PAC provisioning once a username password is authenticated the PAC information is stored on the computer The same username password must be used to authenticate each time See the note on the next page for more details For manual PAC provisioning the PAC filename and Password must be entered Please review Sign On vs Stored Credentials earlier in this chapter VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Summit Radio 221 The entries on the Credentials screen are determined by the type of credentials stored or sign on and the type of PAC provisioning automatic or manual Click on the Credentials button To use Stored Credentials click on the Credentials button No entries are necessary for Sign On Credentials with automatic PAC provisioning as the user will be prompted for the Username and Password when connecting to the network Credentials
343. the Key provided automatically checkbox e Ifyou wish to enter your Authentication key uncheck the Key provided automatically checkbox and enter the Network Key in the Network Key text box e Tap the OK button to return to the Wireless Information tab E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 254 Symbol Radio Continue Tap the Advanced button on the Wireless Information Tab Make sure there is a checkmark in the Use Windows to configure my wireless settings checkbox Make sure there is no checkmark in the Automatically connect to non preferred networks checkbox Tap OK to return to the Wireless Information tab Tap the Connect button Advanced Wireless Settings x Use Windows to configure my wireless settings E Automatically connect to Networks to All available y non preferred networks access Ok Cancel Figure 5 78 Symbol Advanced Wireless Settings To access NETWLANI Properties again double tap the Network Connected icon in the Toolbar Select a User Certificate 1 eeu d pes qa Select Wireless Information Tab Select a network by double tapping the network name In the IEEE 802 1X Authentication box enable 802 1X authentication Select an EAP type Tap the Properties button Validate Server is enabled by default At the Authentication Settings display tap the Select button to choose a User Certificate VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Certificates 25
344. the EAP type box text is not exactly as shown see Installing Radio Drivers earlier in this chapter to change the radio cab file Click the Properties button PEAP Properties Validate server certificate Connect only if server name ends in Trusted root certificate fal Connect only if server is signed by specified trusted root CA Always try to resume secure session Figure 5 51 PEAP Properties When first configuring and authenticating do not validate the server certificate This allows the user authentication to be tested When user authentication is successful return to this screen and validate the server certificate as shown later in this section Check the Always try to resume secure session box VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 239 Note This box must be checked for the LXE device to roam from one AP to another AP Click the OK button The login screen appears for logging into the wireless network Enter Network Password a gt Figure 5 52 Login Screen Enter valid user credentials Once authenticated click the IP Information tab CISCO1 Figure 5 53 IP Information Tab The device displays the IP address given by the DHCP server Now go back and authenticate the server E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 240 Cisco Radio Server Authentication To validate the server certificate the root CA certificate must be installed For instructions for
345. the VX7 The mobile Bluetooth scanner imager requires this information before discovering pairing connecting or disconnecting can occur Important The VX7 Bluetooth address identifier label should remain protected from damage rips tears spills soiling erasure etc at all times It may be required when pairing connecting and disconnecting new Bluetooth barcode readers VX7 with Label If the VX7 has a Bluetooth address barcode label attached follow these steps 1 Scan the Bluetooth address barcode label attached to the VX7 with the LXE Bluetooth mobile scanner 2 If this is the first time the Bluetooth scanner has scanned the VX7 Bluetooth label the devices are paired See section titled Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications If the devices do not pair successfully go to the next step Open the LXEZ Pairing panel Start Settings Control Panel Bluetooth Tap Discover Locate the Bluetooth scanner in the Discovery panel Doubletap the stylus on the Bluetooth scanner The right mouse click menu appears SN GEN Re 9 Select Pair as Scanner to pair the VX7 with the Bluetooth mobile scanner VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Bluetooth 21 The devices are paired The Bluetooth barcode reader responds with a series of beeps and LED flashes Refer to the following section titled Bluetooth Beep and LED Indications Note After scanning the VX7 Bluetooth label if there is no beep and no LED
346. the VX7 See also Chapter 1 Introduction section ActiveSync Initial Setup Requirement ActiveSync version 3 7 or higher must be resident on the host desktop laptop computer ActiveSync is available from the Microsoft website Follow their instructions to locate download and install ActiveSync on your desktop computer For more information about using ActiveSync on your desktop computer open ActiveSync then open ActiveSync Help See also section titled Backup VX7 Files Using ActiveSync for more ActiveSync information Synchronizing from the VX7 using a USB ActiveSync connection You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device 1 To initiate synchronization from your device connect the USB cable to the PC and to the dongle cable on the VX7 The VX7 connects automatically 2 Click the Syne Now button to synchronize with the PC 3 Click the Disconnect button or remove the cable to disconnect 4 To modify the Synchronization settings see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC Synchronizing from the VX7 using Serial or RF connection You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device 1 To initiate synchronization from your device tap Start Programs Communication
347. the application and has to wait until it has created and initialized its main window This message is logged when the function that waits for the application initialization is entered Enter DecryptPwd Entering the password decryption process LOG_PROCESSING VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC AppLock Error Messages 341 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Enter EncryptPwd Entering the password encryption processing LOG_PROCESSING Enter FullScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen mode In LOG_PROCESSING full screen mode the taskbar is hidden and disabled Enter GetAppInfo Processing is at the beginning of the function that LOG_PROCESSING retrieves the application information from the registry Enter password dialog Entering the password dialog processing LOG_PROCESSING Enter password timeout Entering the password timeout processing LOG_PROCESSING Enter restart app timer Some application shut down before AppLock can stop LOG_PROCESSING it In these cases AppLock gets notification of the exit When the notification is received AppLock starts a timer to restart the application This message logs that the timer has expired and the processing is at the beginning of the timer function Enter TaskbarScreenMode Entering the function that switches the screen to non full LOG_PROCESSING screen mode and enable the taskbar
348. the user The data displayed is the result of the device Query performed during the Discovery process The Status dialog box reflects the current state of the highlighted device VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options Settings Turn Off Bluetooth Button 101 LXEZ Pairing OK x Bluetooth Devices Settings About V Report when connection lost Turn Off Bluetooth L Report when reconnected v Report failure to reconnect v Computer is connectable y Computer is discoverable Prompt if devices request to pair Continuous search Computer Friendly Name Lx BT Terminal Figure 3 13 Bluetooth Device Settings Panel Tap the button to toggle Bluetooth hardware On or Off The default value is Bluetooth On Options Option Default Information Report when Enabled There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection connection lost between a paired active device is lost A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box Report when Disabled There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection reconnected between a paired active device is re connected A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box Report failure to Enabled The time delay is 30 minutes This value cannot be changed reconnect by the
349. tials If using the Windows certificate store e Check the Use MS store checkbox The default is to use the Full Trusted Store e To select an individual certificate click on the Browse button e Uncheck the Use full trusted store checkbox e Select the desired certificate and click Select You are returned to the Credentials screen If using the Certs Path option e Leave the Use MS store box unchecked e Enter the certificate filename in the CA Cert textbox Click OK then click Commit The device should be authenticating the server certificate and using EAP TLS for the user authentication For information on generating a Root CA certificate please see Root CA Certificate later in this chapter For more information on generating a User certificate see User Certificate later in this chapter Note The date must be properly set on the device to authenticate a certificate E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 224 Summit Radio WPA PSK To connect using WPA PSK make sure the following profile options are used e Enter the SSID of the Access Point assigned to this profile e Set EAP Type to None e Set Encryption to WPA PSK e Set Auth Type to Open Summit Client Utility Figure 5 31 WPA PSK Encryption Click WEP keys PSKs button PSK Entry Figure 5 32 PSK Entry This value can be 64 hex characters or an 8 to 63 byte ASCII value Enter the key and click OK Once configured click the Com
350. ting the number of seconds to wait after installing the CAB file but before activating the slot a latency to allow the thread loading the driver to finish installation The default value of 0 means the slot is not powered on The default values for the default wireless client drivers listed below is 1 meaning one second elapses between the CAB file loading and the slot powering up Note that the auto launch process can also launch batch files BAT executable files EXE registry setting files REG or sound files WAV The mechanism is the same as listed above but the appropriate CE application is called depending on file type Registry information is already in the default image for the following 5 autoexec batch file for users convenience HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist AUTOEXEC FileName System Autoexec bat Installed dword 0 FileCheck ALWAYSEXEC Order dword 50 The file name ALWAYSEXEC or dummy does not really matter as long as there is no file of that name in the directory You can use any name that you want for this entry as long as it is a non existent file name The purpose of this value is that if someone wants to only execute this file one time then you would replace the value of FileCheck with the name of a file that would exist the next time a warm boot occurs 3 RFTerm support HKEY LOCAL _MACHINE SOFTWARE LXE Persist LXE TE FileName System
351. tionally this assembly provides a connection point for the vehicle s chassis ground to be connected internally to the conductive chassis of the computer The VX7 internal power supply can accept DC input voltages in the range of 12 to 80 Volts 1 5 Figure 2 20 The Power Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 DC Positive UPS Battery Positive Chassis Ground UPS Battery Negative DC Negative nA Bb W N VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC External Connectors 49 UPS Battery Pack Connectors Input 5 Figure 2 21 The UPS Battery Pack Input Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 DC Positive Not used Chassis Ground Not used DC Negative nan A WwW N Output 5 Figure 2 22 The UPS Battery Pack Output Connector Pinout Pin Signal 1 DC Positive UPS Battery Positive Chassis Ground UPS Battery Negative DC Negative nA Bb W N E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 50 External Connectors UPS Battery Extension Cable Connectors Input Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 Output Pinout Pin 1 2 3 4 5 VX7 Reference Guide 5 Figure 2 23 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Input Connector Signal DC Positive UPS Battery Positive Chassis Ground UPS Battery Negative DC Negative 5 Figure 2 24 The UPS Battery Extension Cable Output Connector Signal DC Positive UPS Battery Positive Chassis Ground UPS Battery Negative DC Negative
352. tiveSync cable VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC ActiveSync Initial Setup 15 ActiveSync Initial Setup The following instructions relate to initial setup of ActiveSync When there is a Connect icon on the VX7 desktop this section can be bypassed USB Connection The VX7 is configured to use USB C by default No configuration is necessary Connect the cable to the PC the host and to the dongle cable on the VX7 the client The ActiveSync connection is established automatically when the cable is connected Cables for USB ActiveSync Connection USB Client to PC Laptop Dongle cable w USB C 9000075CABLE connector Also requires a standard USB cable with a type A plug on one end and a type B plug on the other Serial Connection Connect Radio Select Start Settings Control Panel PC Connection Click the Change button From the popup list choose the appropriate COM port and baud rate This will set up the VX7 to use the USB or designated COM port Click OK and ensure the check box for Allow connection with desktop computer when device is attached is checked Click OK to return to the Control Panel Note By default COM3 labeled COM2 3 is configured to use ActiveSync Pin 9 RI Please refer to Serial Port Pin 9 in Chapter 4 Scanner fore details on configuring Pin 9 of the serial ports Connect the correct cable to the PC the host and the VX7 the client Select Connect from the
353. to Chapter 3 System Configuration Configuration Revised Software Load LAUNCH EXE Control Panel Options and Scanner section Scanner information is now included in Chapter 6 Scanner Added new section Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration Chapter 4 Scanner Created new chapter with scanner information removed from Chapter 4 System Configuration and updated as necessary Chapter 5 Wireless Network Revised Summit Radio section to include new Sign On screen and Configuration support for PEAP GTC Chapter 6 AppLock Revised Setup A New Device Revision F November 2007 Revised Accessories listing Chapter 2 Physical Added Bluetooth information Description and Layout Revised Vehicle 12 80VDC Power Connection with updated graphic Chapter 3 System Added Bluetooth information Configuration Revised Mixer and Step 3 Check Barcode Length sections Revised Enabling GrabTime Revised Wavelink Avalanche Enabler Configuration for Avalanche Mobility Center Chapter 5 Wireless Network Updated chapter for EAP FAST support tray icon help feature etc Configuration included in latest version of SCU Revised section Admin login E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 358 Revision History Revision G May 2008 Chapter 1 Introduction Revised Accessories listing Chapter 2 Physical Revised Install
354. tools to trouble shoot application lock failures WM_WINDOWPOSCHG Output the window size after it has been adjusted by LOG_EX adjusted x AppLock VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC AppLock Registry Settings 347 AppLock Registry Settings This system application runs at startup via the launch feature of LXE Windows CE devices When the launch feature is installed on the device the following registry settings are created The launch feature registry settings are embedded in the mobile device OS image HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Persist Filename AppLock exe HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Persist Installed HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Persist FileCheck AppLock registry settings identify the application that is going to be locked and any parameters that are needed by the application These registry settings are as follows HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE Administration AppName HKEY LOCAL MACHINENNSoftwareNNLXENNAppCommandLine In addition to the registry settings needed to specify the application additional registry settings are needed to store the configuration options for AppLock These options include among others the administrator s password and hotkey HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE AppLock Administration HotKey HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE Software LXE AppLock Administration EP E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Referen
355. tooth Address Barcode Label ion tn bre recie er tena 20 About Taband Bhietootl AdUEe 88 o ioter ads ra REDUCE rre Hes pan iE ERE RUE ebbe rx Flos ado 2 VXI Hardware Configuration cii Gto cit Et rrt rb per rtp rre erit a 28 The Power OO Bb SITO sss one REO ER IUE UNE UU MU RISE 34 Scanner Serial Connector COM V ssiri irte tectae ette ertt EHE anaE EE n E EAR REEE EEE 35 Printer PC Serial Connector GOMS vasito UR ER A EEE 36 Pinout s Serial Cable oie raid 37 Pinout Screen Blanking Cable cosas oca iia 38 Sample Cable for Sereen Bankdlg lat air ERE 38 VX7 Keyboard Connector and External Keyboard Cable Connector sss 39 VXT PS 2 Keyboard Mouse Dongle Cable ion iii id 40 DO Male Connector aus 40 PS 2 Keyboard COrngGtOf rain onore bandera dera 41 PS2 Mouss A NL 41 VX7 USB Connector and External USB Adapter Cable Connector esses 42 VXT Bthernet USB Dongle Cables iiie reete rre RE HERE EE EE ERG 43 DIS Female CONDES aceras db ria po uec nian iano arti ee eS 44 Dont le Cable USB Host Porta 45 Dongle Cable USB Client BOrt 3 ace P Dre tap de re eto ie une 45 Dongle Cable Ethernet Porta e coeds Vua ames NORM 46 VX7 Audio Jack for External Speaker or Headphones iss ise ori rte ette tpe tinet OG ee 47 The Power Connectors oon HEROS lariat io 48 The UPS Battery Pack Input Connectors ou oe nece ndo ee ur Cei REM DE Re ro Giantess tanneries 49 The UPS Battery Pack Output Connect se iac t errat pc
356. top icons with Asian names the font does not work for third party NET applications the font does not work for some third party MFC applications E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 94 Control Panel Options Identifying Software Versions The Versions tab displays the versions of many of the software programs installed Not all installed software installed on the VX7 is included in this list and the list varies depending on the applications loaded on the VX7 The LXE Image line displays the revision of the system software installed Please refer to the last three digits to determine the revision level i e in the example below the revision level is 2BT About OK E Software Hardware Versions Network IP LXE CF Radio Driver SGCFGCECO1A NET Compact Framework v1 1 Internet Explorer MSIE 6 0 LXE Utilities YXCPC422BT LXE Drivers VXCPC422BT LXE Image P2 VACPC422BT Figure 3 4 About Properties Versions Radio MAC Address The Network IP tab displays the MAC address of the radio card About kd OK ES Software Hardware Versions Network IP l Adapter 0 5M5C1111 Adapter 1 CISCO1 MAC 00 40 FD 00 00 00 MAC 00 0F 34 00 00 00 IP 0 0 0 0 IP 100 100 100 100 GW GW Figure 3 5 About Properties Network IP VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Control Panel Options 95 Accessibility Access Start Settings Control Panel Accessibility
357. tor may need to reconfigure the AppLock parameters LXE has made the assumption in this chapter that the first user to power up a new mobile device is the system administrator Note AppLock Administrator Control panel file Launch option does not inter relate with similarly named options contained in other LXE Control Panels Note A few applications do not follow normal procedures when closing AppLock cannot prevent this type of application from closing but is notified that the application has closed For these applications AppLock immediately restarts the application see Auto Re Launch which causes the screen to flicker If this type of application is being locked the administrator should close all other applications before switching to end user mode to minimize the screen flicker AppLock is updated periodically as new options become available Contact your LXE representative for assistance downloads and update availability E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 270 Introduction Determining Your AppLock Version Multi Application AppLock A mobile device running the Multi Application version of AppLock becomes a dedicated dual application device Only the applications or features specified in the AppLock configuration by the Administrator are available to the end user This version offers a user mode taskbar icon allowing the end user to switch between user applications If your Administrator Control Panel has Application Se
358. trol E OK El Main com coma Barcode Port 2 O disabled disabled O Bluetooth O comi O coma O comi O coma O com1 serctl COM3 Serctl comi serctl coms SerCtl Output Enable C Output Enable _ Power Port 1 while asleep Send Key Messages WEDGE Enable Internal Scanner Sound 3000 On Delay Ms Figure 4 13 Enable Screen Blanking If the COM1 COM3 screen blanking and On Delay choices are not shown the system load must be updated Warning Do not select COMI SerCtl or COM3 SerCtl unless you have already attached the cable described in Technical Specifications Screen Blanking Cable in Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout Failure to attach the cable before selecting a screen blanking option will cause the screen to go blank and remain blank until an appropriate cable is attached to the specified COM port Set the desired COM port COMI ScrCtl or COM3 ScrCtl and On Delay Press OK The On Delay can be used to specify the time in milliseconds before the display turns on For example use the On Delay if the switch end of the cable is attached to the vehicle s accelerator pedal Release of the accelerator may mean the truck is coasting to a stop rather than stationary Configure the delay to allow time for the vehicle to coast to a stop To disable screen blanking select COM1 or COM3 to return the selected COM port to normal operation VX7 Reference Gui
359. ts a unique computer name and a random number generated when the partnership is first created An ActiveSync partnership between a unique client can be established to two hosts If the VX7 is cold booted the random number is deleted and the partnership with the last one of the two hosts is also deleted The host retains the random numbers and unique names of all devices having a partnership with it Two clients cannot have a partnership with the same host if they have the same name Control Panel System Device Name If the cold booted VX7 tries to reestablish the partnership with the same host PC a new random number is generated for the VX7 and ActiveSync will insist the unique name of the VX7 be changed If the VX7 is associated with a second host changing the name will destroy that partnership as well This can cause some confusion when re establishing partnerships with hosts VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Backup VX7 Files using ActiveSync 133 Troubleshooting ActiveSync on the host says that a device is trying to connect but it cannot identify it One or more control lines are not connected This is usually a cable problem but on a laptop or other device it may indicate a bad serial port ActiveSync indicator on the host disc in the toolbar tray turns green and spins as soon as you connect the cable before clicking the Connect icon or REPLLOG EXE in the Windows directory One or more control lines are t
360. tup Because copying these has no effect on the system or an incorrect effect Files in the Startup folder are executed but only from System Startup Windows Startup is parsed too early in the boot process so it has no effect Executables in System Startup must be the actual executable not a shortcut because shortcuts are not parsed by launch My Computer Folders Folder Description Preserved upon Reboot System Internal ATA Card Yes Network Mounted network drive No Storage Card ATA Card in Compact Flash or SD Card No Media Card SD Memory Card No Windows Operating System in ROM No Program Files Applications No Application Data Data saved by running applications No My Documents Storage for downloaded files applications No Temp Location for temporary files No VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Start Menu Program Options Start Menu Program Options 307 The following options represent the factory default program installation Your system may be different based on the software and hardware options purchased Access Start Programs Cisco Communication ActiveSync Connect Start FTP Server Stop FTP Server Microsoft File Viewers Excel Viewer Image Viewer PDF Viewer Word Viewer Summit Command Prompt Inbox Internet Explorer Java LXE RFTerm Media Player Microsoft WordPad Remote Desktop Connection Transcriber Avalanche Windows Explorer Set Cisco radio
361. tus panel displays the current status of the mobile device network adapter selected in the drop down box Note the availability of the Windows standard Refresh button When tapped the signal strength signal quality and link speed are refreshed for the currently selected adapter It also searches for new adapters and may cause a slight delay to refresh the contents of the drop down menu Avalanche Update Settings Scan Config Display Shortcuts Adapters Status soccF1061 T al Signal Strength Signal Quality PMI TH SSID SSID2 IP Addr 100 100 100 100 MAC 00 17 23 00 00 00 Speed 11 0 Mbps BSSID 00 02 2d 00 00 00 Figure 3 51 Status Display Link speed indicates the speed at which the signal is being sent from the adapter to the mobile device Speed is dependent on signal strength VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC eXpress Scan 159 eXpress Scan eXpress Scan may be used for the initial network configuration of the mobile device Available configuration parameters can include wireless network settings and the Avalanche Mobile Device Server Address Barcodes are created with the eXpress Config utility Please refer to Using Wavelink Avalanche on LXE Windows Computers available on the LXE manuals CD for information on eXPress Config Depending on the barcode length and the number of parameters selected eXpress Config generates one or more barcodes for device configuration To use eXpress
362. ufactured before October 2006 must have drivers and system files upgraded before it can use the Avalanche Enabler functions Please contact an LXE representative for details on upgrading the mobile device baseline If the user is NOT using Wavelink Avalanche to manage their mobile device the Enabler should not be installed on the mobile device Briefly The Wavelink Avalanche Enabler installation file is loaded on the mobile device by LXE however the device is not configured to launch the installation file automatically The installation application must be run manually the first time Avalanche is used After the installation application is manually run a reboot is necessary for the Enabler to begin normal performance Following this reboot the Enabler will by default be an auto launch application This behavior can be modified by accessing the Avalanche Update Settings panel through the Enabler Interface Enabler Install Process e Doubletap the LXE VXC ENABLER CAB file in the System folder e Warm boot the mobile device Because the VX7 has two possible network adapters the internal adapter for a cabled network connection and the wireless network card the Enabler uses the first network adapter it discovers In order to assure the Enabler uses the wireless connection perform one of the following actions e Select the Adapters tab in the Enabler setup See Enabler Configuration later in this chapter and make sure the wireless a
363. ular subject This chapter Introduction briefly describes this reference guide structure contains setup and installation instruction briefly describes data entry processes and explains how to get help Chapter 2 Physical Description and Layout describes the function and layout of the controls and connectors on the VX7 Describes AC power and DC power connections Chapter 3 System Configuration takes you through the system setup and file structure covering all components except the wireless network AppLock and Scanner Chapter 4 Scanner contains information on the scanner keyboard wedge active scanner port and COM port settings such as baud rate parity stop bits and data bits Chapter 5 Wireless Network Configuration details radio setup Configuration for WEP and WPA is included Chapter 6 AppLock contains explanation and instruction when working with VX7 s running AppLock Appendix A Key Maps describes the keypress sequences for the VX7 keyboard options Appendix B Technical Specifications lists technical specifications including physical environmental display and the radios Appendix C VX7 CE NET 4 2 takes you through the Windows CE NET 4 2 system setup and files structure Appendix D Reference Material includes parameter programming charts and other reference information VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC When to Use this Guide Document Conventions This
364. urati n iii reete re 142 BUIE asoma E E E asco SEU 281 Examples Barcode processing seeeeee 179 Control Code replacement 178 raw scanner data and resulting data 179 Expand Control Panel 90 312 External Auto Turn Off sssses 106 321 External Connectors 2 0 0 ceeccseeceseeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeenee 34 ZUDEM 47 Keyboard icit nie 39 IPO WEE 225neoi ipo SERIE RERO MEAE 48 Serial sentes tette escis eden 35 36 Specifications 295 USB EHI UIN UI IINE 42 F Factory Default Settings ATA Compact Flash Slot 122 329 Cisco Client aiitem erri reete 226 Wate Time ss e cec tei tei 104 319 Ibid cm 106 321 Inp t Panel couette 107 322 Internet Options sess 108 323 A 109 323 O WM isses tree eetter Ee Eee Po iii 119 326 PassWord et e CERE P SERE E ERE 120 327 PC Connection occcooonoconcconnninnnanonccinnanonnnonn 121 328 PCMCIA Slots sse 122 329 Regional Settings sss 124 331 SCANNET A eeve E Roe onse EIER err ERIS 124 332 Au M 126 334 Volume Mixer eee 114 324 Factory Default reset to ooooncocnnoniccocnncnoncnanonnonnons 142 ES 1 Flash and Reflash oooooconnnnccccononcccconanccrnnnnnos 140 141 Flash Memory 15 deerit rentre 1 FTP Server start and stop
365. ure 3 21 Figure 3 22 Figure 3 23 Figure 3 24 Figure 3 25 Figure 3 26 Figure 3 27 Figure 3 28 Figure 3 29 Figure 3 30 Figure 3 31 Figure 3 32 Figure 3 33 Figure 3 34 Figure 3 35 Figure 3 36 Figure 3 37 Figure 3 38 Figure 3 39 Figure 3 40 E EQ VX7RG input Panel Properties O Rin ccs Eat eh ame eae 64 The PCMCIA and ATA Slots cisco pican ciao 66 Inserting the Type II PCMCIA Radio onerosa ninia iii 68 Summit 502 11 3 b e Antenna Cable Conbectlol iiu copies n ioter seb bns ex ee AES exo Her cati n 69 Summit 802 11b g Antenna Cable ConnectlOns eese eria iere pt ote oreet eee 70 Cisco Antenna Cable Comectiods oou ener ori Oen RERO EOD ee 70 Symbol TIMDb Antenna Cable Connectas pia 71 Inserting the CF ATA Cardin t rri EHE HORE HE EIU EP IHRE TER iaa T2 Inseiting ihe TA Card iera d OR D bro pron E OR P Dos bares HA Reis 73 Optional Power Supply Cableuinecseo niei atti ret rte E ER OH rege RE ud 74 Direct Vehicle Power Connection Cable 12 Et 2 2 tritt p n rH HS ERR 76 Connec ng the Power Cable to the Vehicles ease eic id 76 Vehicle Connection Wiring Color Codes id ei iei n aee vi e EE PR Eo 76 Power Adapter Cable VX1 2 4 007 VIT iis bore D libido lili 17 FUSE Replacement ii caia 78 Pocket CMD Prompt SOFeetic aav dene rho i Ono T DHT OR ERA EE Er Her peram ads 88 Taskbar Properties ooi er pepe o E te E REED RO TREE PEE Decade p De potesse c e rU tem pepe 90 About Properties SO UWATE ninia amend aude 93 About Properties V CrS
366. ure failure the address of the initialization procedure For some reason the dll is corrupted Look in the Windows directory for kbdhook dll If it exists delete it Also delete AppLock exe from the Windows directory and reboot the unit Deleting AppLock exe triggers the AppLock system to reload Address of keyboard hook AppLock successfully retrieved the address of the LOG_EX procedure OK keyboard filter initialization procedure VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC AppLock Error Messages 339 Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Alt pressed The Alt key has been pressed and trapped by the LOG_EX HotKey processing Alt Processing the hotkey and backdoor entry LOG_EX Application handle search failure The application being locked did not complete LOG_ERROR initialization Application handle search OK The application initialized itself successfully LOG_ERROR Application load failure The application could not be launched by AppLock the LOG ERROR application could not be found or is corrupted Backdoor message received The backdoor keys have been pressed The backdoor LOG_PROCESSING hotkeys provide a method for customer service to get a user back into their system without editing the registry or reloading the device Cannot find kbdhook dll The load of the keyboard filter failed This occurs when LOG_ERROR the dll is missing or is corrupted Look in the Windows dir
367. urrently in admin mode and is now LOG_PROCESSING switching to user mode The switch occurred because of a hotkey press by the administrator Taskbar hook failure AppLock is unable to control the taskbar to prevent the LOG_ERROR locked application from re enabling it Taskbar hook OK AppLock successfully installed control of the taskbar LOG_EX Timeout looking for app window After the application is launched AppLock must wait LOG_ERROR until the application has initialized itself before proceeding The application did not start successfully and AppLock has timed out ToUser after admin not at boot The user mode switch is attempted when the device LOG_EX boots and after the administrator presses the hotkey The mode switch is being attempted after a hotkey press ToUser after admin app still open The switch to user mode is being made via a hotkey LOG_EX press and the administrator has left the application open and has not made any changes in the configuration ToUser after admin no app or cmd If user mode is being entered via a hotkey press the LOG_EX line change administrator may have left the configured application open If so AppLock does not launch the application again unless a new application or command line has been specified otherwise it just locks it E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 346 AppLock Error Messages Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Unable to move desktop The desktop is
368. urs and is intended to be used by the administrator to determine why the specified application cannot be locked Process Processing status shows the flow control of AppLock components and is mainly intended for LXE Customer Service when helping users troubleshoot problems with their AppLock program Extended Extended status provides more detailed information than that logged by Process Logging All All messages are displayed Tap the Refresh button after changing from one view level to another The filtered records are displayed all others are not displayed VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Application Configuration 285 Log Note Ifa level higher than Error is selected the status should be cleared frequently by the administrator In addition to the three view levels the administrator can select that all status information be logged or turn off all status information logging completely The system default is None however to reduce registry use the administrator may want to select None after verifying the configuration Tap the Clear button to clear the status information from the registry e None e Error e Processing e Extended e All Save As When the Save As button is selected a standard Save As dialog screen is displayed Specify the path and filename If the filename exists the user is prompted whether the file should be overwritten If the file does not exist it is created See Also Error Messages
369. use paper towels or harsh chemical based cleaning fluids since they may result in damage to the glass surface Use a clean damp lint free cloth Do not scrub optical surfaces If possible clean only those areas which are soiled Lint particulates can be removed with clean filtered canned air Touchscreen Touchscreen The touchscreen is a Resistive Panel with a scratch resistant finish that can detect touches by a stylus and translate them into computer commands In effect it simulates a computer mouse Only Delrin or plastic styluses should be used A right mouse click is simulated by touching and holding the screen for the appropriate time interval Note Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or making strokes on the display Never use an actual pen pencil or sharp object to write on the touchscreen An extra or replacement stylus may be ordered from LXE See the Accessories section for the stylus part number Please refer to Chapter 3 System Configuration for more information on e Calibrating the touchscreen e Disabling the touchscreen LXE offers a replaceable touchscreen protective film to protect the touchscreen when the VX7 is used in an abrasive environment For information on installing or removing the protective film please refer to the VX7 User s Guide Heater Extended temperature versions of the VX7 contain a touchscreen heater The touchscreen heater can be disabled on Platform 2 VX7 s
370. user There may be an audio or visual signal when a connection between a paired active device is re connected A visual signal may be a dialog box placed on the display Tap the X button or OK button to close the dialog box Possible reasons for failure to reconnect Timeout expired without reconnecting attempted to pair with a device that is currently paired with another device attempted to pair with a known device that moved out of range or was turned off attempted to pair with a known device but the reason why reconnect failed is unknown E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 102 Control Panel Options Option Default Information Computer is Enabled Disable this option to inhibit VX7 connection with all connectable Bluetooth devices Computer is Disabled Enable this option to ensure other devices can discover the discoverable VX7 Prompt if devices Disabled When enabled a dialog box is placed on the display Tap request to pair the X button OK button or No button to close the dialog box Note In some cases if a Bluetooth device is already paired this setting cannot be changed If this is the case an error message is displayed and the option is not changed The Bluetooth device must be disconnected before changing this setting Continuous Search Disabled When enabled the VX7 never stops searching for paired Bluetooth devices that have lost connection When disabled the VX7 stops searching
371. uthenticated to an Access Point The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is 80 dBm or weaker The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is stronger than 80dBm but not stronger than 60 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is stronger than 60 dBm but not stronger than 40 dBm The signal strength for the currently associated authenticated Access Point is stronger than 40 dBm Wireless Zero Config Utility and the Summit Radio The WZC utility has an icon in the toolbar that looks like networked computers with a red X through them indicating that Wireless Zero Config application is enabled but the connection is inactive at this time the VX7 is not connected to a network You can use either the Wireless Zero Configuration Utility or the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network LXE recommends using the Summit Client Utility to connect to your network The Wireless Zero Configuration Utility cannot control the complete set of security features of the radio Select ThirdPartyConfig in the Active Profile drop down list as the active profile Warmboot the VX7 The Summit Client Utility passes control to Wireless Zero Config and the WZC Wireless Information control panel Using the options in the Wireless Zero Config panels setup radio and security settings To switch back to the SCU select any other profile in the SCU Act
372. w the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running LXE s RFTerm program IBM 5250 Keypad Overlay esc A ano Y CAPS Mere ms X WxxvWgyO WNCviWca WCavW sr Benes FA F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 7 9 amp ns ELN CTRL oP whet eal vi ul Dol el X t PgU 3066660060083 Home f PgDn Wf END lt DEL Y gt Go6ococooo0oBo08 Figure 2 32 IBM 5250 Specific Keypad The 60 key keypad is available with an IBM 5250 overlay designed to allow the user to enter terminal emulator commands when running LXE s RFTerm program VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC The Keyboards 57 Key Maps The 60 key keyboard supports all 101 keyboard functions However because the keyboard only has 60 keys all functions are not visible or printed on the keyboard Therefore the VX7 keyboard supports what is called hidden keys keys that are accessible but not visible on the keyboard The hidden keys supported by the VX7 are listed in Appendix A Key Maps NumLock and the VX7 The 60 key keyboard does not have a NumLock indicator or key NumLock can be toggled On or Off using the lt 2 gt lt SHIFT gt lt F10 gt keypress sequence For information on preserving NumLock configuration after a reboot please see Configuring NumLock Behavior in Chapter 3 System Configuration Keyboard Backlight The LXE keyboard keys are backlit Backlight control depends on the system software revision
373. which contains the word OK if the action completed successfully rather than with an error For processing level messages Enter is logged at the beginning of the function specified in the message and Exit is logged at the end just before the return of the function specified in the message Message Explanation and or corrective action Level Error reading hotkey The hotkey is read but not required by AppLock LOG_EX Error reading hotkey using default A hotkey is required If there is a failure reading the LOG_ERROR hotkey the internal factory default is used App Command Line lt Command Command line of the application being locked LOG PROCESSING line App Application name gt Name of the application being locked LOG PROCESSING dwProcessID lt gt Device ID of the application being locked LOG EX Encrypt exported key len lt gt Size of encrypt export key LOG EX Encrypt password length lt gt The length of the encrypted password LOG_EX Encrypted data len lt gt Length of the encrypted password LOG_EX hProcess lt gt Handle of the application being locked LOG_EX Key pressed lt gt A key has been pressed and trapped by the hotkey LOG_EX processing EEE ERNE ES The status information is being saved to a file and the LOG_EX file has been opened successfully Address of keyboard hook AppLock found the kbdhook dll but was unable to get LOG_ERROR proced
374. wing configurations e LXE VMT 95 key QWERTY keyboard with integrated pointing device a customized rugged keyboard connected to the VX7 via a watertight connector e LXE VMT 60 key QWERTY keyboard a customized rugged keyboard connected to the VX7 via a watertight connector e A standard PS 2 keyboard via an adapter cable attached to the Keyboard Mouse port on the VX7 The adapter cable also provides a connector for a PS 2 mouse e A USB keyboard via a dongle cable attached to the Ethernet USB connector e A software keyboard or virtual keyboard can be displayed on the touchscreen The virtual keyboard can be used in place of or in addition to a physical keyboard For more details on each keyboard type please refer to the appropriate section later in this chapter 95 key with Integrated Pointing Device Oceeeeceoe e sae 60 key Figure 2 28 The LXE VMT Keyboards with Cable E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 54 The Keyboards The 95 key QWERTY Keyboard with Pointing Device Key Maps Designed for ease of use with the Windows CE operating system the 95 key keyboard with pointing device connects via a cable to the keyboard port on the VX7 Additional Windows keys the Windows logo key and the Application key and an integrated pointing device are provided alajajaJajajajaJalalela JUD OUDDODUDUOC arararamararamararara Termes 0 EJE E JEJKEJE JU 8 JNJ E JE C JE ES HU Figure 2 29 The
375. with the PC 3 Click the Disconnect button or remove the cable to disconnect 4 To modify the Synchronization settings see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC Synchronizing from the VX7 using Serial or RF connection You must have set up ActiveSync on your desktop computer and completed the first synchronization process before you initiate synchronization from your device 1 To initiate synchronization from your device tap Start Programs Communication ActiveSync to begin the process Click the Connect button Tap the Syne Now button to synchronize with the PC Tap the Disconnect button to disconnect tno ED a a To modify the Synchronization settings see the Options icon on the ActiveSync window on the desktop PC VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Start Menu Program Options 87 Connect Connect is used to initiate a hardwired connection to a host Several pre defined connect setups are included in the factory setup e COMI direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud e COM3 direct connect at 57600 or 115200 baud e USB direct connect The default connection is USB direct connect After a connect setup is selected Start Programs Communication Connect will start to connect to a host After this connection is made and an ActiveSync relationship established the ActiveSync menu item can be used to establish the connection over the radio link See Also Important Information Cold B
376. work key Key index n Key provided automatically IEEE 802 1X Authentication Enable 802 1 authentication on this network EAP type TLS y Figure 5 43 Wireless Network Properties Enter the Network name SSID into the text field For PEAP MSCHAP and EAP TLS set Encryption to TKIP and Authentication to WPA For WPA PSK see WPA PSK Authentication Configuration To configure the IEEE 802 1X Authentication box see the following sections for configuration of each authentication protocol VX7 Reference Guide E EQ VX7RG L ARC Cisco Radio 235 PEAP MS CHAP Authentication Configuration The Microsoft supplicant authenticates a user with the PEAP MS CHAP protocol The Cisco CAB file without Cisco PEAP must be used with PEAP MS CHAP See Installing Radio Drivers earlier in this chapter for more information Configuring the PEAP MS CHAP Supplicant Wireless Network Properties Network name SSID peapTest This is a computer to computer ad hoc Wireless network key WEP This network requires a key for Encryption TKIP Authentication we A y network wireless access points are not used Network key Key index fr Key provided automatically IEEE 802 1X Authentication Enable 802 1X authentication on this network EAP type PEAP y Figure 5 44 PEAP MSCHAP Wireless Network Properties With the radio parameters configured see Wireless Network Configuration earlier in this chapte
377. yboard Backlight The LXE keyboard keys are backlit By default the keyboard backlight and the display share the same timer which is configured in the Windows CE Control Panel When the display is On the keyboard backlight is also On Please refer to Control Panel Options in the VX7 Reference Guide for more information The keyboard backlight can also be manually controlled using the backlight key in the upper right hand corner of the keyboard Pressing the backlight key cycles the keyboard backlight through the levels of backlight intensity e Off e Maximum intensity e Medium intensity e Low intensity E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 56 The Keyboards The 60 key QWERTY Keyboard The 60 key keyboard has 101 keyboard functions including a numeric keyboard pad Please refer to Appendix A Key Maps for keypress combinations This keyboard is also available with either an IBM 3270 or IBM 5250 overlay esc oup W CAPS Menea R S waor Or Ove x4 hv ox Benes F1 A ro Ars Ars M r5 B roc HM F7 A rs d ro M rio 7 9 o A amp INS ELN TRL OEA q a PgUp 2 00000000005 Home W PgDn W END lt DEL gt 0600000000009 Figure 2 30 The 60 key QWERTY Keyboard IBM 3270 Keypad Overlay 0009090990099 800 cL oD whch rly ul GOD TAE sol eLeLsL s eL T z s 000000000009 Figure 2 31 IBM 3270 Specific Keypad The 60 key keypad is available with an IBM 3270 overlay designed to allo
378. ypad the System Administrator must first assign a Status User key sequence for the end user when they want to toggle the Status Popup Window on or off The System Administrator must also assign a Status Admin key sequence to perform the same function Status popup window display options taskbar icons are assigned on the Status Popup tab E g AC Power ActiveSync WLAN radio CapsLock Network status Bluetooth status etc Saving Changes to the Registry The VX7 saves the registry when you e Tap Start Run then type Warmboot Tap OK e Install Restart in the Start menu by Start Run then type CTL RESTART 1 and tap the OK button Tap Start Restart The registry save process takes 0 3 seconds If nothing has been changed nothing is saved e g 0 seconds The registry is automatically saved every 20 minutes It is also saved every tenth time the registry settings are changed Registry settings are changed when control panel applet e g Date Time parameters are changed by the user and a warm boot was not performed afterward When you tap the Start Run then type Coldboot and tap the OK button factory default registry settings are loaded during coldboot All changes and settings are lost E EQ VX7RG L ARC VX7 Reference Guide 24 Getting Help Getting Help All LXE manuals are now available on one CD and they can also be viewed downloaded from the LXE website Contact your LXE representative to obtain the LXE Manuals CD Y

VX7 Reference Guide - L - ARC - Honeywell Scanning and Mobility

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents